JP2020054720A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 having a so-called limiting function for always setting a jackpot probability of a special pattern to a low-probability state each time when a predetermined number of jackpots occur is configured such that a "setting suggestive performance" is easily won as the number of winning times of a jackpot type disadvantageous to a player approaches the number of limit times. Also, the Pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to more concretely and easily suggest a winning probability of a lottery for executing a "setting suggestive performance" and contents of a probability setting value of the Pachinko machine 10 in the "setting suggestive performance" by winning a jackpot again in a situation in which a hold-back jackpot is won during a hold-back period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, in the case of winning, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a special symbol low probability state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, a special symbol high probability state). Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number In addition, there is a game machine having a function (a so-called limiter function) for transitioning a game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295672 A

  For such a gaming machine, it is necessary to enhance the interest in the game and to increase the player's willingness to play, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can generate a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information based on the establishment, a determination means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means, and a predetermined lottery result being derived by the determination means. A special game generating means for generating a special game state capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player, wherein a set value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result by the determination means is derived can be set. Setting means; first shifting means for shifting a game state after the special game state to the first game state when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result; Lottery results Then, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived, a second shift means for shifting a game state after the special game state to the second game state, and the predetermined lottery Counting means for counting the number of times that the result has been derived, counting updating means for updating the counting result of the counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, Gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the machine to a player, wherein the determining means determines that the predetermined lottery result derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number. As a lottery result, a normal-time determination unit capable of deriving the first lottery result or the second lottery result, and the predetermined number when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit reaches the predetermined number. Lottery Arrival time determining means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result, wherein the gaming machine information suggesting means transmits setting value information regarding the setting value set by the setting means to the gaming machine. Setting information suggesting means for suggesting as information, frequency information suggesting means for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, frequency information on the number of derivations counted by the counting means, and start of the setting value information suggestion by the setting information suggesting means There is provided a start timing non-overlapping means for executing a timing and a suggestion start timing of the number information by the number information suggesting means so as not to overlap.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to generate a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the determination is made based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. A determination information obtaining means for obtaining information; a determination means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means; and a predetermined lottery result derived by the determination means. A special game generating means for generating a special game state capable of giving a game value of, setting means capable of setting a set value relating to the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determination means, As a predetermined lottery result, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived, a first transition means for transitioning the game state after the special game state to the first game state, and as the predetermined lottery result, 1st extraction When a predetermined second lottery result different from the result is derived, second transition means for transitioning the game state after the special game state to the second game state, and the number of derivation times at which the predetermined lottery result is derived Counting means for counting the number of times that the predetermined lottery result has been derived is counted by the counting means, and count updating means for updating the counting result of the counting means. Gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting to the player, the judging means, when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result as the predetermined lottery result. The normal-time determination means capable of deriving the lottery result or the second lottery result, and when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined lottery result is used as the predetermined lottery result. 2 Arrival time determination means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the selection result, wherein the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to suggest setting value information on the setting value set by the setting means as the gaming machine information. Information suggesting means, number-of-times information suggesting means for suggesting the number-of-times information on the number of derivations counted by the counting means as the gaming machine information, suggestion start timing of the setting value information by the setting information suggesting means, and the number of times Start timing non-overlapping means for executing the suggestion start timing of the number information by the information suggesting means so as not to overlap. Thereby, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. It is the figure which showed an example of the jackpot random number table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the special figure 1 big hit type table. It is the figure which showed typically the special figure 2 big hit type table. It is a figure showing typically the game flow in a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed an example of the number table of reservations typically. (A) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of an A table of a stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a B table of a stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a C table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss, and (b) is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hits. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss, and (b) is a figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for special figure 2 big hits. It is the figure which showed an example of the big hit opening table typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device. It is the figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion lottery table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the suggestion content lottery table typically. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the holding information storage area and the execution information storage area. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart showing a special figure change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a limit process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the hit processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening / closing control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a process during opening performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flow chart which shows setting suggestion lottery processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation effect processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the figure which showed the case where "round match" was selected as the execution timing of "setting suggestion effect", and (a) showed the state where the big hit result was derived in the variable effect in the third symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the state where the big hit game is started from the state of (a) and the 5th round is performed, (b) is a figure, and (c) is a figure which shows the big hit game from the state of (b). Is a diagram showing a state in which the “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the sixth round with the progress of the big hit game from the state of (c) with the seventh round being performed. FIG. It is the figure which showed the case where "other round" was selected as the execution timing of "setting suggestion effect", and (a) showed the state where the big hit result was derived in the variable effect in the third symbol display device. FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a state in which the big hit game is started from the state of FIG. 13A and the fourth round is being performed, and FIG. 13C is a view showing a big hit game from the state of FIG. 13B. Is a diagram showing a state in which the “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the fifth round as a result of the progression of the jackpot game in the fifth round. FIG. It is a figure showing a state. It is the figure which showed the case where "round match" was selected as the execution timing of "setting suggestion effect", and (a) showed the state where the big hit result was derived in the variable effect in the third symbol display device. It is a figure which shows the state where the big hit game is started from the state of (a) and the 5th round is performed, (b) is a figure, and (c) is a figure which shows the big hit game from the state of (b). Is a diagram showing a state in which the “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the sixth round with the progress of the big hit game from the state of (c) with the seventh round being performed. FIG. (A) is a figure showing typically an example of a special figure 1 big hit random number table of a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a special figure 2 big hit random number table of a 2nd embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the special figure 1 big hit classification table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit effect process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the case where "round match" was selected as the execution timing of "setting suggestion effect" of 4th Embodiment, (a) shows the fluctuation effect in the 3rd symbol display device of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the state where the jackpot result was derived, (b) shows the state where the "round start display" indicating that the jackpot game is started from the state of (a) and the first round is started is displayed. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the first round is being performed from the state of (b), and (d) is a state where the jackpot game has progressed from the state of (c) It is a figure showing the state where the "round start display" indicating that the sixth round started was displayed, and (e) shows the state in which the sixth round is performed from the state of (d), and in the sixth round, " Shows the state in which `` setting suggestion effect '' is executed And a drawing, (f) is a diagram showing a state in which 7-th round from the state of "round start indicator" indicating that begins is displayed in (e).

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch for guiding the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis and the front frame The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door open switch (not shown) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). .

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing a player to select the effect content in a so-called super reach, which is one mode of the variable effect.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described later, the ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 is moved to a specific winning opening (a first starting port 64a described later or a first winning opening). 2 start port 64b, see FIG. 3) is executed in response to a ball (start winning prize), and after a symbol (third symbol described later) is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the symbol is stopped and displayed. This is an effect of presenting the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize (whether or not it is a big hit) to the player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 have uniformity. In the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of “city stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage” are provided. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described fluctuation effects and reach effects executed during the fluctuation effects are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

  The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during a high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize the third symbol. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the status is repeatedly changed in the order of “town stage” → “sky stage” → “island stage” → “town stage” →. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  In addition, when an effect element of “normal reach” to be described later is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect element of “normal reach” evolves into an effect element of “super reach” to be described later. When it is performed, it is configured such that a selection screen of an effect element of “super reach” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in an effect element of “normal reach”.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of effect element candidates that can be selected as effect elements of “super reach” are displayed, and one of the effect element candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, based on the effect element candidate selected at the time of developing into the effect element of “super reach” (ie, at the end of the selection screen), the content of the effect element of “super reach” is determined. The effect element of “super reach” is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed down. However, instead of the frame button 22, a predetermined direction (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the , Rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or an effect element of “super reach” may be selected.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred, is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit.

  In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the sphere in the sphere firing unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

  On a main board constituting the main control device 110, a setting key 501 used when a person related to the hall changes a set probability set value or confirms a set probability set value, The setting change switch 502 used when updating the probability set value by being operated during the setting change, and when the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 110) is to be initialized, or when the probability set value is changed during the setting change. And a probability display device 504 that can display a probability set value.

  The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erase switch 503 are provided so as to protrude from the main board through the holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by persons involved in the hall without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main board covered by the board box 100.

  The setting key 501 is inserted into a keyhole provided on the setting key 501 by inserting a dedicated key managed by a person related to the hall, etc., so that the OFF side indicated by “OFF” and the ON side indicated by “ON” It is configured to be rotatable between these two positions. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, and turned on when it is located on the on side. Each state is configured to be maintained unless operated.

  The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability set value by being operated at the time of changing the probability set value (that is, “setting change mode” described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed.

  The RAM erasure switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 when operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The RAM erasure switch 503 is used when changing the probability set value (ie, “setting change mode” described later) and ending the update of the probability set value (ie, ending the “setting change mode”). Is done.

  In the first embodiment, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, when the power switch is turned on), the main control device is set on condition that the setting key 501 is in an off state. A RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data is output to 110. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the dispensing control device 111 to execute a dispensing initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Further, the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability set value is terminated when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in the state in which the probability set value can be updated (that is, the “setting change mode” described later), The state in which the value can be updated is ended, and the state shifts to a normal game state.

  The probability display device 504 displays the probability set value when the probability set value is confirmed (that is, “setting confirmation mode” described later) or when the probability set value is changed (that is, “setting change mode” described later). It is configured as follows. The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, in a playable state or when the power is turned off) and the probability set value is not displayed, while the probability set value is to be displayed (that is, described later). In the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

  Here, a start-up mode when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Is configured.

  As the start-up modes of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of a "RAM clear mode", a "setting change mode", a "setting confirmation mode", and a "normal mode" are prepared.

  The “RAM clear mode” is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 to return the pachinko machine 10 to an initial state.

  The “setting change mode” is a mode for changing the set probability set value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting change mode”, the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated each time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the setting change switch 502 is pressed during the “setting change mode”, the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the probability setting value is updated with the update of the probability setting value. The display on the display device 504 is also changed.

  The “setting check mode” is a mode for checking the set probability set value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting confirmation mode”, the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

  The “normal mode” is a start-up mode other than the “RAM clear mode”, the “setting change mode”, and the “setting check mode”, and is used when the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or stored in the RAM 203. Except in the case where the data is broken, in a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power-off, executing various startup processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203. is there.

  In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erase switch 503 (that is, in the off state) and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 with the setting key 501 kept in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “RAM clear mode”.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting change mode”. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the “setting check mode”.

  In addition, when data is erased in the “RAM clear mode”, when the update of the probability setting value is ended in the “setting change mode” and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the “setting confirmation mode”, When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the “normal mode”, and the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

  As described above, if the setting key 501 is turned off when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a person related to the hall or the like can turn on the pachinko machine 10 according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select either the “RAM clear mode” or the “normal mode” which is a start-up mode not related to the probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the person involved in the hall can start up the pachinko machine 10 according to whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on or not. As the mode, either “setting change mode” or “setting confirmation mode” related to the probability setting value can be selected.

  That is, a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a startup mode irrelevant to the probability set value can be selected according to whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on. When the startup mode is not related to the probability set value, whether the startup mode is the “RAM clear mode” or the “normal mode” depends on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when the startup mode related to the probability set value is set, the startup mode is set to the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on or not. Can be selected.

  Here, if the probability set value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed, so if the game is continued while taking over the game state before the power is turned off, for example, the jackpot probability in the pending fluctuation effect, The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined game performance, such as inconsistency with the jackpot probability of the variable effect obtained from now on, or the jackpot counted as the limit number described later is added up with the different jackpot probability. May not be able to be exhibited. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the “setting change mode”. On the other hand, since the “setting confirmation mode” is a startup mode in which the probability setting value is merely confirmed, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (cleared) so that the game can be continued while taking over the game state before the power was turned off. do not do).

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the “setting change mode” in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the “setting check mode” in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The power was turned on.

  As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. . When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “RAM clear mode” or the “setting change mode” for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed while the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed (while being turned on). Turn on. That is, if the person involved in the hall understands the meaning of each start-up mode, he can easily understand what kind of operation is required as an operation on the pachinko machine 10 necessary for the start-up mode to be started up.

  In addition, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 having the high probability of the jackpot, or suppressing the probability setting value from being changed to the high probability (high setting) without permission. Further, since the RAM erase switch 503 is provided at a position where the player does not normally touch easily, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability set value to a high probability.

  Further, even when the switch or the like to be operated at the same time is started in the "setting change mode", there are two switches, and the switch can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that the operability is good. As described above, the person in charge of the hall or the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively using the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”, a door opening switch (not shown) for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is open when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ) May be on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open.

  This is because, in order to change or check the probability set value, it is necessary for the person in charge of the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. 12 is required to be open. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 does not start in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode”. As in the case where the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the “normal mode” when the RAM erasing switch 503 is off, and in the “RAM clear mode” when the RAM erasing switch 503 is on. Start 10 As a result, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 being on. It is possible to prevent the game from being started in 10. Also, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, it is possible for the player to open the inner frame 12 without permission, check the probability setting value, search for the pachinko machine 10 with the high jackpot probability of high probability, or change the probability setting value to high probability without permission. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as viewed from the front, and a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the normal electric role 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64 a, the second starting opening 64 b, the ordinary electric utility 64 c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a wood screw or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

  In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins.

  Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first special symbol or the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is triggered by a ball entering the first opening 64a (start winning) or a ball entering the second opening 64b (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs a fluctuation effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and a ball of the through gate 67. And a normal symbol display device 83 that is configured by an LED that performs a variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as a “variable display”) with the passage of the trigger as a trigger. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of a 17-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Are displayed (not shown).

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the special symbol display device 37, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is the third. This is performed by the symbol display device 81. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the back symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached patterns that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets on almost the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by a main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a fluctuating display (fluctuating effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) Is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (fluctuation effect). The main display area Dm, and the other upper third are the sub-display areas Ds for displaying announcement effects, characters, and the like. Further, a cockpit display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the lower bottom side center portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right. A symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, a symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and a display area. The symbol row Z3 is displayed on Dm3.

  In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display. Particularly, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each variation effect, a third symbol is displayed on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped and displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is arranged on the pay line L1, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area for displaying a character and a preview effect image. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player a sense of expectation that will result in a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db displays the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display (fluctuation effect) has not been executed among the balls entered into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Is the area where

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the transition to the big hit is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a beeper in this embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a black boy. The notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair of the user, the color of the normally white bee, or the appearance of another character.

  On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is moved to the first symbol. When the ball enters the one starting port 64a, the number of times of ball entry (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of the reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Is also shown. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (in a normal display mode, “○” symbol) White symbols)) are displayed, and the number of suspended balls for the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol is displayed according to the number of the retained symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d. Is done.

  That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Is one time, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first / second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Is twice, and when three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Is three times, and when four reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol Is four times. In addition, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, there is a fluctuating effect in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and the reserved symbols are reserved. Indicates not to.

  Also, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is moved to the first symbol. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the number of times of ball entry (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special first to fourth reserved symbol display regions Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display region Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display region Db. Is also shown. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (in a normal display mode, “○” symbol) White symbols)) are displayed, and the number of suspended balls for the floating effect of the second special symbol is displayed in accordance with the number of the retained symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d. Is done.

  That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Is one time, and when two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol Is twice, and when three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol Is three times, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four when one reserved symbol is displayed in each of the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d. Is four times. In addition, when the reserved symbol is not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of the reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0, and there is a fluctuating effect that is reserved. Indicates not to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. Is configured. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the lottery games being executed is completed, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored, respectively. Is configured to execute the second lottery game of the second special symbol in preference to the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority change). The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning (so-called winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (so-called special order). (FIG. 1 special figure 2 simultaneous fluctuation).

  At the center of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variable effect is being executed in the main display area Dm. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided at the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, It is configured such that an execution symbol larger than each of the reserved symbols displayed in each of the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d is displayed. Also, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbol. You.

  The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased when the variable effect ends, and with the elimination of the execution symbol, the held symbol displayed is on the lower side (the right symbol if the first special symbol, the right symbol). It is moved and displayed as the reserved symbol (left side if 2 special symbols). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there is no reserved symbol of the second special symbol and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the end of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted along with the above, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a moves as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. (Shift) is displayed. Also, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Also, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

  Also, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deleted. In this case, the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. In addition, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

  In addition, in 1st Embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball | ball number of the fluctuation | variation effect based on the ball entering into the 1st starting port 64a or the 2nd starting port 64b was each held up to four times at the maximum, the maximum holding was carried out. The number of balls is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls need not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps each indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum number of holdings of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number may be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (ordinary symbol) are alternately turned on each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the first embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the ordinary electric hand 64c above the second starting port 64b in a front view becomes a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a time.

  The number of retained balls in the through gate 67 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number of balls is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 37 and also illuminated by the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84. Normally, four symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the reserved number is displayed based on the number of the ordinary symbol retaining lamps 84 lit.

  In addition, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the ordinary symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and also the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. 81 may be used. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not always necessary to perform the lighting display by the ordinary symbol retaining lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first starting port 64a, a first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. The control device 110 (see FIG. 5) performs a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol. The display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 37b1 above the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. An effect is performed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  On the right side of the game board 13 in a front view and below a through gate 67 described later, there is provided a second starting port 64b into which a ball can enter only when the ordinary electric hand 64c is in an open state. ing. When a ball enters the second starting port 64b, a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second starting port switch is turned on. The control device 110 (see FIG. 5) performs a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol. The display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED group 37b2 below the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. An effect is performed. In addition, the second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports where one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters.

  As described above, above the second starting port 64b when viewed from the front, the single plate-shaped ordinary electric hand 64c that covers the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b is provided. The normal electric hand 64c projects from the board of the game board 13 to cover the opening to the second starting port 64b in a closed state, and immerses in the board of the gaming board 13 to close the opening of the second starting port 64b. It is configured to be displaceable between an open state and an open state. In the normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the ordinary electric hand 64c protrudes from the board, and the ball cannot enter (or hardly enters) the second starting port 64b. I have.

  On the other hand, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol of “○”, the ordinary electric hand 64c of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric hand 64c is operated, the normal electric hand 64c is immersed in the board from the state in which the normal electric hand 64c protrudes from the board, and the second starting port 64b is in the open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83, a stop is made at the symbol of “○” and a hit is made, and the ball is thrown into the second startup port 64b by opening the second startup port 64b. It can be in a state where many jackpot lotteries can be performed.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first starting port 64a, and a large rectangular winning port (large opening port, also referred to as a specific winning port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, a predetermined number of times (16 times or 4 times), a large winning opening 65a which is normally closed, is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). Until you do).

  When the special winning opening 65a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, the special winning opening 65a is closed, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the special winning opening 65a to play the game. As a provision of a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The variable prize winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the special winning opening 65a, and a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The large winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the big win opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which it is easy to win the big win 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  The variable winning device 65 is disposed at a position where a ball can enter the special winning opening 65a in both left-handed and right-handed games. Is turned on, and by counting the number of times that the special winning opening switch is turned on, the number of balls winning the special winning opening 65a is counted. The closing condition of 65a is determined. In addition, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to turning on of the special winning opening switch. Then, the open state and the closed state of the special winning opening 65a are repeated by the jackpot, so that many balls easily enter the special winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As an award, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. This state is one form of a special game state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A special winning opening and a large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit is lit on the special symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning opening, the gaming state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening may be formed as a special gaming state. .

  A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a sphere passes in a vertical direction. When the ball fired in the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on. A lottery will be held.

  When it is determined that a win has been achieved as a result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed through the ordinary symbol variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83. After that, the normal electric utility 64c provided above the second starting port 64b in a front view is operated. As a result, the board of the ordinary electric utility 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, is immersed and movable into the board surface of the game board 13 from the state in which the second starting port 64b is closed, The state is such that the ball can enter the second starting port 64b only for the time, or the ball can easily enter the ball compared to the closed state.

  A special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b, each of which is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, is provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 3) of the game area when viewed from the front. Have been. The special symbol display device 37 includes a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 1”) and a second special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 2). Each variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 2”) is performed (hereinafter, the variable display of both special symbols may be referred to as “dynamic display”). The game state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

  The status LED group 37a indicates the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (entered) the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b described later. This is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. In addition, the state LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors indicates various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

  The “round” in the jackpot means a period from the opening of a large winning opening 65a described later to the closing of the large winning prize hole 65a in order to separate the number of winning balls of the jackpot, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls are won while the large winning opening 65a is open.

  The special LED group 37b is composed of an upper LED group 37b1 composed of six LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 composed of six LEDs in total, that is, a total of 12 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, a first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed. In the lower LED group 37b2, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

  Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 has a dynamic display until a change time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the first starting port 64a provided in the center of the game board 13 is elapsed. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LED of the upper LED group 37b1 is turned on one by one in order from the uppermost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol indicating the determination result (first embodiment) In this example, the stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols according to the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs.

  Further, the lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (dynamic display time) until a fluctuation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning in the second starting port 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 elapses. In the first embodiment, the lower LED group 37b2 sequentially turns on the lower LED from the uppermost LED one by one, and repeatedly displays the lighting pattern. Depending on the combination of the respective lighting patterns of the six LEDs, stop display is performed in a total of 64 types of stop symbols.

  In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, the type (type) of the big hit is corresponded. Each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a ball hits the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b as a jackpot (a jackpot lottery). Is also determined.

  The jackpot types determined here include “probable change A” corresponding to “16 rounds (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as“ R ”) probable change jackpot”, “probable change B” corresponding to “4R probable change jackpot”, “Latency probability change A” corresponding to “4R latency probability change jackpot”, “Time reduction A” corresponding to “4R time reduction jackpot”, and “Push-through A” corresponding to “4R time reduction no jackpot” are prepared ( 8 and 9).

  Here, the jackpot type of “probable change A” corresponding to “16R probability change jackpot” means that after the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter, “ Until the occurrence of the next big hit), it becomes a high probability state compared to the "normal gaming state", and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is also a high probability state compared to the "normal gaming state" until the next big hit occurs. It is a jackpot that shifts to a “probability variation state”.

  In addition, the jackpot type of “probable change B” corresponding to “4R probability change jackpot” means that after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a high probability state until the occurrence of the next jackpot, The normal symbol hit probability is a big hit that shifts to the “probability changing state” until the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times. In the “probability variation state” based on the jackpot type “probability variation B”, after the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed 100 times, the state becomes the “latency probability variation state” described later.

  In addition, the jackpot type of "latency probability change A" corresponding to "4R latent probability change jackpot" means that after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot occurrence. On the other hand, the normal symbol hitting probability shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “latency probability changing state”) which is a low probability state equivalent to the “normal gaming state” (a so-called “no electricity support” state). It is a big hit.

  In addition, the jackpot type of “hour reduction A” corresponding to “big hit with 4R time reduction” is a low probability that after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is equivalent to “normal game state”. While the game is in a state, the hit probability of the normal symbol shifts to a gaming state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “time-saving state”) in which the special symbol has a high probability until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. That is.

  Furthermore, the jackpot type of “rush-through A” corresponding to “4R time-saving no jackpot” is a low jackpot in which the special jackpot probability of each special symbol is equal to the “normal gaming state” after the maximum number of rounds is four round jackpots. It is a big hit that shifts to a gaming state in which the state is a probability state and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is a low probability state equivalent to the “normal gaming state” (ie, the “normal gaming state”).

  Here, each gaming state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “normal gaming state” refers to a gaming state that is not a “probability variation state”, a “latency probability variation state” or a “time reduction state”, and the jackpot probability of each special symbol. And a state in which the normal symbol win probability is in a normal state (that is, a low probability state) and the normal electric hand 64c is opened for a short time (a so-called non-open extended state). In other words, the "normal game state" has a lower jackpot probability for each special symbol than in the "probability change state" and "latency probability change state", and is more normal than in the "probability change state" and "time reduction state". Since the winning probability of the symbol is low, and the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is also short, the playing state in which a ball can easily win the second starting port 64b when a so-called right-handed game is played (hereinafter referred to as the The state in which the ball easily wins in the second starting port 64b is not the "winning assist state" in some cases, but is the most disadvantageous (low advantage) gaming state for the player.

  Note that the right-handed game refers to an act of shooting a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view, and the game board 13 of the variable display device unit 80 in a front view. A ball can win the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the second starting port 64b arranged on the right side. The left-handed game refers to an act of causing a shot ball to pass through the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front, and the ball can win the general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, or the variable winning device 65. Hereinafter, the term “right-handed game” or “left-handed game” refers to a state in which a ball is fired in the above-described firing mode, respectively.

  In the first embodiment, a right-handed game is allowed only in the “probability change state” or the “time shortened state”, and when the right-handed game is performed in the “normal game state” and the “latency probability change state”, A predetermined alarm function is provided to prevent the player from playing the right-handed game. Specifically, in the “normal game state” and the “latent probability change state” where left-handed game is encouraged, when the passage of a ball is detected by the through gate 67 arranged on the right side of the game board 13 in front view, It is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, and the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 6) is configured to output an alarm sound. , The warning sound is not output even if the ball passes through the through gate 67. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress execution of a right-handed game by the player in the “normal game state” and the “latency probability fluctuation state” in which the right-handed game is not encouraged.

  Next, in the “time shortened state”, the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a low probability state as in the “normal game state”, but the hit probability of the ordinary symbol increases, and the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is increased. A state in which the ball is likely to be awarded to the second starting port 64b due to a long time (hereinafter, a function in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and the open time of the normal electric hand 64c is long is referred to as a "prize assist function" In addition, a state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric hand 64c is long and the ball can easily be awarded to the second starting port 64b is referred to as “ In some cases, the state will be referred to as "a state in which the winning assist function is activated." That is, the "time shortened state" is a state in which the big hit by the special symbol is equal to the "normal game state", but the hit by the normal symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the normal electric hand 64c is long. Therefore, in the “time shortened state”, the ball fired by the right-handed game is easy to win in the second starting port 64b, so that the dynamic display of the special map 2 can be continuously executed, and the second It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, one per prize) based on a prize in the starting port 64b and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of possessed balls.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “time reduction state” is, as described above, after the jackpot type “hour saving A” (see FIG. 8 or FIG. 9), the predetermined number of times predetermined for each of the jackpots. It is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol (100 times in the first embodiment) is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the specified number of special symbols is executed (that is, after the “electric support end”), the state is shifted from the “time reduction state” to the “normal game state”. (See FIG. 10).

  Next, in the “latency probability fluctuation state”, the jackpot probability of each subsequent special symbol is increased as a value added after the end of the jackpot, while the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is low like the “normal game state”. State. In other words, the “latency probability fluctuation state” is a state in which the jackpot result with the special symbol is easily derived, while the hit with the ordinary symbol is equivalent to the “normal gaming state”. Therefore, in the “latency probability change state”, the winning assist function is not activated, and it is difficult to win the second starting port 64b even when performing a right-handed game. A game is performed so that a ball is made to win in the first starting port 64a by a left-handed game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a special symbol is dynamically displayed in the “probability change state” after the jackpot of the jackpot type “latency probability change A” (see FIG. 8) or after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probability change B”. Is executed 100 times, and then enters a “latency probability fluctuation state”. In the “latent probability change state”, the high probability state of the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the low probability state of the normal symbol hit probability are maintained until the next big hit. That is, once the player enters the “latency probability fluctuation state”, the “latency probability fluctuation state” is continued until a jackpot game with the next special symbol occurs. Furthermore, in this “latency probability fluctuation state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, so that the jackpot game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol (special game state) is likely to occur. Can be performed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect performed in the “latency probability fluctuation state” is configured to execute an effect equivalent to the “normal game state”. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the player is playing the game in the “normal game state” or the game in the “latency probability fluctuation state” from the effect contents, and in which game state the player is playing the game. The game can be performed while estimating whether or not the game is possible, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, in the “probability variation state”, the jackpot probability of each subsequent special symbol is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased. The auxiliary function is activated. In other words, the "probability variation state" is a state in which the jackpot result with the special symbol is easily derived, the winning result with the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric hand 64c is longer. Therefore, in the “probability change state”, the winning assist function is activated, and almost all the balls fired by the right-handed game enter the second starting port 64b, so that the dynamic display of the special figure 2 is continuously displayed. In addition to being able to execute the game, it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, one piece / prize) based on the winning in the second starting port 64b and play the game while suppressing the decrease of the possessed ball. It is possible to play a game in a state where a jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display is likely to occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “probability variation state” can occur after the jackpot of the jackpot type “probable change A” or “probable change B” (see FIG. 8 or FIG. 9), as described above. In the case of the type “probable change A”, it is maintained until the next big hit occurs, and in the case of the big hit type “probable change B”, a specified number of times (in the first embodiment, 100 times) the special symbol is dynamically displayed. You. In the case of the “probability variation state” based on the jackpot type “probability variation B”, after the dynamic display of the specified number of special symbols has been executed (that is, after the “electric support end”), the “probability variation state” To "latency probability fluctuation state" (see FIG. 10).

  Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper special LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probable change A”, and the jackpot type “probable change B”. , 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, 12 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “hours saving A”, and corresponding to the jackpot type “rush-through A”. There are a total of 64 display patterns, i.e., 12 display patterns. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, it can be recognized that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot types "probable change A", "probable change B", and "concealment probable change" A, “time saving A”, or “rush-in A” is configured so that it is difficult to identify which one is the stop display.

  In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 32 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type “probable change A”, and There are 31 display patterns corresponding to "A", for a total of 64 display patterns. Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, it is possible to recognize that the stop display of the losing has been stopped, while one of the jackpot types “probable change A” or “time saving A”. It is configured that it is difficult to identify whether the display is the stop display.

  With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, unless all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are grasped. It is difficult for the player to recognize the type of the winning jackpot. Therefore, for example, in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the player has won the “latency probability change A”, the third symbol display device 81 displays the jackpot result corresponding to “rush-through A” as a temporary display. In addition, by executing an effect equivalent to “rush-through A” even after the end of the big hit game, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state the game state is. In addition, even if the “winning A” has been won in the second special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 displays the jackpot result corresponding to “time saving A” as a temporary display, Even after the game is over, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state the game state is by executing an effect equivalent to “time saving A”. As a result, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to estimate in which game state the player is playing a game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time when the later-described ordinary electric hand 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is opened or one time by the ordinary symbol is changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to change the number of times the ordinary electric utility 64c is opened at a time. Specifically, in the “time reduction state” or the like, the time during which the ordinary electric utility 64c attached to the second starting port 64b is opened is made longer than in the “normal game state”, The number of times the electric utility 64c is opened may be made larger than in the case of the “normal game state”. Further, in the "time reduction state", at least two of simultaneously increasing the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol, increasing the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c, and increasing the number of times of opening the ordinary electric hand 64c are performed simultaneously. You may do so.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. The balls that have entered the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch provided for each winning opening to detect the entry of balls. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

  In addition, on the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein.

  The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol holding lamp 84, and a front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the special winning opening 65a as an axis. Various solenoids 209 including a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing and a normal electric combination solenoid for driving the ordinary electric combination 64 c are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. To send various commands and control signals.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery of each special symbol, the setting of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display result of the variable display in the ordinary symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a lottery, is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  In addition, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, and a jackpot release table 202f. Main controller 110 executes the above-described main control using various counters and the like stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

  Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used to perform a jackpot lottery, a setting of dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, a setting of a variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of a variable display display result in the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the like. Is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 are set. A jackpot type counter C2 used to select a symbol stop type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select a staging mode of a variable effect, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. And a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 22). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first reserved ball storage area 203d including four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved sphere storage area 203e including areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d in accordance with the timing of entering the first starting port 64a. Is done. In addition, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e according to the timing of entering the second starting port 64b. Each is stored.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot random number table 202a according to the first embodiment has a low probability state used for the special symbol low probability state in which the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortening state" for each set value. And the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" which is a high probability state of a special symbol having a high probability that the gaming state is a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types.

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is differently set. Further, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for shifting from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for from the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss. In this way, by changing the number of jackpot random numbers according to the game state, the jackpot probability is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the big hit random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 (big hit random value) which becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the big hit random number table 202a. Are 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “1” is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (ie, 0.5) %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become the jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the value “0 to 499” is the jackpot random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol having the set value “1” is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%). The high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9950 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “50”. "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number) is the remaining 9500 other than the jackpot random number, and the value “500 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). That is, the loss probability of each special symbol having the set value “1” in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) is 9950/10000 = 99.5 / 100 (that is, 99.5). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (ie, “probability variation state” and “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9500/10000 = 95/100 (ie, 95%) It is set to be.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 52, and the value “0 to 51” is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “2” is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (ie, 0.52 %).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “2”, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that are the jackpots in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and the value “0 to 519” is the jackpot random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol of the set value “2” is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5. 2%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 other than the jackpot random numbers, and the value “52”. "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is the remaining 9480 other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values “520 to 9999” are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “2” is 9948/10000 = 99.48 / 100 (that is, 99.48). %), And the loss probability of each special symbol in the high probability state (ie, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) is 9480/10000 = 94.8 / 100 (ie, 94 .8%).

  Therefore, the set value “2” in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the set value “1” (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: (5% → 5.2%), a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 which becomes the big hit in the low probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 54, and the value “0 to 53” is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “3” is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (ie, 0.54 %).

  On the other hand, if the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (jackpot random number value) that is a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and the value “0 to 539” is the jackpot random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol having the setting value “3” is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5. 4%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9946 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “54”. "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 9460 other than the jackpot random value, and the value “540 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” and the “time shortening state”) of each special symbol having the setting value “3” is 9946/10000 = 99.46 / 100 (that is, 99.46). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9460/10000 = 94.6 / 100 (that is, 94 .6%).

  Therefore, the setting value “3” in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value “2” (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: (5.2% → 5.4%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the setting value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the value “0 to 55” is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “4” is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56 %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become the jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and the value “0 to 559” is the jackpot random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability fluctuation state” and the “latent probability fluctuation state”) of each special symbol having the setting value “4” is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.100). 6%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “56”. "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9440 other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values “560 to 9999” are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). In other words, the loss probability of each special symbol having the set value “4” in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time shortening state”) is 9944/10000 = 99.44 / 100 (that is, 99.44). %), And the loss probability of each special symbol in the high probability state (ie, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) is 9440/10000 = 94.4 / 100 (ie, 94 .4%).

  Therefore, the setting value “4” in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “3” (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: (5.4% → 5.6%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 58, and the values “0 to 57” are: It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol having the set value “5” is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (ie, 0.58) %).

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which is a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and the value “0 to 579” is It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol with the setting value “5” is 580/10000 = 5.8 / 100 (that is, 5. 8%), and the special symbol high-probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is “58”. "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9420 remaining numbers other than the jackpot random numbers, and the values “580 to 9999” are defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). That is, the loss probability of each special symbol having the set value “5” in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time shortening state”) is 9942/10000 = 99.42 / 100 (that is, 99.42). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (ie, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9420/10000 = 94.2 / 100 (ie, 94 .2%).

  Therefore, the setting value “5” in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability compared to the setting value “4” (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: (5.6% → 5.8%), which is a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

  Next, when the set value is "6", the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the value "0 to 59" is It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (ie, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol of the set value “6” is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (ie, 0.6) %).

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and the value “0 to 599” is the jackpot random number. It is defined (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol having the set value “6” is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%). The high-probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low-probability state.

  Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (losing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 9940 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "60". "~ 9999" is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random value) which is lost is 9400 other than the jackpot random value, and the value “600 to 9999” is defined in the jackpot random number table 202a ( Settings). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the “normal game state” and the “time reduction state”) of each special symbol having the setting value “6” is 9940/10000 = 99.4 / 100 (that is, 99.4). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, the “probability variation state” and the “latent probability variation state”) of each special symbol is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%). It is set to be.

  Therefore, the setting value “6” in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly larger jackpot probability than the setting value “5” (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: (5.8% → 6%), a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  In this way, by changing the jackpot winning probability for each probability set value and changing the jackpot winning easiness, it is possible to change the payout rate for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the variation in the playability of the game performed in the pachinko machine 10, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines a jackpot type when a jackpot is reached, and is incremented by one in a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”), and the maximum value (for example, “0 to 99”) is obtained. In the case of a counter capable of taking the value of "", the value returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)).

  Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot among the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. The random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation area which is the same as the first reservation area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot among the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation area that is the same as the second reservation area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

  Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number (big jackpot random value) which is a big hit, That is, if it is a random number (losing random number value) that results in a loss, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of the loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (small jackpot random value) that is a big hit, the fluctuation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are those at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the big hit are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of “0 to 99”, and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. Are provided.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 and FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the corresponding special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 by clearing the RAM, the number of special symbol jackpots is a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, six times. Each time the game reaches the predetermined number of times, the game state after the end of the jackpot at the time when the predetermined number of times is reached is always shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is prohibited. A function (a so-called limit (limiter) function) is provided. That is, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 by clearing the RAM, every time the number of special symbol jackpots reaches six (hereinafter, when the number of special symbol jackpots reaches the limit number is referred to as “at the time of reaching the limit” In the event that there is no jackpot type in which the special symbol has a high probability state after the end of the jackpot (hereinafter, the event in which the jackpot type in which the special symbol has a high probability state after the end of the jackpot is not selected, the "limiter is activated" It is configured so that only the jackpot type that becomes the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends can be selected.

  On the other hand, when the number of jackpots of the special symbol has not reached the limit, that is, the number of jackpots is 1 to 5 (hereinafter, the number of jackpots of the special symbol is 1 to 5 times is referred to as “before reaching the limit”). Is sometimes configured to be able to select a jackpot type that becomes a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  With such a configuration, the special symbol low probability state can be always set every time a predetermined number of jackpots is generated, and the special symbol high probability state continues to be an excessive jackpot "rensho". The occurrence can be suppressed. As a result, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game in the pachinko machine 10 (the number obtained by dividing the number of paid-out balls (the number of safe balls) by the number of out-balls; a so-called machine split). Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "ball rate"), and it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the game result appears, so that the game value given to the player does not become too high. Further, in order to make the payout rate of the present pachinko machine 10 equal to the payout rate of a normal pachinko machine having no limiter function, a decrease in the payout rate due to the limitation of the number of “renshou” is specially determined. It is possible to compensate by making it easier to generate a jackpot of the symbol, or to make the continuation rate of the high probability state of the special symbol high before reaching the limit, so that it can be compensated by ordinary pachinko machines without limiter function It is possible to realize a versatile game that cannot be performed.

  In addition, the “ren-so” means that a favorable state occurs again from a state clearly advantageous to the player. In the first embodiment, the “probability changing state” or the “time” in which the right-handed game is performed is performed. In the "shortened state", it means that any of the jackpots is won again. Therefore, if the jackpot is won during the “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state” where a right-handed game can be performed, it corresponds to the “ren-so” and the “probability fluctuation state” or “time reduction state” ends. After that, it is not notified whether or not the game is in the "normal game state" or the "probability change state", and the "winning assist function" is not activated. Does not correspond to the so-called “renso” (corresponds to the so-called “first time” jackpot).

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol. The special condition is further divided into a group of the gaming state in which the jackpot has occurred, and the special symbol type (ie, the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and the special symbol in the group. Is a table in which the jackpot type according to the type is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the jackpot probability of the ordinary symbol are both in the high probability state until the next jackpot. After the maximum probability of four rounds of jackpots corresponding to the "variable state" and the maximum number of rounds of four, the special symbol jackpot probability becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the special symbol dynamic display is executed 100 times. Until the normal symbol hit probability becomes a high probability state, the “probability variation B” corresponding to the “probability variation state”, and after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds, the special symbol jackpot probability becomes the high probability state On the other hand, the "latency probability variation A" corresponding to the "latency probability change state" in which the hit probability of the symbol is normally a low probability state, and the maximum number of rounds is four After winning, the special symbol has a large jackpot probability of a low probability state, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, it corresponds to a "time shortened state" in which the normal symbol winning probability becomes a high probability state There is a "time saving A", and a "rush-through A" in which, after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are both in a low probability state.

  The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the limit reaching presence or absence and the game state at the time of the jackpot occurrence are different. On the other hand, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each other.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8, if the big hit of the first special symbol occurs before reaching the limit and in the "normal game state", the big hit for the "probable change A" The value “0-9” of the type counter C2 is associated, the value “10-29” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “probability change B”, and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “latency probability change A”. Are associated with “30-89”, and the value “90-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time saving A”. If the first special symbol jackpot has occurred before reaching the limit and in the “latency probability variation state” (the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state” are also the same), the “probable variation A” On the other hand, the value "0-9" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated, the value "10-19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability B", and the jackpot is obtained with "latency probability change A". The value “20-89” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “90-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time saving A”.

  That is, in the winning / non-winning lottery of the first special symbol in the “normal gaming state” before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. If the value of C1 is a value that is a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probable change A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “25”, “20” is set as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "43", the jackpot is determined. "Latent probability variation A" is determined as the different value of the jackpot type counter C2 is equal to "95", "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the win / loss lottery of the first special symbol in the “latency probability fluctuation state” before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the value of the counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 big hit type. Determined from the table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probable change A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “12”, it is determined as the jackpot type. If the “probable change B” is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “25”, Ri "latent probability variation A" is determined as the type, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state”, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “probable change A” is 10% and the jackpot type of “probable change B” is 20%. , The jackpot type of “latent probability change A” is 60%, and the jackpot type of “time saving A” is 10%. Also, in the “latency probability fluctuation state”, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “probable change A” is 10% and the jackpot type of “probable change B” is 10%. 10%, the big hit type of "latency probability change A" is 70%, and the big hit type of "hour reduction A" is 10%.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state” and the “latency probability change state” before reaching the limit, the selection ratios of the jackpot types “probable change A” and “time saving A” are the same (both are 10%), but the “normal game state” In the “state”, the jackpot type “probability change B” is more likely to be selected than the “latency probability change state” (20%> 10%), and the jackpot type “latency probability change A” is harder to be selected (60% <70%). ing. Since the "probability fluctuation state" having the prize assist function is more advantageous for the player than the "latency probability fluctuation state" having no prize assist function, the "probability fluctuation state" Is configured such that a special symbol jackpot is more likely to occur than in the "normal gaming state", but a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player in the "normal gaming state" than in the "latency probability fluctuation state" is selected. .

  Next, in the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8, if a big hit of the first special symbol occurs at the time of reaching the limit, any game including the “normal game state” or the “latency probability fluctuation state” Even in the state, the value "0-89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "rush A", and the value "90-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "hour saving A". It is attached.

  That is, in the winning or losing lottery of the first special symbol in all the gaming states at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Is a jackpot type, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “rush-through A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “95”, “ Time saving A "is determined.

  Therefore, in all game states, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “rush A” is 90%, the jackpot type of “hour saving A” is 10%, Will be elected.

  Therefore, before the limit is reached, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types “probable change A”, “probable change B” and “latency probable change A”) that generate the high probability state of the special symbol in the first special symbol win / loss lottery reach the limit. At times, it is configured to be replaced with a jackpot type (ie, jackpot type “rush A”) that generates a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal symbol. For this reason, in the situation where the limit is reached when the next big hit occurs, a state in which the left-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, the “normal game state” or the “latency probability fluctuation state”) ), There is a high possibility that even if a jackpot is won, the game is likely to be shifted to the “normal gaming state”, and a disadvantageous (low advantage; the same applies hereinafter) game result for the player is easily derived. It has become.

  Next, in the example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 9, the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed before the limit is reached and in all the game states including the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state”. When a big hit occurs, the value "0-89" of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with "probable change A", and the value "90-99" of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A". It is attached.

  That is, in the winning / non-principal lottery of the second special symbol in all the game states including the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state” before reaching the limit, the big hit of any of the second reservation areas in the second reservation ball storage area 203e. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the random number counter storage area 203e1 is a value that is a jackpot, it corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area. The attached jackpot type is determined from the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probable change A” is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined. Is "95", "hour reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

  Therefore, in all the game states including the “probability change state” and the “time reduction state”, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “probable change A” is 90 %, And the big hit type of "hour reduction A" is 10%.

  Therefore, in the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state” before reaching the limit, the selection ratio of the jackpot type “probable change A” in the second special symbol is configured to be equal (both are 90%) and the jackpot type “ The selection ratio of “time saving A” is configured to be equal (both are 10%). As a result, in the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time shortened state” before the limit is reached, a large amount of game value is given (ie, 16 rounds of jackpots), and the game state after the jackpot state is won until the next jackpot. The game state is such that the jackpot type “probable change A” that is the jackpot at which the auxiliary function operates is easily given.

  Next, in the example of the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 9, when a big hit of the second special symbol occurs at the time of reaching the limit, any game state including the “probability change state” and the “time shortened state” , The value "0-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "hour reduction A".

  In other words, in the winning or losing lottery of the second special symbol in all gaming states at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. Is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area is the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2. , And the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is any value, and “time saving A” is determined as the jackpot type.

  Therefore, in all the game states including the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state”, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the limit is reached, the jackpot type of “hour reduction A” is 100%. Will be elected.

  Therefore, before the limit is reached, the jackpot type that generates the high probability state of the special symbol in the second lottery winning / bad lottery drawing (that is, the jackpot type “probable change A”) generates only the normal symbol high probability state when the limit is reached. It is configured to be replaced with a jackpot type (ie, "time saving A"). For this reason, in a situation where the limit is reached when the next big hit occurs, a state in which the right-handed game is performed and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, a “probability variation state” or a “time reduction state”). If the jackpot is won, it will be shifted to at least the "time reduction state" if the jackpot is won. Therefore, when the limit is reached, it is better to win the jackpot in the second special symbol than to win the jackpot in the first special symbol This is an advantageous result for the player. For this reason, when the limit is reached, the game result depends on whether or not the player is staying in the game state in which the right-handed game is performed, so that the player creates a game property of how to continue the game state of the right-handed game. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the so-called “normal game state” and “latency probability variation state” in which execution of a left-handed game is encouraged, since the winning assist function is not activated, the right-handed game is performed. It is easier to perform a left-handed game and make the first winning port 64a win a ball than to make the second starting port 64b win a ball. For this reason, the player is configured to be able to execute a game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol by performing the left-handed game in the “normal game state” or the “latency probability variation state”. It is configured such that a game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed by performing a right-handed game. In the so-called “probability change state” and “time reduction state” in which execution of a right-handed game is encouraged, since the winning assist function is activated, a left-handed game is performed and a ball is inserted into the first starting port 64a. Rather than winning, it is easier to make a ball in the second starting port 64b by performing a right-handed game. For this reason, the player is configured to be able to execute a game based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol by performing a right-handed game in the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state”, It is configured such that a game based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed by performing a beating game. Therefore, in the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2, the value of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with each game state in order to correspond to the above-mentioned event.

  Here, referring to FIG. 10, a transition of the game state (the so-called game state) based on each of the jackpot types and the like in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the gaming state and the winning type in each gaming state. Flow) will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a game flow based on a win or the like in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 10 illustrates a transition of the game state based on the fire mode that is encouraged in each game state, and a fire mode that is not encouraged in each game state (for example, a left-handed game in the “probability change state”). The transition of the game state based on the first special symbol (fluctuation effect of the first special symbol) is an irregular case, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with four game states of a “normal game state”, a “latency probability change state”, a “probability change state”, and a “time reduction state”. When the player fires a ball at a winning opening 64a, 64b that can win or is easy to win in the game state in which the player is staying, and makes the ball win at one of the winning openings 64a, 64b. The game is played while paying attention to whether or not a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol to be executed.

  In the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, first, a game is started in a “normal game state”. In the “normal game state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, and the jackpot is hardly generated. Further, in the "normal game state", the winning assist function is not activated (so-called no electricity support state), and it is difficult for the second starting port 64b to win a ball. For this reason, the player aims to generate a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol by performing a left-handed game and firing a ball toward the first starting port 64a in the “normal gaming state”. Play games. Then, when a ball wins in the first starting port 64a and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transfer destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit.

  Here, in the "normal game state", if the jackpot type "probable change A" is won before reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning assist function is activated until the next jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" ". In addition, if the jackpot type "probable change B" is won before the limit is reached, the prize assist function is activated until the special symbol dynamic display is performed 100 times after the jackpot state based on the jackpot. To a “probability variation state”. Further, if the player wins the jackpot type “latent probability change A” before reaching the limit, the state shifts to the “latency probability fluctuation state” after passing through the jackpot state based on the jackpot. In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot type “hour saving A” before or at the time of reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot is reached, a prize is won until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The state shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the auxiliary function operates. In addition, when the jackpot type “rush A” is won when the limit is reached, the state returns to the “normal gaming state” after passing through the jackpot state based on the jackpot.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in each of the jackpot states based on the dynamic display of the special symbol, the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol is prohibited, and the execution is suspended. It becomes a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be executed. In this state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol and the operation mode of the ordinary electric hand 64c are configured to be in a state equivalent to the “normal gaming state” (ie, a low probability state and a non-open extended state). .

  Next, when the state shifts to the “latency probability change state”, the prize assist function is not activated in the “latency probability change state”, similarly to the “normal game state” (so-called no electric support state). It is in a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port 64b. On the other hand, in the “latency probability fluctuation state”, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, and the jackpot is more likely to occur than in the “normal game state”. For this reason, the player performs the left-handed game and fires the ball toward the first starting port 64a in the “latency probability fluctuation state”, similarly to the “normal game state”, and the dynamic of the first special symbol is performed. A game is played with the aim of generating a big hit in the display. Then, when a ball wins in the first starting port 64a and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transfer destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit.

  In the first embodiment, the “latency probability fluctuation state” is configured so that an effect equivalent to the “normal game state” is performed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot mode (variable probability “A” or “variable B” of the jackpot type, “potential probability variation A” or “rush-through A” of the bonus type, or “probable variation” B "or" time saving A "jackpot design), the effect in the state of the jackpot, or the mode of the variable effect at the time of stay, etc. are the same or substantially the same in the" latency probability fluctuation state "and the" normal game state " The content is executed. With this configuration, it is difficult to determine whether the player is playing a game in the “latency probability fluctuation state” or a “normal game state”, and it is determined which game state the player is in. The aim is to create a game that can be guessed and to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, in the "latency probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot type "probable change A" is won before reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning assist function is activated until the next jackpot. State ”. In addition, if the jackpot type "probable change B" is won before the limit is reached, the prize assist function is activated until the special symbol dynamic display is performed 100 times after the jackpot state based on the jackpot. To a “probability variation state”. Further, when the player wins the jackpot type “latent probability change A” before reaching the limit, the state changes to the “latency probability fluctuation state” again after passing through the jackpot state based on the jackpot. In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot type “hour saving A” before or at the time of reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot is reached, the prize assistance is performed until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The state shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the function operates. Further, if the jackpot type “rush A” is won at the time of reaching the limit, after going through the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the state shifts to the “normal game state”.

  Next, when the state shifts to the "time reduction state", the special symbol big hit probability is the low probability state in the "time reduction state", equivalent to the "normal game state". On the other hand, in the “time reduction state”, the winning assist function is activated (so-called “electric support” state) from the end of the big hit until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. By winning the win in the display, it is in a state where the ball can be easily won in the second starting opening 64b. For this reason, during the “time reduction state”, the player performs a right-handed game and shoots a ball toward the through gate 67 and the second starting port 64b, thereby obtaining a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Play games aiming to generate. Then, when a ball wins in the second starting port 64b and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transfer destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit.

  Here, in the “time reduction state”, if the jackpot type “probable change A” is won before reaching the limit, after passing through the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the prize assist function is activated until the next jackpot. ". In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot type “hour saving A” before or at the time of reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot is reached, the prize assistance is performed until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. It stays in a "time-saving state" where the function operates.

  That is, in the “time reduction state” in which the right-handed game is recommended, as long as the right-handed game is performed, the jackpot type “latent probability change A” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting port 64b. 2 It is configured not to shift from “time reduction state” to “latency probability fluctuation state” when a special jackpot is won. Also, in the “time reduction state”, the jackpot type “rush-through A” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b as long as the right-handed game is performed. It is configured such that when the game is won, the state does not shift from “time reduction state” to “normal game state”. Therefore, in the case of winning the second special symbol jackpot in the “time shortened state”, the jackpot type having the prize assist function is won regardless of the case before the limit is reached or at the time of reaching the limit. It is configured to shift to a game state equivalent to or superior to the "shortened state" (the jackpot probability of a special symbol is changed from a low probability state to a high probability state). Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the "time shortened state", the game does not shift to the gaming state disadvantageous (less advantageous) than the "time shortened state", and the right-handed game including the jackpot state is continuously performed. It is possible to execute.

  In the “time reduction state”, the jackpot type “probable change B” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting port 64b. Therefore, if the jackpot that generates the “probability change state” is won, The jackpot type is “probable change A”, that is, “the probability variation state in which the winning assist function is activated until the next jackpot”. Therefore, in the “time shortened state”, a game property of how to win the jackpot in which the “probability fluctuation state” occurs is created. Therefore, for example, even if the limiter is activated while the “probability fluctuation state” is continuing and the “time reduction state” is entered, the right-handed game is performed again during the “time reduction state”. Is won (so-called withdrawal) for the jackpot (ie, jackpot type “probable change A”) that is executed (continued), so that the jackpot limiter (limit of the number of times) is initialized and the next jackpot is won. The auxiliary function is activated. And when it becomes the "probability fluctuation state" which becomes the high probability state of the special symbol, in the "probability fluctuation state", it becomes possible to make the jackpot type "probable change A" consecutively up to the jackpot limit number of times, It is possible to increase the game value that can be provided by the withdrawal. As a result, the player's willingness to play in the “time shortened state” can be stimulated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “time reduction state”, the dynamic display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) without a big hit occurring in the dynamic display of the special symbol. In this case (the so-called power support end), the operation of the winning assist function is stopped (finished), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low, and the gaming state without the winning assist function, that is, the "normal gaming state" Move to. In this case, since the winning assist function does not operate, the execution of the left-handed game is suggested to the player, and the right-handed game is changed to the left-handed game.

  Next, when the state shifts to the “probability variation state”, the “stochastic variation state” is the same as the “latency probability variation state”, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, and the “normal game state” or “time reduction state” Big hits are more likely to occur. Also, in the "probability variation state", similarly to the "time reduction state", the prize assist function is activated (so-called "electric support" state), and the winning is won in the variable display of the normal symbol, so that the second starting is performed. It is in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the mouth 64b. For this reason, in the “probability variation state”, the player performs a right-handed game and fires a ball toward the through gate 67 and the second starting port 64b, generating a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Play the game aiming to make it. Then, when a ball wins in the second starting port 64b and a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning, the game state of the transfer destination is determined according to the big hit type of the big hit.

  Here, in the “probability change state”, if the jackpot type “probable change A” is won before reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot, the winning assist function is activated again until the next jackpot. Fluctuating state ". In addition, in the case of winning the jackpot type “hour saving A” before or at the time of reaching the limit, after the jackpot state based on the jackpot is reached, a prize is won until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. The state shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the auxiliary function operates.

  That is, in the “probability change state” in which the right-handed game is recommended, similarly to the “time reduction state”, the jackpot type “Hidden probability change A” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting port 64b. The system is configured so that when a winning is made, the state does not shift from “probability fluctuation state” to “latency probability fluctuation state”. Similarly, in the “probability fluctuation state”, since the jackpot type “rush A” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting port 64b, when the jackpot is won, the “probability fluctuation state” → “normal game state” ”Is not configured. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", if the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in both cases before reaching the limit and at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot type having the prize assist function is won in both cases before reaching the limit and in the case of the jackpot. , And the right-handed game can be continuously executed.

  In addition, in the “probability change state”, the jackpot type “probable change B” is not selected based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b as long as the right-handed game is performed, so the jackpot of the second special symbol is won. In such a case, it is configured not to shift from the “probability variation state” in which the prize assist function is activated until the next big hit to the “probability variation state” in which the prize assistance function is activated until the dynamic display is executed a predetermined number of times. Have been. That is, in the "probability change state", if the jackpot type in which the "probability change state" occurs again is won, the winning assist function always wins the jackpot type that continues until the next jackpot, so the current "probability change state" The state is shifted (maintained) to a game state equivalent to the state. Therefore, in the “probability fluctuation state”, a game property of how to win a jackpot in which the “probability fluctuation state” occurs again before the limiter operates is created. Therefore, it is possible to drive the player's willingness to play in the “probability changing state” to improve the interest of the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the “probability variation state” having the limit of the number of the winning assist function, that is, the “probability variation state” triggered by the jackpot type “probability B” is equivalent to the “time reduction state”. Is configured to be performed. Specifically, for example, the jackpot mode (a jackpot symbol or the like) of the variable effect that has triggered the transition, the effect in the state of the jackpot, or the mode of the variable effect after the end of the jackpot, etc., are set to the jackpot type “probable change B”. The same or substantially the same contents are executed in the “probability change state” and the “time reduction state” as a trigger. With such a configuration, at least while the (second) special symbol is dynamically displayed a predetermined number of times, the player is playing in the “probability variation state” or in the “time reduction state”. This makes it difficult to determine whether the player is playing a game, and creates a game property for estimating which game state or not, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the “probability fluctuation state” having the limit of the number of the winning assist function, that is, the “probability fluctuation state” triggered by the jackpot type “probability change B”, does not cause a big hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol. When the target display is executed a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 100 times) (so-called electric support end), the operation of the winning assist function stops (ends), and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state. However, the game state shifts to a game state having no winning assistance function, that is, a “latency probability fluctuation state”. In this case, since the winning assist function does not operate, the execution of the left-handed game is suggested to the player, and the right-handed game is changed to the left-handed game.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the “probability fluctuation state” and the “time reduction state” or the “latency probability fluctuation state” and the “normal game state”. There are cases. With this configuration, for example, whether the player has won the jackpot type “hour saving A” due to the operation of the limiter, the jackpot type “probable change B” before reaching the limiter, or the limiter It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the jackpot type “rush A” has been won or the jackpot type “latent probability change A” before reaching the limiter. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the limiter has been reached, and to create a game property for estimating whether or not the limit has been reached, to increase the willingness to continue the game and to enhance the interest of the game. I'm trying.

  In addition, the probability that each big hit type is selected in the case of a big hit is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  Further, the probability of selecting the jackpot type may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to add, for example, "1" in order within a range of "0 to 99" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99").

  In the first embodiment, the rough production mode of the fluctuation production at the time of the jackpot and the loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of the fluctuation productions suspended and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Selected. Specifically, only the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which “reach display” does not occur, and “variable element of“ normal reach ”as“ reach display ”are executed. A “normal reach” production mode, a “super-reach” production mode in which the “super-reach” variable element is executed by developing from the “normal-reach” variable element, and a “special-reach” mode that also evolves from the “normal-reach” variable element And the "special reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "" is executed are selected.

  Here, each production mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode (hereinafter, “non-reach (long)” production mode and “non-reach (short)” production mode are collectively referred to. Then, the “non-reach” effect mode may be referred to as “a non-reach” effect mode), in which the three symbol columns (not shown) fluctuate as a special symbol fluctuating effect. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the two symbol columns that stop first after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” in which the “shutter” is shuffled at high speed does not generate “reach display”.

  Note that the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” is, for example, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row is shifted at a high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. Refers to a variable element that is scrolled to. In this “high-speed change”, the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the variable effect previously stopped and displayed is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” is executed except for a specific production mode (“non-reach (short)” production mode). It is configured to be.

  The variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” means that in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation”, the third symbol is reduced at a speed visible to the player. Means a variable element that is scrolling. In the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row is stopped and displayed in order while the player recognizes the display content of the third symbol. When the same third symbol is stopped in two symbol columns (for example, the left symbol column and the right symbol column) to be stopped and displayed first, it is determined that "reach display" has occurred and the symbol has developed into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol columns are stopped and displayed, and the variable effect is ended. The details of each variable element including the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” or the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” will be described later.

  Therefore, in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row stops in order, and stops first. The third symbol, which is different from the two symbol columns to be stopped, stops, the remaining one symbol column stops, and one variable effect ends. On the other hand, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element is not performed, and after the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element ends, each symbol row is simultaneously displayed. The third symbol, which is stopped and stops in two symbol columns (for example, the two symbol columns that stop first in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode), stops, and the other symbol columns also stop, and the fluctuation of 1 The production ends.

  In the effect mode, the “normal reach” effect mode refers to “floating effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, which is“ immediately after the same third symbol stops in the two symbol columns to be stopped and displayed first. The variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and is one of the production modes of the other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" which does not develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

  Among the effect modes, the “super reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “super reach” variable element is developed from the “normal reach” variable element.

  Among the effect modes, the “special reach” effect mode is one of the “reach display” effect modes in which the “normal reach” variable element is developed and the “special reach” variable element is executed.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 of the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64a is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area to be stored. At the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 of the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting port 64b is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area to be stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is controlled in accordance with the success or failure of the variable effect, the current game state, and the number of the variable effects of the two special symbols currently on hold (the number of balls on hold). The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected based on the number of floating effects (the number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when determining a detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, first, based on the reserved number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, whether or not the fluctuation effect is appropriate, the current game state, and the current game state are determined. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (the number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, an effect mode that is a rough mode of the variable effect is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and a value of a variation type counter CS1 described later.

  The plurality of types of the stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected differs for each of the stop pattern tables 202d. The reason why the plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variable effect in accordance with the validity of the variable effect, the game state, and the number of retained balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “probability fluctuation state”, “latency probability fluctuation state”, “time reduction state”. Alternatively, the selection ratio of the production mode is changed according to whether the game is in the “normal game state” and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable production being reserved.

  The first reason is to change the degree of expectation to be a big hit for each effect mode. That is, in the case of winning in the jackpot lottery and in the case of losing the jackpot lottery, a stop pattern, that is, a “non-reach” production mode, a “normal reach” production mode, a “super reach” production mode, and a “special reach” production By configuring the selection ratios of the modes to be different from each other, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is changed for each effect mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the “super reach” production mode or the “special reach” production mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the “non-reach” production The mode and the "normal reach" effect mode are configured to be easily selected.

  With such a configuration, the “super reach” production mode and the “special reach” production mode can be a large-hit production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode and the “non-reach” production mode are hard to hit. It is possible to produce an effect that does not produce a big hit or a big hit, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a big hit for each effect mode. Therefore, when an effect that easily hits the fluctuation effect appears, while the effect that easily hits is performed, it is suggested to the player that a jackpot is likely to occur, and the interest of the game is enhanced. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a jackpot, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to hit. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is the rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a loss, it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit, and the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is based on the stop pattern table 202d that is easy to select an effect that is hard to hit. Configure to select. Thereby, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a jackpot is easily generated in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. In this case, a jackpot is less likely to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the jackpot expected value for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

  Further, as a second reason, the number of times of entering the first starting port 64a in the state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible the useless balls (so-called non-lottery of special symbols due to overflow prize) based on the ball entering the second start-up port 64b in the state of reaching.

  More specifically, the maximum number of standby times for the variable effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four each, and the variable effect is executed for at least a fixed time. In the game state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b in the "variation state", "latency probability variation state", and "time reduction state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these game states, if a fluctuating effect with a long fluctuating time is selected, the ball frequently enters the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the angle and the second starting port Despite having entered the ball at 64b, the second special symbol lottery opportunity cannot be obtained. Also, in the “normal game state”, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is held during the execution of the fluctuation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, it is not possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. In such a state, the player determines that the game value is not obtained even if the ball is thrown into the first starting port 64a, and the variable effect is exhausted and the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. Until the ball is fired, the game is interrupted. When the game is interrupted, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced, which affects the management of the game hall.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a gaming state in which it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), or a value close to (or coincides with) the maximum number of reserved balls. With the number of reserved balls, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which the short change time is easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has been reached. it can.

  Further, as a third reason, by setting a long execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the state in which the variable effect is executed is maintained for a long time. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (absent), a ball is newly inserted into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b within the changing time of the running variable effect. If the ball is not balled, the next fluctuation effect cannot be started, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the case where the fluctuation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the player plays a game by firing a ball, it is possible to obtain an interest relating to the jackpot lottery required by the player. Instead, it gets excited to the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the variable effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, There is a possibility that the game with the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped because it is determined that the game value is difficult to obtain.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which the long change time is easily selected when the number of balls to be changed is small. I have. This makes it difficult for a situation in which the variable effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 to be maintained, and the execution state of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

  Here, the details of the number-of-reservations table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically illustrating the number-of-reservations table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when performing a fluctuating effect based on a ball having entered the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, Based on the gaming state at that time and the total number of floating effects of the special figures 1 and 2 at that time as well, refer to the reserved number table 202c and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3. Is configured. Then, the rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

  Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in FIG. 11, when the loss of the “normal game state” or the “latent probability variation state” in which the left-handed game is performed is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is “1” In the case of "~ 3", or when the loss is extracted in the "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is performed and the total number of reserved balls is "1", the stop pattern table The A table 202d1 of 202d (see FIG. 12A) is selected.

  Further, when the loss is extracted in the “normal game state” or the “latent probability variation state” in which the left-handed game is performed and the number of reserved balls is “4 to 8”, or the right-handed game is performed. When the loss is extracted in the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state” and the number of retained balls is “2 to 8”, the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12B) is used. Selected.

  Furthermore, at the time of winning the jackpot, any game state (ie, “normal game state”, “latency probability change state”, “probability change state” or “time reduction state”), and any number of reserved balls (ie, (1 to 8), the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 12C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

  In other words, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based on only the jackpot type, regardless of the number of reserved balls or the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no match (ie, at the time of a loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of retained balls and the game state at that time.

  In addition, even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a jackpot is won, a relatively short variation pattern is easily selected in the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the variation element of “high-speed variation” is a “super reach” production mode of 5 seconds or “ Special reach "production mode etc.) may be selected.

  In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, the effect mode in which only the time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started in a state where the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, even if the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed in 5 seconds, At the time point when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds ends (at the time point when it is recognized as a variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds), “reach display” may occur in the fluctuation effect. For this reason, even when the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” for 5 seconds is performed, an effect mode in which “reach display” is executed other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is executed. By doing so, at the time of execution of the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element for 5 seconds, it is not possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss.

  Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” production mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” production mode is “95” to “95”. 97, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is set to “98”, “99”. In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “75” to “94”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is “95”. To "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98, 99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, and the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set so as not to be selected. ing.

  That is, in the A table 202d1, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio. In the B table 202d2, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is 75%, the “normal reach” effect mode is 20%, the “super reach” effect mode is 3%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 2%. It is set to be the selection ratio.

  Therefore, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the A table 202d1, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the B table 202d2 instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively longer variation time of the selected variation effect than the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 is more likely to have the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect shorter than the A table 202d1.

  The selection ratios of the “normal reach” effect, the “super reach” effect, and the “special reach” effect with the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be equal.

  In this way, when the loss lottery result is extracted, the effect form of the variable effect is selected based on the number of balls on hold for the variable effect on hold. For example, when the number of pending balls in the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. Thereby, when the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened, and the execution number of the variable effect is increased, whereby the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be increased.

  Also, for example, when the number of pending balls for the variable effect is small, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is used in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is long is selected. Thereby, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected can be performed, and thus the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. The situation in which the variable effect is being executed by making it easier to secure the ball entry time for the ball, and by increasing the possibility that a new starting prize will occur during the execution time of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. Can be maintained.

  In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that is selected based on the number of balls to be held in the variable effect is configured to be different when selecting the effect mode in the loss effect variable effect. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected by the determination of the variable effect based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variable effect based on the start of the variable effect based on the entering ball. Is configured.

  Specifically, in the case of a loss effect fluctuating effect, one of the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of retained balls in the fluctuating effect, but the A table 202d1 And the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is the same, and is assigned to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

  That is, the only difference is whether the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected based on the number of pending balls for the variable effect. The same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the time of the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same effect mode even when the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even in the case where a prefetch notice is given based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, an effect that does not cause inconsistency with the contents of the lookahead notice in the variable effect that is the target of the prefetch notice. Can be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 12C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “super reach” effect mode is set to “5” to “39”, and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “special reach” effect mode is “40” to “40”. 99 ". In the C table 202d3, the stop pattern table 202d is selected at the time of the big hit, and since "reach display" always occurs, each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

  That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set such that the “normal reach” effect mode is 5%, the “super reach” effect mode is 35%, and the “special reach” effect mode is 60%.

  Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of the “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode, and the “normal reach” production mode> It is set so that the selection ratio increases in the order of “super-reach” effect mode> “special reach” effect mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation degree at the time of appearance of each “reach display” is likely to show the jackpot display result in the order of “special reach” production mode> “super reach” production mode> “normal reach” production mode It is configured to be. Thereby, the degree of expectation to the big hit can be indicated to the player according to the type of the effect form of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy a sense of excitement to the big hit according to the effect state of the executed variable effect.

  As described above, the situation in which a game is played by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of executions of the variable effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

  In the case where the number of retained balls in the variable effect is large (for example, “4”), when “reach display” is selected, the stop pattern in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” of each “reach display” is shortened A table 202d may be provided. In addition, when the number of reserve balls in the variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of “low-speed change” is omitted in each effect mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d in which the selectivity of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of pending balls of the variable effect may be provided. However, in the case where the selectivity of each effect mode is different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect, in performing the pre-reading notice, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the subject of the pre-reading notice There may be a case where the number of reserved balls at the time of performing the variable effect is different. In such a case, it is necessary to perform a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, so that the process becomes complicated.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to add “1” in order within a range of “0 to 9” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value (that is, “9”). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 22). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. The big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding area where the random number counter C1 is stored. At the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 64b. The big hit random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second holding area where the big random number counter C1 is stored.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used for determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. In other words, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 for detailed information on the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 perform the reach type and the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The change mode is determined, and the presence or absence of the announcement effect and the execution mode of the advance effect are determined.

  As described above, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough change pattern of the change effect and determines only the change time. With this configuration, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control of a preliminary lottery or the like necessary for executing the variable effect, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variable effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary for the main control device 110 to prepare commands for all the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby performing the fluctuation effect. The degree of freedom for selection can be increased. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes every moment, it is possible to select or change the effect contents of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 includes, as a variation pattern table 202e, a variation pattern table 202e1 for a special figure 1 loss which is used when the first special symbol is lost and is commonly used in all game states, and when the big hit of the first special symbol is achieved. The special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2 commonly used in all game states, and the special figure 2 loss variation commonly used in all game states when the second special symbol is lost. A pattern table 202e3 and a special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 that is used at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol and is commonly used in all game states are prepared.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. FIG. 14A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation pattern table 202e2, and FIG. 14A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variation diagram table for special figure 2 loss stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 14B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, each of the variation pattern tables 202e1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected effect mode.

  Specifically, as the production mode at the time of the loss, “E0: non-reach (long)” and “non-reach (short)” productions referred to when the “non-reach (long)” production mode is determined “E1: non-reach (short)” referred to when the aspect is determined, “E2: normal reach” referenced when the “normal reach” production mode is determined, and “super reach” production mode Are determined when “E3: Super Reach” is referred to when the “Special Reach” effect mode is determined. In addition, as the production mode at the time of the big hit, “E5: normal reach” referred to when the “normal reach” production mode is determined and “E6: super” referred to when the “super reach” production mode is determined Reach "and" E7: special reach "which are referred to when the" special reach "effect mode is determined. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that is a big hit (big hit random value), that is, When the value is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls at that time with reference to the number-of-holds table 202c, and the same hold area is selected. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  Here, each variable element constituting the variable pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is configured by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the variable elements, the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation”, the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”, the variable element of “normal reach”, the variable element of “super reach”, and the variable element of “special reach” A variable element and a variable element of “re-change” are provided.

  As described above, the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the contents of the third symbol. When the “non-reach (short)” effect mode or the like is selected, the variable element of the “high-speed change” is performed “5 seconds” at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, referred to as “high-speed change (short)”). If the “non-reach (long)” effect mode or the like is selected, “10 seconds” is performed at the beginning of the variable effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “high-speed change (long)”). It should be noted that, when the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation” ends, a variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” to be described later is started (executed) or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the "5-second" or "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is executed, and the third symbol is scroll-moved so as to be visible to generate a "reach display". This is a variable factor indicating whether or not to perform. The fluctuation element of the “low speed fluctuation” is not executed when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected, and is not performed in the effect mode other than the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (for example, “non-reach (long)”. ) If "effect mode" is selected, "5 seconds" is performed after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation".

  That is, in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, the variation element of “low-speed variation” is performed, so that the final symbol pattern row of the third symbol display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (FIG. 4) stops while decelerating, while in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed, each symbol row of the third symbol display device 81 changes to “low-speed fluctuation”. Is stopped rapidly (so-called "bitter stop") without passing through the variable element of "." In addition, when the fluctuation element of this “low-speed fluctuation” ends, the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode includes the “high-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element of “10 seconds” and the “low-speed fluctuation” fluctuation element of “5 seconds”. A fluctuation effect is constituted by the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation effect. Further, in the “non-reach (short)” effect mode, a variable effect is configured with a change pattern of only a “fast change” change element of “5 seconds”.

  When the same symbol (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “reach forming symbol”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol row of 2 which stops first in the variable element of “low speed variation”, the variable element of “normal reach” is the remaining element. Is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the result of the change in the symbol sequence. The variable element of “normal reach” is performed “5 seconds” after the variable element of “low-speed fluctuation”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”, the pattern of directly displaying “loss display”, the pattern of directly displaying “big hit display”, and the pattern of “super reach” A pattern that evolves into a variable element, a pattern that evolves into a “special reach” variable element, and a pattern that executes a “re-change” variable element once a temporary “losing display” appears Have been.

  The variable element of “super reach” is developed and executed when the change of the remaining symbol row is continued without stopping the “loss display” in the variable element of “normal reach”, and in the third symbol display device 81 This is a variable element that indicates whether a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, “battle effect”). The variable element of “super reach” is performed “10 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”, a temporary pattern of “miss display” and a pattern of direct “big hit display” are temporarily set. And a pattern for executing a variable element of “re-variation” after the “loss display” appears.

  The variable element of “special reach” is developed and executed when the “loss display” is not stopped and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol columns is continued in the variable element of “normal reach”. This is a variable element that indicates whether a special effect (for example, “competitive effect”) different from the predetermined effect is performed and a jackpot occurs. The variable element of “special reach” is performed for “20 seconds” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the “special reach” variable element, a temporary “miss” display pattern and a “big hit” display pattern are temporarily set. And a pattern that "re-fluctuates" after "miss display" appears.

  It should be noted that it is configured to develop into a variable element of “super reach” or a variable element of “special reach” after the execution of the variable element of “normal reach”. When the symbol stops, it may be configured such that it does not pass through the variable element of “normal reach” and suddenly develops into the variable element of “super reach” or the variable element of “special reach”. Further, the configuration may be such that the variable element of “special reach” is performed after the execution of the variable element of “super reach”.

  The variable element of “re-change” is a variable element that develops and executes after “losing display” once appears in any of the “reach displays”, and appears as “big hit display”. The variable element of this “re-change” is performed “5 seconds” after any of the “reach display”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the "big hit display" appears after the execution of the variable element of "re-change" is prepared.

  Further, the variable element of the “re-change” is configured to be generated only when the jackpot game is won. In other words, in the case of "losing display", the variable element of "re-change" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-change" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "losing display" to one of "big hit display", so the "losing display" that does not win the big hit If you go to, there will be inconsistencies in the production. Therefore, the variable element of this “re-change” is selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern tables 202e2 and 202e4 (see FIGS. 13B and 14B), and the loss fluctuation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e3 (FIG. 13). (See FIG. 14A and FIG. 14A).

  As shown in FIG. 13A, in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” indicates that the entire variation time is “15”. Second, one variation pattern of “high-speed variation (long)” + “variation factor of low-speed variation” (variation time. In the following, it is naturally possible to replace “variation pattern” with “variation time”). Is provided.)

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ the low-speed fluctuation ”. "Variable element" is "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). In other words, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Next, in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1, “E1: non-reach (short)” includes one of “only high-speed variation (short) variation elements” with a total variation time of “5 seconds”. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 referred to when executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the special figure 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1, “E2: normal reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation factor of “low-speed variation” with an overall variation time of “20 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "0 to 9" for the "variable element of" normal reach "", and only the "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ the fluctuation element of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 loss variation pattern table 202e1 which is referred to at the time of performing the variation effect of the first special symbol, all the variation type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. That is, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202 for the special figure 1 loss, “E3: super reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + “Normal reach” fluctuation element + “super reach” fluctuation element ”alone.

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”” Have been. In other words, in the case of the “super reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long) + variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”is always used as the fluctuation pattern. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202 for the special figure 1 loss, “E4: special reach” indicates that the entire variation time is “40 seconds” and the “high-speed variation (long)” variation factor + “low-speed variation” variation. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”is“ 0 to 9 ”, and the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ” + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element "alone.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, all the fluctuation type counters CS1 can take. (“0-9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + variation element of “normal reach” + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the loss of the special figure 1 is determined as the variation pattern as it is, and the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. In addition, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, the selection may be made using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of the presence or absence of a notice display or the like).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13B, a special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of the first special symbol big hit will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that is a big hit, the reserved number table 202c is referred to. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d are selected. The effect mode is selected based on 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Normal Reach" has a variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + a variation element of "low-speed variation" of "20 seconds" and a variation factor of "20 seconds". Fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with fluctuation time of "25 seconds" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" And "variable element" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Variable element of" normal reach "", "0 to 2", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re-variation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e2 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the “high speed fluctuation (long)” is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of the "normal reach" is 30%, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation of the "normal reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of the special map 1, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, a variation pattern of “variation element of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”+ variation element of“ normal reach ”” is selected so that any variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide a game that can be expected to be a big hit.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2, “E6: Super Reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (long)” + variation of “low-speed variation” with a total variation time of “30 seconds”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" 35 seconds " A variable element of "normal reach" + a variable element of "super reach" + a variable element of "re-variation" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”” 40% of fluctuation pattern + fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" + 40% of fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 1 big hit variation pattern table 202e2, “E7: special reach” includes “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (long) ”+ variation of“ low-speed variation ”with the overall variation time of“ 40 seconds ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach"] and fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "45 seconds" + " A variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach” + a variable element of “re-change” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each change pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0-4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (long)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 1 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e2 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol, ““ high speed fluctuation (long) ”” The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation element of" special reach "" is 50%, and the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of special figure 1, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected in any of the fluctuation patterns.

  In this way, when the jackpot is won, by configuring so that a relatively long variation pattern is easily selected, the entertainment content of the variation effect in which the jackpot occurs is enhanced, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, in the case where the jackpot has not been won, that is, in the case of a losing, a relatively short variation pattern is configured to be easily selected, thereby shortening the content of the variation effect at the time of the losing, and making the variation effect. It can be digested efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14A, a special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when a second special symbol is lost will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that makes a big hit, that is, a value that results in a loss. In this case, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the hold number table 202c, and the stop pattern stored in the same hold area is selected. An effect mode is selected based on the value of the counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to is determined in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost, “E0: non-reach (long)” indicates that the entire variation time is “8”. One variation pattern of “second variation element of“ high-speed variation (short) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed variation ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the association between the variation pattern in “E0: non-reach (long)” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (short) ”+“ low-speed variation ”. "0 to 9" with respect to "variable element of", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

  That is, in any game state, when the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variation pattern table 202e3 which is referred to at the time of executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation type counter CS1 is set. “Variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is associated with all possible values (“0 to 9”). That is, in the case of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, “variation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ variation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”” is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. You.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202 for the special figure 2 loss, “E1: non-reach (short)” indicates that the entire variation time is “3 seconds” and “only the variation element of“ high-speed variation (short) ””. There are two fluctuation patterns.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “only for the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. "0-9", and only "variable element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is set to be selectable.

  That is, in any game state, if the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e3 which is referred to when executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. All the possible values (“0 to 9”) are associated with “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. That is, in the case of the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, “only the high-speed fluctuation (short)” fluctuation element is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss, the variable element of “E2: normal reach” includes the variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + the fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” for the entire fluctuation time of “13 seconds”. + Variable element of "normal reach"].

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "is set to" 0-9 ". Only" Fast fluctuation (short) "fluctuation element +" Low speed fluctuation "fluctuation element +" Normal reach "fluctuation element" It is set to be selectable.

  In other words, in any game state, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e3 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, all the change type counters CS1 can take. The value (“0 to 9”) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ””. In other words, in the case of the “normal reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” Is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table 202 for the special figure 2 loss, “E3: super reach” indicates that the overall variation time is “23 seconds” and “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed variation ” A variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ normal reach ”+ variation element of“ super reach ”” is prepared.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E3: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “super reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "super reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  In other words, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss variable pattern table 202e3, which is referred to at the time of executing the variable effect of the second special symbol, all of the possible values of the variable type counter CS1 (“0-9”) is associated with a “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ a fluctuation element of“ super-reach ”” ing. In other words, in the case of the “super-reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the fluctuation element is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”. + “Variable element of“ super reach ”” is selected.

  Next, in the variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss, 202E3, “E4: special reach” indicates that the overall variation time is “33 seconds” and “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed variation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E4: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + variable element of “normal reach” + variable element of “special reach” ”is“ 0-9 ”, and“ variable element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + variable element of “low-speed fluctuation” + It is set so that only the "normal reach" fluctuation element + the "special reach" fluctuation element "can be selected.

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202e3 which is referred to when the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (“0 to 9”) is associated with “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”” Have been. That is, in the case of the “special reach” effect mode in the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always “a fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ a fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ a fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”. + “Variable element of“ special reach ”” is selected.

  As described above, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol which is easily executed mainly in the right-handed game in the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time reduction state” is compared with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol. The configuration is such that a short time is selected, and the time efficiency of the game is set to be high (good).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14B, the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 referred to at the time of the big win of the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that is a big hit, the holding number table 202c is referred to. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the gaming state at that time and the number of balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d are selected. The effect mode is selected based on 202d. Then, a group to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 2 jackpot variation pattern table 202e4, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is reserved in the reserved area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in a fluctuation effect.

  In the special pattern 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4, “E5: normal reach” has a variation element of “high-speed variation (short)” + variation factor of “low-speed variation” + “variable element of“ low-speed variation ”of“ 13 seconds ”. Fluctuation element of "normal reach"], fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" with fluctuation time of "18 seconds" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + "re- fluctuation" And "variable element" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E5: normal reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. + Fluctuation element of "normal reach" ", fluctuation element of" 0 to 2 "," high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ fluctuation element of" slow fluctuation "+ fluctuation element of" normal reach "+ fluctuation of" re- fluctuation " "3-9" for "element".

  That is, in any of the game states, when the “normal reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the “high speed variation (short)” The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" is 30%, and the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation of "normal reach" The variation pattern of “element + variation element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

  Therefore, in the “normal reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2, “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ the fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ the“ re- fluctuation ” The variation pattern of the “variable element” is easily selected (70% of the whole). In addition, the variation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”” is configured to be selected, so that the game can be performed efficiently with time. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any of the fluctuation patterns.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4, “E6: Super Reach” has a “variation factor of“ high-speed variation (short) ”+ variation of“ low-speed variation ”with an overall variation time of“ 23 seconds ”. Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "of" 28 seconds "+" A variable element of "normal reach" + a variable element of "super reach" + a variable element of "re-variation" are prepared to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E6: super reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “super reach” ”,“ 0-3 ”,“ fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + fluctuation element of “low-speed fluctuation” + “normal reach” “Variable element + variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is “4 to 9”.

  That is, in any game state, when the “super reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big hit fluctuation pattern table 202e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, ““ high speed fluctuation (short) ”” 40% of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation element of "low fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" + 40% of the fluctuation pattern of "high fluctuation (short)" + "low fluctuation" The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ super reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 60%.

  Therefore, in the “super-reach” effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in the special map 2, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ super-reach ” (Variable element of “+ variable element of re-change”) ”(60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of “fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ fluctuation element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ super reach ”” is selected. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming ability in which a large hit can be expected from any of the fluctuation patterns while playing the game efficiently.

  Next, in the special pattern 2 big hit variation pattern table 202e4, "E7: special reach" has a variation of "high-speed variation (short)" + variation of "low-speed variation" with a total variation time of "33 seconds". Element + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "special reach" "and fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "of" 38 seconds "+" A variable element of “normal reach” + a variable element of “special reach” + a variable element of “re-change” is prepared to be selectable, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each change pattern. Have been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the association between the fluctuation pattern in “E7: special reach” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ the fluctuation of“ low-speed fluctuation ”. Element + fluctuation element of “normal reach” + fluctuation element of “special reach” ”,“ 0 to 4 ”,“ fluctuation element of “fast fluctuation (short)” + fluctuation element of “slow fluctuation” + “normal reach” Variable element + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation"].

  That is, in any game state, when the “special reach” effect mode is selected in the special pattern 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e4 which is referred to at the time of executing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol, ““ high speed fluctuation (short) ”” The fluctuation pattern of “variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ fluctuation element of“ normal reach ”+ fluctuation element of“ special reach ”” is 50%, and the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation (short)” + “low-speed fluctuation” The variation pattern of “variable element of“ normal reach ”+ variable element of“ special reach ”+ variable element of“ re-variation ”” is set to be selected at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, in the “special reach” effect mode selected at the time of the special hit of special figure 2, “variable element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ”+ variable element of“ low-speed fluctuation ”+ variable element of“ normal reach ”+“ special reach ” Of "variable element" and the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "normal reach" + the fluctuation element of "special reach" + the fluctuation element of "re- fluctuation" Is selected (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which a large hit can be expected from any variation pattern while playing the game with a time efficiency.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The per-figure random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0 to 99” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”). When the per-figure-period random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-figure per-figure random number counter C4.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure (value = “0 to 99”), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 22).

  The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23)), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in any one of the general drawing reserved first to fourth areas provided in the general drawing retaining ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the general figure holding sphere execution area (not shown) in the order of being stored in the general figure holding sphere storage area, and the random number per general figure counter C4 stored in the general figure holding sphere executing area is shifted. Make a hit judgment on the value.

  The value of the random number which is usually a hit of a symbol is set by a random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in a low probability state, 1/100 in a high probability state, 50/100 in the state), and the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure-period-holding-ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 is a win set by the per-figure-per-random number random number table If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a hit. Then, a normal symbol change table (not shown) is referred to in accordance with the game state, and the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set (for example, 30 seconds when the prize assist function is not activated, and 3 seconds when the prize assist function is activated). Etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the ordinary symbol display device 83, a symbol "O" is lit on as a stopped symbol (ordinary symbol). Thereafter, the opening time of the ordinary electric hand 64c is set by referring to the electric hand opening table (not shown) according to the game state (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning auxiliary function is not activated, and when the winning auxiliary function is activated). The normal electric hand 64c is opened during the opening time, during which the ball can enter the second starting port 64b.

  On the other hand, if the value of the per-figure-per-counter C4 stored in the per-figure-period holding area does not match the value of the winning random number set by the per-figure per-random number table (not shown), it is determined that a loss has occurred. Is done. Then, a variable display time is set by referring to a normal symbol change table (not shown) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses on the ordinary symbol display device 83, "X" is displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). Is illuminated.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, input / output It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 22), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 20). The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process during a power failure is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a probable change flag 203g, and a limit counter 203h. , A round counter 203i, a winning counter 203j, a time reduction counter 203k, and a time reduction infinity flag 203m.

  The first reserved ball number counter 203a receives a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a first start) into the first start port 64a detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device) based on the entry of the ball into the mouth 64a or the second starting port 64b may be referred to as “start winning”. The counter counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) in the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed in step 81).

  This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process (see S117 in FIG. 20) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning prize to the first starting opening 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 24). S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one every time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 25).

  The second reserved ball number counter 203b is, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second starting port 64b detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 23) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Of the second special symbol dynamic display (variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the start. This is a counter for counting the number of balls (the number of waiting times) up to four times.

  Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 20). Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol increases, one is added to the maximum value “4” (FIG. 24). S307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S405 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the reserved ball number of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S310 in FIG. 24). The reserve ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first reserve ball number counter 203a or the second reserve ball number counter 203b is incremented by one. This command includes data relating to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and data relating to the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

  The sound ramp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself in the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol retained in the main control device 110 by the retained ball number command. it can. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times of suspension of dynamic display (variable effect) of each special symbol without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, every time a winning start is detected, the main controller 110 transmits a reserved ball count command to the audio ramp control device 113, thereby dynamically displaying (changing) each special symbol managed by the audio ramp control device 113. Even if the number of retained balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of retained balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) retained in main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the number of retained balls to be received next The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the reserved ball number command to the sound ramp control device 113, the first reserved ball number counter 203a or 1 Not only the value of the 2 reserved balls counter 203b, but also the counter winning buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) in association with the above-mentioned starting prize which triggered the addition of the first reserved balls number counter 203a or the second reserved balls number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

  In other words, when a winning start is made, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 are stored in the holding ball. The number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the sound ramp control device 113, a fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined in advance that the variable effect will be performed (whether or not a big hit will occur, and how long the variable time will change). Then, on the basis of the result of the pre-reading, the execution of various effects is determined, and the “hold change notice” for changing the hold symbol (execution symbol) displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The effect contents and the execution timing (timing) can be determined.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the command of holding | maintenance ball number command which shows the holding | maintenance ball number of a fluctuation effect, and the command which shows the value of the big hit random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating a value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of a ball entering the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and the command is generated. A command similar to a variation pattern command and a stop type command based on entering a ball (a pre-variation pattern command and a pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, a program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command can be easily created by diverting the program of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command.

  As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the first opening 64a. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the first starting port 64a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first holding ball storage area 203d stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the first special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

  As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the detection of the start winning at the second opening 64b. And a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won (starts winning) the second starting port 64b in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), the MPU 201 reads the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second holding ball storage area 203e stores four holdings so that data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one starting winning of the second special symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

  As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f starts the execution, or performs the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a target display and a variation effect.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 201 determines the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. In order to execute the processing such as the setting of the dynamic display and the fluctuating effect of the device 81, the data (corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above). If data corresponding to the start winning prize relating to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponds to one start winning prize. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting winning prize relating to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storing area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning prize relating to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storing area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on condition that the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is not suspended. Note that the shift in the first embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set a target display and a fluctuating effect.

  As described above, the jackpot random number counter used in the jackpot lottery is used for setting the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, and a change type counter CS1 used for determining the change pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball has won the first starting port 64a (starting winning), The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b.

  The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas), similarly to the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each of the four reserved areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. , A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Have been.

  In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2 and 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3 and 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4 and 203e4 are one. Although they are collectively provided in the two reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

  As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in any one of the first starting ports 64a. Up to four times are stored. In this case, among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas), the areas having the smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are sequentially arranged. Is stored in the memory. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the first starting port 64a that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the first reserved first area is stored in the first starting port 64a that is the oldest in time. Will be stored.

  In the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the second starting port 64b is stored up to a maximum of four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reservation areas (second reservation first to fourth areas). You. In other words, the data corresponding to the start winning in the second starting port 64b that is earlier in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the oldest second starting port 64b is stored in the second reserved first area. Will be stored.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. I have.

  When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each of the reserved areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 201 does not store data in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first data of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the reserved first area, the data stored in the first reserved first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

  Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the change start processing (see FIG. 26), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and a change pattern corresponding to the lottery result. And the type of stop. In the special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamic display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When determining that the execution start timing of the variable effect has come, the MPU 201 determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is replaced with the jackpot random number of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, the second reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the second reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the second reserved sphere storage area 203e.

  Here, the data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b at the time when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data of the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data of the second reserved fourth area is shifted. To the second reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b at the time when the start of the variable effect is determined is “2”, the MPU 201 transmits only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the second reserved area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that it is easy to create a program.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e at the timing of starting the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 201 proceeds to the first reserved It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is converted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to Similarly, the random number value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold first area is It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random number value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

  When the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, the first reserved first area becomes empty, and is stored (reserved) in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. ) Is shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which data is stored (reserved) in the first reserved sphere storage area 203d.

  Here, a data shift performed on each of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start of the variable effect is determined is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it is. In this state, the data of the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f, and when the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transmits the data of the other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area having the smaller area number (first to third). That is, the data of the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data of the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data of the first reserved fourth area is shifted. To the first reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time of determining the start of the fluctuation effect is “2”, the MPU 201 stores only the data in the first reserved second area and the first reserved second data. After shifting to one area, the data shift ends. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed on the first reserved area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (reserved), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. And the control burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area having an area number smaller by one. In such a case, it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), and thus it is possible to easily create a program.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. As described above, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 refers to the ROM 202 for controlling the opening of the special winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery game. The hit jackpot opening table 202f to be executed is stored.

  Here, the jackpot opening table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot opening table 202f stored in the ROM 202. The big hit opening table 202f is referred to at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the big hit type in which the big hit of each special symbol occurs, the opening mode (number of times, maximum opening time, maximum Winning prize) is specified.

  The jackpot opening table 202f of the first embodiment is divided based on the jackpot type that has won the jackpot. To be more specific, the “winning type A” referred to when the jackpot type “probable variation A” is won, the “probability variation B” referred to when the winning type “probable change B” is won, and the jackpot type For the "latency probability change A" which is referred when winning the "latency probability change A", for the "hour reduction A" which is referred to when the jackpot type "hour reduction A" is won, and for the jackpot type "rush-through A" The opening mode of the special winning opening 65a is changed for "rush A" referred to when winning.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type “probable change A” is won is “16 times”, and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is It is defined that "30 seconds", the maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball in the special winning opening 65a is "15". .

  Further, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probable change A” is “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: high probability”, and “probability change state” in which the winning assist function is activated until the next jackpot. ".

  Next, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "probable change B" is won is "4 times", and the maximum opening time in opening one of the large winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". In addition, it is defined that the maximum winning number is "10" and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the ball in the special winning opening 65a is "15".

  Further, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “probable change B” is “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: high probability” until the special symbol dynamic display is executed 100 times. During the period, the game shifts to a “probability variation state” in which the winning assist function is activated.

  Next, the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type "Latent probability change A" is won is "4 times", and the maximum opening time for opening one of the large winning openings 65a is "30 seconds". The maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball in the special winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

  Also, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “latency probability change A” is “special figure: high probability, ordinary figure: low probability” and the “latency probability change state” in which the winning assist function does not operate. Move to.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type “hour saving A” is won is “four times”, and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is “30 seconds”. In addition, it is defined that the maximum winning number is "10" and the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of the ball in the special winning opening 65a is "15".

  The transition game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “hour saving A” is “special figure: low probability, ordinary figure: high probability” until the special symbol dynamic display is executed 100 times. During this period, the state shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the winning assist function is activated.

  Next, the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened when the jackpot type “rush-through A” is won is “four times”, and the maximum opening time in opening one of the special winning openings 65a is “30 seconds”. The maximum winning number is "10", and the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the ball in the special winning opening 65a is defined to be "15".

  Further, the transition game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type “rush-through A” is “special figure: low probability, ordinary figure: low probability”, and changes to the “normal game state” in which the prize assist function does not operate. And migrate.

  In this manner, the difference in the number of prize balls that can be paid out for each of the winning jackpot types makes it possible to cause a difference in the game value directly given according to the winning jackpot type. In addition, by changing the game state to be shifted to after the big hit game for each of the big hit types, it is possible to cause a difference in the playability after the big hit based on the big hit type. As a result, in the lottery game of the special symbol, it is possible to produce a game property of determining whether to win any of the jackpot types, and to improve the interest of the game.

  The mode of opening the special winning opening 65a based on the jackpot type (the number of times, the maximum opening time, the maximum winning number, the number of winning prizes, and the transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. is there. Specifically, the number of releases may be the same for each jackpot type, the maximum opening time may be changed for each jackpot type, or the maximum winning number may be changed. May be. In addition, it is not necessary to shift to a separate gaming state for each jackpot type, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of jackpot types are shifted to a common gaming state.

  In addition, during the big hit game, it is configured to temporarily transition (transition) to the “normal game state”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a game value to be provided (for example, a long opening of the ordinary electric utility 64c) by means other than opening of the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, and each game state and the jackpot It is possible to separately calculate the calculation of the payout ratio between the medium and the medium. As a result, it is easy to calculate the payout rate at the time of designing the game specification, and it is possible to reduce the number of design steps for the game specification.

  Further, in one round of the jackpot game, the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a may be performed a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, in one round, after the opening of the special winning opening 65a is started, the opening is temporarily closed for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, “5 seconds”) shorter than the maximum opening time, and the predetermined closing time ( For example, after one second), the special winning opening 65a may be opened again, and may be closed again after the maximum opening time elapses or when the maximum winning number is won. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the jackpot game and to improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The probability change flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state. The jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 7) referred to in the special symbol lottery lottery is configured to be different depending on whether the probability change flag 203g is on or not. Specifically, when the probability change flag 203g is set to off in the special symbol winning / rejecting lottery, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is referred to based on the probability set value, while the probability change flag 203g is If it is set to ON, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is referred to based on the probability setting value.

  The probability change flag 203g is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and at the end of the jackpot, the jackpot type (ie, the jackpot type “probability A”) which shifts the gaming state after the jackpot to the special symbol high probability state at the end of the jackpot. , "Probability change B" or "latency probability change A"), it is turned on (see S552 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot, if the game state after the end of the jackpot has been elected to the jackpot type that shifts to the special symbol low-probability state (that is, the jackpot type “hour saving A” or “rush-through A”), It is set to off (see S553 in FIG. 31).

  After the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the initialization of the limit counter 203h (that is, clearing to 0), the limit counter 203h has reached a predetermined number of special symbol jackpots (six in the first embodiment). It is a counter for counting whether or not. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, every time the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (six in the first embodiment), A limiter function is provided that always shifts the gaming state after the end of the big hit when reaching the predetermined number of times to the low probability state of the special symbol and prohibits the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to refer to the value of the limit counter 203h in order to count the predetermined number.

  This limit counter 203h is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, is incremented by one each time a special symbol big hit occurs (see S471 in FIG. 27). When the value of the limit counter 203h is no longer smaller than “6”, that is, when the value of the limit counter 203h is equal to or more than “6”, a predetermined number of jackpots are generated and predetermined. It is configured that the value of the limit counter 203h is initialized (that is, cleared to 0) when it is determined that the limit number has been reached (see S561 in FIG. 31).

  The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 checks the value of the limit counter 203h when a special symbol jackpot is won, and if the value of the limit counter 203h is smaller than “6”, the special symbol Is selected based on the values of the jackpot type table 202b and the jackpot type counter C2 from the jackpot types including the jackpot types that can shift to the high probability state. On the other hand, if the value of the limit counter 203h is not smaller than “6”, that is, if it is “6” or more, the jackpot type that does not include the jackpot type that can shift to the special symbol high probability state (ie, the jackpot type) From "time saving A" or "rush A"), one big hit type is selected based on the values of the big hit type table 202b and the big hit type counter C2. With this configuration, each time the number of jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can always be shifted to the special symbol low probability state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive jackpot “renshou” due to the high probability state of the special symbol continuing, and to obtain a payout obtained when the player continuously plays the game in the pachinko machine 10. The rate can be leveled, and the game value given to the player can be configured so as not to become too high.

  Each time the value of the limit counter 203h is updated (including 0 clear), a limit number command or a limit clear command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113. The initialization of the number of times can be grasped. The sound ramp control device 113 that has received the limit number command or the limit clear command transmitted from the main control device 110 is configured to update the value of a sub-limit counter 223e (see FIG. 16) described later.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured not to notify the player that the number of jackpots has reached the limit number, and to limit the number of hits even before the number of jackpots reaches the limit number. The jackpot type that can be selected when the number of times is reached (that is, the jackpot type “time saving A” or “rush-through A”) can be selected. That is, it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the jackpot limit has been reached. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured not to notify the player of the remaining number of times of the jackpot. That is, it is configured such that it is difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of jackpots until the limit number of jackpots is reached.

  This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot has reached the limit number, the jackpot type that cannot forcibly generate the “probability variation state” (ie, “time saving A” or “rush-in A”) ), But until the number of jackpots reaches the limit number, the jackpot type that generates the “probability variation state” (that is, “probable change A”, “probable change B”, or “latent probability change A”). )), The remaining number of jackpots is the maximum immediately after the number of jackpots has been reached. When a game is played in this state, when the jackpot type that generates the “probability fluctuation state” is won, the number of wins of the jackpot type that generates the “probability fluctuation state” is maximized (ie, five times). On the other hand, at times other than immediately after reaching the number of jackpots, that is, after reaching the number of jackpots and winning at least one or more jackpots, the remaining number of jackpots is not the maximum, Immediately after reaching the limit number of times, the number of wins of the jackpot type that generates the “probability fluctuation state” decreases. Therefore, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for performing the game, the player who recognizes that the timing is other than immediately after reaching the limit number of jackpots determines that the obtained game value is decreasing, and There is a possibility that the game in the game machine 10 may be avoided and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced.

  Therefore, a configuration is made so that the player is not notified that the number of jackpots has reached the limit number, and a jackpot type that can be selected at the time of reaching the limit number (ie, the jackpot type) even before the number of jackpots reaches the limit number. "Time saving A" or "rush-through A") can be selected so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the jackpot limit has been reached. In addition, it is configured not to notify the player of the number of remaining jackpots, and to make it difficult for the player to determine the number of remaining jackpots until the number of jackpots is reached. With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the number of hits has reached the jackpot limit, and it is difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of hits of the jackpot. However, the game in the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be avoided, and a decrease in the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  The round counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of times the special winning opening 65a is opened in a big hit. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of times of opening the special winning opening 65a in the jackpot state is different for each jackpot type. The value of the counter 203i is set. Then, the MPU 201 controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a at the time of a big hit based on the value of the set round counter 203i.

  The value of the round counter 203i is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the jackpot is won, a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot type “probable change A” which is a jackpot of 16 rounds, “16” is set as the value of the round counter 203i (see S505 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot type of four rounds (ie, jackpot type “probability change B”, “latency probability change B”, “time saving A”, or “rush A”), the value of the round counter 203i is “4” is set (see S506 in FIG. 28).

  In the jackpot state, the MPU 201 satisfies the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a (in the first embodiment, 30 seconds have elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 65a, or 10 balls are won in the special winning opening 65a). In this case, the value of the round counter 203i is decremented by one. If the value of the subtracted round counter 203i is larger than "0", the jackpot state is continued, and if the value of the subtracted round counter 203i is not larger than "0", the big jackpot state is terminated. ing.

  The winning counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the special winning opening 65a while the special winning opening 65a is open in the state of the big hit. The MPU 201 is configured to determine, based on the value of the winning counter 203j, the number of winning balls in the special winning opening 65a, which is one of the closing conditions of the special winning opening 65a.

  The value of the winning counter 203j is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to “10” at a timing (elapse of the opening time or interval time) at which the special winning opening 65a is opened in the big hit state. (See S523 in FIG. 29). When the ball is detected (turned on) by a special winning opening switch (not shown) provided in the special winning opening 65a while the special winning opening 65a is open, the value of the winning counter 203j is decremented by one. (See S534 in FIG. 30).

  The MPU 201 determines whether the value of the subtracted prize counter 203j is greater than “0”, and if the subtracted value of the prize counter 203j is greater than “0”, the ball is still placed in the special winning opening 65a. It is determined that the ten winning balls have not been entered and the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a based on the winning number is not satisfied, and the large winning opening 65a is kept open. On the other hand, if the value of the subtracted prize counter 203j is not a value larger than “0”, that is, if the value of the prize counter 203j is “0” or less, ten or more balls enter the special winning opening 65a. It is determined that the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a based on the winning number is satisfied, and the special winning opening 65a is closed.

  The time-saving counter 203k counts the number of times the special symbol has been executed since the end of the big hit, and a winning assist function for the second starting port 64b in the “probability changing state” or the “time reduction state” (that is, the high probability of the normal symbol) State) for determining whether or not to activate the state. The MPU 201 determines whether or not to activate the winning assist function for the second starting port 64b based on the value of the time saving counter 203k, and determines the variable display of the normal symbol and the operation mode of the normal electric hand 64c. Is configured.

  The value of the time saving counter 203k is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and when the jackpot ends, the value is set based on the type of the jackpot that generated the jackpot. Specifically, when the jackpot is a jackpot based on the jackpot type “probable change B” or “hour saving A”, the value of the hour saving counter 203k is set to “100” at the end of the jackpot (see S555 in FIG. 31). ), If the jackpot is a jackpot based on other jackpot types (ie, jackpot type “probable change A”, “latent probability change A” or “rush-through A”), the value of this time-saving counter 203k after the end of the jackpot Is cleared to "0" (see S556 in FIG. 31). When the value of the time-saving counter 203k is larger than "0", the value of the time-saving counter 203k is decremented by one each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed once (see S418 in FIG. 25). .

  The time-saving infinity flag 203m is a flag for determining whether or not to activate the winning assist function for the second starting port 64b from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot occurs. The MPU 201 determines whether or not to activate the winning assist function to the second starting port 64b based on the setting state of the time saving infinity flag 203m, and determines the variable display of the normal symbol and the operation mode of the normal electric hand 64c. It is configured to be.

  The time-saving infinite flag 203m is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the jackpot type that generated the jackpot is “probable change A” when the jackpot has ended (see FIG. 31 (see S558), and set to OFF when the jackpot type is other than “probable change A” (see S559 in FIG. 31).

  When the value of the time-saving counter 203k is greater than “0” or when the time-saving infinite flag 203m is set to ON, the MPU 201 performs the second startup in the “probability variation state” or the “time reduction state”. The winning assist function for the mouth 64b is activated, and the variable display time of the ordinary symbol caused by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 is executed in a shorter time than in the "normal gaming state". Let the probabilities be high probability states. Then, when the winning is achieved in the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric hand 64c is driven to be opened for a longer time than the "normal gaming state", and the ball fired in the right-handed game is moved to the second starting port. 64b. When the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes “0”, the operation of the prize assist function is stopped, and when the time is in the “time reduction state”, the state is changed to the “normal game state” and the “probability variation state”. In this case, the game state shifts to the “latent probability change state”.

  The input / output port 205 includes, as an input side, a switch for detecting a ball that has won each of the winning ports 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a and a ball that has been guided to the ball discharging path through the out port 66. Various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group, a setting key 501 for setting a start-up mode at power-on, and a setting for updating a probability set value by being pressed when in a “setting change mode”. A change switch 502 and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. The output side of the input / output port 205 includes various solenoids 209 including a special winning opening solenoid (not shown) and the like, a special symbol display device 37, an ordinary symbol display device 83, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 84, and a confirmation setting. A probability display device 504 for displaying a value is connected. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. Set.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of 51, and a ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuating effect or continuous sound. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the notice effect.

  The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 will be described later.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225. In the first embodiment, the command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to transmit and receive commands to and from each other.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the back image of the “super reach” effect mode and the like, and the display based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed on the display control device 114 by the third symbol. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, It controls the continuous announcement effect.

  The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. In the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data include a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, and a setting suggestion lottery. At least a table 222e and a suggestion content lottery table 222f are stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. is there.

  The sound ramp control device 113 acquires the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, which is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning in the main controller 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball number command, and the variation type. Based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the prefetch processing can be executed.

  Then, as a result of this look-ahead processing, the effect of the pending fluctuating effect, which is the target of the look-ahead process, becomes a result (whether or not a jackpot or “reach display” is performed). Is determined before execution of the fluctuating effect, to determine the execution of various effects, or to change the display mode of the on-hold symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. (Timing)).

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 sets the limit number of the number of jackpots transmitted by the limit number command transmitted by the main control device 110, and the set probability value transmitted by the set value command transmitted by the main control device 110. The setting suggestion lottery table 222e and the suggestion content lottery table 222f are referred to based on the set value, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f described later, and the pull-back counter 223h also described later. The content (type and timing) of the “setting suggestion effect” is configured to be randomly selected. The details of the setting suggestion lottery table 222e and the suggestion content lottery table 222f will be described later.

  In the RAM 223, a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, a sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, a setting value memory 223d, a sub limit counter 223e, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, and a disadvantage flag 223g (hereinafter, referred to as The fact that the player has a low degree of advantage or a low game value may be referred to as “disadvantage.” In the following description, the expression “disadvantage” does not mean that the player is disadvantaged. However, it does not mean that the advantage is low or the game value is low.), The withdrawal counter 223h, the suggestion content lottery counter 223i, the setting suggestion content memory 223j, the jackpot effect flag 223k, the subround counter 223m, and the ending flag 223n. , First hold information storage area 223o, second hold information storage area 23p, execution information storage area 223q is provided with at least.

  The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that a variation effect should be started in the ON state. The change start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 35). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set on the third symbol display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 39).

  When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 sets a fluctuation effect for performing the fluctuation effect during the standby if the fluctuation effect is on standby. (See S1402 to S1413 in FIG. 39).

  The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a variation effect of the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) ( This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls (standby times) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (retained ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and stores the number of retained balls in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b. It is designed to manage numbers.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol by entering the first starting port 64a, and the main controller 110 controls the first reserved ball number counter 203a. When the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value is added, the value after addition of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball count command ( That is, the number of change balls of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 (the number of change balls) is stored in the sub first reserve ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 35).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110. And when the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception of the stop type commands, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by one ( Update) (see S1406 in FIG. 39). As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball count counter 203a. The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while being synchronized with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

  The sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, a variation effect of the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) ( This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of waits) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that is reserved in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the retained number of balls in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. Has become.

  Specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 adds the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol by entering the second starting port 64b, and the main controller 110 controls the second reserved ball number counter 203b. When the value of the added ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value is added, the added value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command ( That is, the number of change balls of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 is stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 35).

  In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 controls the main control device 110 to reduce the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b and transmit a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110. And when the stop type command is received and the variation effect mode of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by one ( Update) (see S1409 in FIG. 39). As described above, the sound ramp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223c in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball count counter 203b. The value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while being synchronized with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

  The values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved symbol and the executed symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound ramp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball count counter 223c (FIG. 35, at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (S1406 or FIG. 39). In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c after storage or update, the display control device 114 displays a display reserved ball number command. Send to

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number of the sound lamp control device 113, Drawing of an image so that a reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and an execution symbol indicating a fluctuating effect during execution are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4B) of the third symbol display device 81. Control.

  As described above, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while being synchronized with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is The value is changed in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4B) is the same as that of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and the second reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the retained balls for which the variable effect is suspended.

  The set value memory 223d is a memory for storing (storing) the data related to the probability set value set in the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on also on the sound lamp control device 113 side. The sound ramp control device 113 can recognize the probability set value set by the main control device 110 by determining the value of the set value memory 223d.

  The set value memory 223d stores the set value when the set value command indicating the probability set value is received from the main control device 110 in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) performed by the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. The probability set value indicated by the command is set in the set value memory 223d.

  Specifically, when the set value command received by the audio ramp control device 113 at the time of executing the startup processing indicates the probability set value “1”, the value of the set value memory 223d is set to “1”. Is set to "2" and indicates the probability set value "2". If the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "2" and indicates the probability set value "3", If the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "3" and indicates the probability set value "4", the value of the set value memory 223d is set to "4" and the probability set value "5" is set. ", The value of the set value memory 223d is set to" 5 ", and if it indicates the probability set value" 6 ", the value of the set value memory 223d is set to" 6 ". Is set.

  In the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 sends the main control device to the player based on the value of the set value memory 223d, the value of the pull-back counter 223h described later, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i. The content of the effect suggesting the probability set value set in 110 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “setting suggestion effect”) is determined, and the determined “setting suggestion effect” can be executed during the jackpot game Have been.

  Here, the “setting suggestion effect” will be described. The “setting suggestion effect” is an effect that suggests information on the set value of the probability set value set in the main control device 110 to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the “setting suggestion effect” execution lottery is won, the content of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined and determined on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. It is configured to execute a “setting suggestion effect”.

  In the first embodiment, as the “setting suggestion effect”, an “even-odd suggestion” effect in which the probability setting value can suggest either an even number or an odd number to the player, and the setting value “1” in which the probability setting value is the minimum setting “1 negative suggestion” effect that can suggest to the player that the setting value is different from the setting value (that is, the setting value “2 to 6”), and the setting value “4 to 6” in which the probability setting value is a so-called high setting. "456 suggestion" effect that can suggest to the player that the value is any of the above, and the "direct value" that can suggest to the player the set value of the probability set value itself (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "direct value"). It is configured to be able to execute four types of effects, that is, a suggestion effect.

  In the “even-odd suggestion” effect, for example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (that is, the setting value “1, 3, 5”), an effect that can associate the word “odd” (for example, if the character pattern is “fact”) Is stranger than a novel ", or launch a surprise attack). When the probability setting value is an even number (that is, the setting value “2, 4, 6”), an effect that can associate the word “even” (for example, the appearance of a clay figure character pattern or the character pattern The effect which happens by chance) is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the “1 negative suggestion” effect, for example, another character design extinguishes (eliminates) a character design (for example, a character design imitating a unicorn) that can be associated with the number (word) of “1”. This is executed in the symbol display device 81.

  In the “456 suggestion” effect, for example, a character design (for example, a sign design of National Route 456, a clock design pointing to 4:56, which can associate numbers (words) of “4”, “5”, and “6”) Is performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the "direct value suggestion" effect, an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to present a character symbol that can directly associate the set value of the probability set value itself is executed. Specifically, for example, when the probability set value is the set value “3”, a character design (for example, a character design imitating a triangle) that can associate the numeral (word) “3” is made to appear, When the set value is the set value “4”, a character design (for example, a character design imitating a rectangle) that can be associated with the numeral (word) “4” appears, and the probability set value is the set value “5”. In the case of, a character design (for example, a character design imitating a pentagonal star) that can be associated with the number (word) of “5” appears, and when the probability set value is the set value “6”, “6” Character pattern (for example, a character pattern imitating a beehive made of a hexagonal aggregate) that can be associated with the number (word).

  In the first embodiment, in the “direct value suggestion” effect, if the probability setting value is low (that is, the set value “1” or “2”), the “direct value suggestion” effect is not executed. It is configured. This is because when the probability set value is low, when the player has unambiguously recognized the set value, it is understood that the gaming value obtained by the pachinko machine 10 is low, There is a possibility that the willingness to continue the game is weakened and the game is interrupted. Therefore, when the probability setting value is low, the “direct suggestion” effect is not executed, thereby suppressing a situation in which the player's willingness to play decreases.

  In this way, the above-described “setting suggestion effect” is executed to suggest a probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and to create a game ability for estimating whether the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is any one. By doing so, the fun of the game is improved. In addition, by executing a “setting suggestion effect” indicating that the probability setting value is a high setting, the player is made to recognize that the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is a high setting in which a gaming value is easily given. In addition, it is possible to improve the willingness to continue the game and improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10.

  The sub limit counter 223e is a counter for storing (counting) the number of special symbol jackpots on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well as the limit counter 203h of the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the limit counter 203h stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 stores and updates the number of special symbol jackpots based on the command (limit count command or limit clear command) transmitted from the main control device 110 and related to the number of jackpots. The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 is managed.

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a limit number command transmitted when a special jackpot occurs and the value of the limit counter 203h is incremented by 1 (updated) in the main control device 110. Is received, the value of the sub limit counter 223e is incremented by 1 (see S1213 in FIG. 35), and transmitted when the value of the limit counter 203h is cleared (initialized) to “0” in the main controller 110. When a limit clear command is received, the value of the sub limit counter 223e is cleared to "0" (see S1215 in FIG. 35).

  In the first embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 determines the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, the value of a pull-back counter 223h described later, the set value of the disadvantage flag 223g also described later, and the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f also described later. Based on the value of, a lottery is performed on whether or not to execute the “setting suggestion effect” for the player during the big hit game. The details of the lottery regarding the “setting suggestion effect” will be described later.

  The setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is a counter used for performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the “setting suggestion effect”.

  The value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, in a counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 34) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, a predetermined range (see S1112). For example, a counter is added one by one within "0 to 99", and reaches a maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter which can take a value of "0 to 99"), and then returns to "0". Has become. The value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is updated once (for example, one is added) each time the main processing loops once.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113, when a jackpot occurs (ie, when an opening command indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is received from the main control device 110), returns a pull-back counter 223h (described later) and a disadvantage flag (described later) Based on the values of the 223g, the sub limit counter 223e, and the set value memory 223d, the current number of jackpots and the withdrawal status are grasped, and the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e are used to determine the "setting suggestion effect." Is determined by lot (see S1241 in FIG. 37).

  The unfavorable hit flag 223g indicates that the jackpot whose winning has a lower advantage for the player than “probable change A” which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player (that is, the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, “hour saving A” Or "Pull-through A." Since a gaming value can be given at these jackpots, it is not necessarily disadvantageous to the player, but for convenience of explanation, "lower advantage for the player" is referred to as "disadvantage". This is a flag for judging whether or not this is the case.

  The disadvantage flag 223g is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and at the start of the jackpot, it is determined that the player has won the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, “hour saving A”, or “rush A” Is set to on (see S1224 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, at the start of the jackpot, if it is determined that the jackpot type “probable change A” or “probable change B” has been won, it is set to off (see S1225 in FIG. 36).

  In the first embodiment, by turning on the unfavorable hit flag 223g, the jackpot type that is more disadvantageous to the player than the jackpot type “probable change A” or “probable change B” (that is, the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, “ It is configured such that it is determined that a jackpot of "time saving A" or "rush-through A") is won, and a lottery result advantageous to the player is easily derived in the execution lottery of the above-mentioned "setting suggestion effect". . Specifically, in the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”, when the disadvantage flag 223 g is set to off, the lottery result of the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is difficult to derive, while the disadvantage flag 223 g Is set to ON, a lottery result for executing the “setting suggestion effect” is configured to be easily derived. The details of the lottery regarding the “setting suggestion effect” will be described later.

  The withdrawal counter 223h is in a “time reduction state” based on the big hit in a situation where the number of big hits has reached a predetermined number (six times in the first embodiment) (ie, at the time of reaching the limit) (hereinafter, referred to as “withdrawal period”). This is a counter for counting the number of times that a so-called pullback that wins the jackpot again occurs.

  The retraction counter 223h is configured to be updatable within the range of “0 to 2”, and is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, the number of jackpots reaches the limit, and , Is incremented by one each time a big hit occurs in the “time reduction state”. Then, when the value of the retraction counter 223h reaches the maximum value (ie, “2”), the maximum value (ie, “2”) is maintained without being updated to a higher value. On the other hand, the value of the retraction counter 223h is cleared to “0” when the so-called retraction period ends, that is, when the “time reduction state” ends (see S1209 in FIG. 35).

  That is, while the pachinko machine 10 has reached the limit number of jackpots of the special symbol from the initial state (that is, the number of jackpots is six, the same applies hereinafter), and the gaming state after the jackpot is the “time reduction state”. (Hereinafter, while the limit number of times has been reached and the gaming state after the jackpot is in the “time reduction state”, it may be referred to as “during the pullback period”), and one of the jackpots is won ( Substantially, since it is during a right-handed game, when the jackpot type “probable change A” or “time saving A” in the second special symbol is won. The same applies below.) The value of the pullback counter 223h is incremented by 1 (that is, set to “1”). Thereafter, the number of jackpots is repeated while the "probability change state" or the "time reduction state" continues without ending, the limit number of jackpots of the special symbol is reached again, and the gaming state after the jackpot is " If any of the jackpots is won during the "time reduction state", it is determined that the second withdrawal is performed during the second withdrawal period, and the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is incremented by 1 (that is, set to "2"). ). After that, even if additional withdrawal occurs during the re-withdrawal period, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is not changed unless the “time reduction state” ends and the “normal game state” is entered. It is maintained at “2”.

  As described above, when receiving the opening command indicating the occurrence of the big hit from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 sets the value of the withdrawal counter 223h, the above-mentioned onerous flag 223g, the sub limit counter 223e, Based on the value of the setting value memory 223d, the current number of jackpots and the withdrawal situation are grasped, and based on the situation, whether or not to perform the “setting suggestion effect” by the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e is performed. Is randomly selected (see S1241 in FIG. 37).

  In addition, when the lottery for the “setting suggestion effect” is won, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the withdrawal status and the probability set value based on the values of the withdrawal counter 223h and the set value memory 223d. Based on the content, the content of the “setting suggestion effect” to be executed is selected based on the suggested content lottery counter 223i and the suggested content lottery table 222f described later (see S1243 in FIG. 37).

  The suggestion content lottery counter 223i is a counter used to determine the content of the “setting suggestion effect” when it is determined that the “setting suggestion effect” is to be executed. If the content of the "setting suggestion effect" is small (only one) or if the execution timing is fixed (for example, only at the time of the ending effect), the effect is less sharp and less entertaining. . Therefore, by providing variations in the content of the "setting suggestion effect" and enriching the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and thereafter, in a counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 34) of the main process of the sound lamp control device 113, a predetermined range (see S1112). For example, a configuration in which one is added in order within “0 to 9” and reaches a maximum value (for example, “9” in the case of a counter that can take a value of “0 to 9”), and then returns to “0” Has become. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is updated once (for example, one is added) each time the main processing loops once.

  As described above, when receiving the opening command indicating the occurrence of the jackpot from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the sub limit counter 223e, the disadvantage flag 223g, the pullback counter 223h, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f, and Based on the value in the setting value memory 223d, a lottery is performed with reference to the setting suggestion lottery table 222e to determine whether or not to execute the “setting suggestion effect”. When the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined as a result of the lottery, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the number of withdrawal times and the probability set value based on the value of the withdrawal counter 223h and the value of the set value memory 223d. Is determined, and based on the content, which "setting suggestion effect" is to be executed is determined by the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and the suggestion content lottery table 222f, and the notification (execution) timing is determined (see S1243 in FIG. 37). ). The details of the “setting suggestion effect” lottery will be described later.

  The setting suggestion content memory 223j is a memory for storing the content of the “setting suggestion effect” determined by the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and the like and the notification (execution) timing. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a “setting suggestion effect” based on the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j.

  This setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized when the power is turned on (for example, writing of null data). Data corresponding to the determined content is stored (see S1244 in FIG. 37). Then, at the timing when the jackpot effect ends, the setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized again.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the “setting suggestion effect” based on the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j. Specifically, in the setting suggestion content memory 223j, any one of the "setting suggestion effect" of the "even suggestion" effect, the "1 negative suggestion" effect, the "456 suggestion" effect, or the "direct value suggestion" effect. (Setting suggestion type information) is stored, and a "round match" is executed at a timing when the probability set value and the number of jackpot rounds match, and executed at a timing when the probability set value and the number of jackpot rounds are different. Information (timing information) indicating which notification (execution) timing of the “other round” performed or the “ending” performed at the timing of the jackpot ending executes the “setting suggestion effect” is stored. When the data stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is an initial value (for example, Null data), it indicates that the “setting suggestion effect” is not executed. In addition, the selection method of “other rounds” is to grasp the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot, select one of the rounds other than the round different from the number of the probability set value by lottery, and Is set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j.

  Here, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e and the suggestion content lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the setting suggestion lottery table 222e, and FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the suggestion content lottery table 222f.

  As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command indicating the occurrence of the big hit from the main control device 110, the value of the sub limit counter 223e, the disadvantage flag 223g, the retraction counter 223h, and the setting value memory 223d are set. , The current number of jackpots, the pull-back state, and the like are grasped, and based on the situation, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the setting suggestion lottery table 222e determine whether or not to perform the “setting suggestion effect” (FIG. 37). See S1241). Then, when the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined as a result of the lottery, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the number of withdrawals and the probability based on the value of the withdrawal counter 223h and the value of the set value memory 223d. The setting value is grasped, and based on the content, the "setting suggestion effect" is determined by the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and the suggestion content lottery table 222f, and the notification (execution) timing is determined (FIG. 37). S1243).

  First, as shown in FIG. 17, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e is divided into groups based on the value of the withdrawal counter 223h, the set value of the disadvantage flag 223g, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e. , The value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that will win the execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect”.

  Specifically, first, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is divided into "0" to "2", and among them, whether the set value of the disadvantage flag 223g is "ON" or "OFF" The value of the sub limit counter 223e is further divided into "1" to "6". Then, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is associated with each of the divided groups.

  In the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0” and the unfavorable hit flag 223g is “off,” the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “setting suggestion” from “1” to “5”. The setting suggestion lottery counter that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" only when the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "6" while the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "effect" is not assigned. The value of 223f is “0 to 4”.

  In other words, if there is no pullback jackpot during the pullback period and the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is “probable change A” or “probable change B”, the number of wins Up to five times, the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is not won (that is, the winning probability is 0%), and only in the situation where the number of jackpots is six (ie, when the limit of the number of jackpots is reached), the 5% It is configured to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” with a probability.

  On the other hand, if the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0” and the disadvantage flag 223g is “ON”, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” for each value of the sub limit counter 223e. A value has been assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “1”, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is “0 to 4”, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 9", and in the case of the value of the sub limit counter 223e of "3", the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "?" Is "0 to 14" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "4", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" Is "0 to 19" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 24", and the sub limit If the value of Tokaunta 223e is "6", the value of the set suggests lottery counter 223f to win in the execution of "Setting suggests demonstration" has become "0 to 29", and.

  In other words, in the situation where the jackpot of the winning jackpot has not been at least once during the pullback period, and the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is “latency probability change A”, “time saving A” or “rush-through A”, When the number of jackpots is one (that is, the limit number is reached when five more jackpots are reached. Hereinafter, reaching the limit number with n (n is a natural number) more jackpots will be referred to as “the remaining limit number n”. May be referred to as "times"), the probability is 5%, the number of jackpots is two (ie, the remaining limit count is four), the probability is 10%, and the number of jackpots is three (ie, the limit count remaining). 3) is 15% probability, if the number of jackpots is 4 (ie, the remaining limit number is 2), the probability is 20%, and if the number of jackpots is 5 (ie, the remaining limit number is 1), it is 25%. Probability of large If or the number of 6 times (ie, at the time limit reached) is a 30% probability, is configured so as to win the run lottery in the "Setting suggests demonstration".

  Therefore, in a situation where the jackpot of the withdrawal has never been made during the pullback period, the jackpot type that has been won is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (ie, the jackpot type “probable A” or “probable B”). The jackpot type (that is, the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, “time saving A”, or “rush-in A”) is configured to be easier to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. Further, in a situation in which no pullback has been performed during the pullback period, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number (that is, the sub limit counter 223e is “6”), the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won. It is configured to be easy. In particular, when the disadvantage flag 223g is “ON” (that is, when the winning jackpot type is “latency probability change A”, “time saving A”, or “rush A”), the value of the sub limit counter 223e increases. The winning probability is increased by 5% each time the game is performed.

  Therefore, for example, in a case where the winning is consecutively performed for the jackpot type “Latent probability change A”, it becomes easier to win the “setting suggestion effect” as the continuous number approaches the limit number. In other words, even if the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the possibility that the setting contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped from the time of winning the advantageous jackpot type is increased, so that the player is given It is possible to make it easier to recognize the determination factor of whether or not the game can be continued in the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, even in the case of winning of the disadvantageous jackpot type, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number, it becomes easier for the player to suggest the setting content of the probability set value, and to easily know the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to alleviate the sense of disappointment due to the continuous winning of the disadvantageous jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming aroused and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1” and the disadvantage flag 223g is “off”, the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “1” to “4”. When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is not allocated, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the setting suggestion lottery that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 4" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 9". Has become.

  In other words, in the situation where the jackpot has been won once during the pullback period and the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won is “probable change A” or “probable change B”, the number of wins from Up to four times, the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is not won (that is, the winning probability is 0%), and in the situation where the number of jackpots is five (that is, the remaining limit number is one), the probability of 5%, 6 It is configured to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” with a probability of 10% in the number of times (ie, when the limit of the number of jackpots is reached).

  On the other hand, even if the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”, if the disadvantage flag 223g is “ON”, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” for each value of the sub-limit counter 223e. A value has been assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “1”, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is “0 to 34”, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 39", and in the case of the value of the sub limit counter 223e of "3", the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is “0 to 44” and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “4”, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” Is "0 to 49" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 54", If the value of the mitt counter 223e is "6", the value of the set suggests lottery counter 223f to win in the execution of "Setting suggests demonstration" has become "0 to 59", and.

  That is, in the situation where the jackpot has been won once in the pullback period during the pullback period, and the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is “latency probability change A”, “time saving A”, or “rush-through A”, If the number of jackpots is one (ie, the remaining limit number of times is 5), the probability is 35%. If the number of jackpots is two (ie, the number of remaining limits is four), the probability is 40%, and the number of jackpots is three. In the case (that is, the remaining limit number of times is 3), the probability is 45%, when the number of jackpots is four (that is, the number of remaining limits is two), the probability is 50%, and when the number of jackpots is five (that is, the remaining limit). It is configured to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” with a probability of 55% when the number of hits is 55% and with a probability of 60% when the number of jackpots is 6 (that is, when the limit is reached).

  Therefore, in the situation where the player has won the pull-back jackpot once during the pull-back period, it is easier to win the "setting suggestion effect" execution lottery than in the situation where the pull-back jackpot has never been won during the pull-back period. It is configured as follows. In particular, if the type of the winning jackpot is “Latent probability change A”, “Time saving A”, or “Push-through A”, the winning probability of “Setting suggestion effect” will be a single jackpot during the pullback period. When the sub-limit counter 223e is "1", it is configured to increase dramatically (for example, from 5% to 35%). In addition, in a situation in which the jackpot is won once in the pullback period during the pullback period, as the number of jackpots approaches, the configuration that makes it easier to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” and the type of the jackpot that is won is The configuration in which the disadvantageous jackpot type is more likely to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” than the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is the same as the configuration in the situation where the pullback has not been performed once during the pullback period. .

  Therefore, for example, in the situation where the player has won once in the pullback jackpot during the pullback period, as the continuous count approaches the limit count, it becomes easier to win the “setting suggestion effect”. In other words, when the jackpot is won during the pullback period and a jackpot is further extended, the setting contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 are determined based on the situation in which the jackpot has not been returned once during the pullback period. By raising the possibility of grasping the game, it is possible to easily inform the player of the determination factor for determining whether or not to continue the game with the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, even when the disadvantageous jackpot type is won, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number, it becomes easier for the player to suggest the setting contents of the probability set value, and to easily know the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to alleviate the sense of disappointment due to the continuous winning of the disadvantageous jackpot type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming aroused and to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, in the example shown in FIG. 17, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “2” and the disadvantage flag 223g is “OFF”, the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “1” to “3”. When the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is not allocated, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "4", the setting suggestion lottery that wins the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" When the value of the counter 223f is "0 to 4" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 9", When the value of the limit counter 223e is "6", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f for winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 14".

  In other words, the player wins the jackpot during the pullback period, and then wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots. If the jackpot type is “probable change A” or “probable change B”, the number of jackpots from one to three does not win the “setting suggestion effect” execution lottery (that is, the winning probability is 0%). The probability of 5% in a situation where the number of jackpots is 4 (ie, the remaining limit number is 2), the probability of 10% in a situation where the number of jackpots is 5 (ie, the remaining limit number is 1), and the situation of 6 times ( That is, at the time of reaching the limit of the number of jackpots), with a probability of 15%, the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won.

  On the other hand, when the disadvantage counter 223g is “ON” even if the value of the pullback counter 223h is “2”, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” for each value of the sub limit counter 223e. A value has been assigned. Specifically, when the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “1”, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f that wins the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is “0 to 64”, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is In the case of "2", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 69", and in the case of the value of the sub limit counter 223e being "3", the "setting suggestion effect" If the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "?" Is "0-74" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "4", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f winning the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is Is "0 to 79" and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is "5", the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f to win the execution of the "setting suggestion effect" is "0 to 89", If the value of the mitt counter 223e is "6", the value of the set suggests lottery counter 223f to win in the execution of "Setting suggests demonstration" has become "0 to 99", and.

  In other words, the player wins the jackpot during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots. If the jackpot type is “latency probable change A”, “time saving A” or “rush-through A”, if the number of jackpots is 1 (that is, the remaining limit number is 5), the probability of 65% and the number of jackpots are 2 In the case of the number of times (ie, the remaining limit number of times is 4), the probability of 70% is obtained, and in the case of the number of big hits of three (ie, the number of remaining times of limit 3), the probability of 75% is obtained. The remaining limit number of times is 80% probability, the number of jackpots is five (ie, one remaining limit number) is 90%, and the number of jackpots is six (ie, when the limit is reached). 0% of probability, is configured so as to win the run lottery in the "Setting suggests demonstration".

  Therefore, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, even once during the pullback period, It is configured such that it is easier to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”, compared to a situation where a pullback jackpot has not been won or a pullback jackpot has been won once during the pullback period. In particular, when the unfavorable hit flag 223g is “ON”, that is, when the winning jackpot type is “latent probability change A”, “time saving A” or “rush-through A”, the winning probability of “setting suggestion effect” is Dramatically rise from a situation where no pullback jackpot has been won during the pullback period, or a situation where a pullback jackpot has been won once during the pullback period (for example, when the sub limit counter 223e is "1"). In the case of (5), 5% or 35% → 65%). When the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “2”, the disadvantage flag 223g is “ON”, and the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “6”, the “setting suggestion effect” is executed with a probability of 100%. Is determined.

  It should be noted that, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot in the pullback period during the pullback period and subsequently wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number, , A configuration that makes it easier to win a "setting suggestion effect" execution lottery, and a disadvantageous jackpot type that is easier to win the "setting suggestion effect" execution lottery than a jackpot type in which the winning jackpot type is advantageous to the player The configuration is the same as the configuration in a situation where no pullback jackpot has been made during the pullback period, or a situation where a pullback jackpot has been won once in the pullback period.

  Therefore, for example, in a situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, it is disadvantageous for the player. As the number of wins of a large jackpot type approaches the limit number, it becomes easier to win the “setting suggestion effect”. In other words, if a jackpot is won during the pullback period and a jackpot is further generated, and then the jackpot is won again during the second pullback period, the jackpot is returned once during the pullback period. By increasing the possibility of grasping the set contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 from the situation where no pachinko machine or the situation where the payout jackpot is won once during the withdrawal period, the pachinko machine is given to the player. It is possible to make it easier to notify the determination factor of whether or not to continue the game at 10. For this reason, even if the disadvantageous jackpot type is won and the remaining number of jackpots is reduced, it becomes easier for the player to suggest the setting content of the probability setting value as the number of jackpots approaches the limit number. Thus, the merit that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known is provided, and the disappointment due to the consecutive winning of the disadvantageous jackpot type can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming aroused and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, By winning the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, the contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 are configured to be more specifically suggested. For this reason, in a situation where the jackpot has been won for a plurality of pullbacks, for example, the player is not a right-handed game for making a prize at the second starting port 64b which is easy to win a jackpot type which is advantageous to the player. A left-handed game is performed to make a prize in the first opening 64a that is easy to win the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, and a lottery game with the first special symbol that is easy to win the disadvantageous jackpot type is executed. Can be created. As a result, when the player predicts that the number of jackpots is different from the limit number in a situation in which the “setting suggestion effect” has not yet been performed after winning some of the jackpots of the pullback (for example, The remaining limit number of times 5 to 3) is a direct game value by performing a right-handed game, performing a lottery game with the second special symbol, winning a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (a series of villas), and directly playing the game. It is possible to aim for a large amount of prize balls. On the other hand, if the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game to perform a lottery game with the first special symbol, and dares to win a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, thereby indirectly playing the game. It is possible to aim for the execution of the value-setting suggestion effect. With this configuration, it is possible to create a playability of hitting the launch mode of the ball based on the number of jackpots and the number of pullbacks, and to combine a limit number of jackpots and execution of “setting suggestion effect”. With the playability, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the first embodiment is configured such that the “setting suggestion effect” is more easily executed as the number of times approaches the limit. In other words, when the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, the difference between the number of hits and the limit number is likely to be small or not to be high. Therefore, by changing the execution probability of the "setting suggestion effect" according to the limit number, in the case where the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, the gaming ability to make the player guess the limit number and whether or not the limit has been reached is created. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the suggestion content lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. In the example illustrated in FIG. 18, the suggestion content lottery table 222f is divided into groups based on the value of the pull-back counter 223h and the value (set value) of the set value memory 223d, and for each group, the “setting suggestion effect” is displayed. The notification (execution) timing is divided into a plurality of sections. Then, for each of the divided notification timings, the content of the “setting suggestion effect” (that is, any of the “even and odd suggestion” effect, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, the “456 suggestion” effect, and the “direct value suggestion” effect) Is associated with the possible value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i. That is, when the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined, the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is based on the value of the pullback counter 223h, the value of the setting value memory 223d, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i. And its contents are determined collectively.

  Specifically, first, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is divided into any one of "0" to "2", and among them, the value is divided for each value (set value) of the set value memory 223d. , And is classified for each notification timing of “setting suggestion effect”. Then, the type of the “setting suggestion effect” and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i are associated with each of the divided groups.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, the set value of the set value memory 223d and the “setting suggestion effect” Is performed, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0” in “round match” (that is, the timing of the first round of the jackpot) in which the number of rounds during the jackpot matches. It has become. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect can be selected at the timing of “round match”. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, the set value of the set value memory 223d and the big hit during the “setting suggestion effect” are executed. In the "other rounds" where the number of rounds does not match (i.e., 2 to 16 rounds of jackpots), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "even and odd suggestion" effect is "1 to 4". . That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, at the “other round” timing, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, “Ending” indicating that the ending effect at the end of the jackpot is “even / odd suggestion” The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the effect is “5 to 9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected at the “ending” timing. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the withdrawal has not been a single jackpot during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “1”, Only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected, with “round match” timing being 10%, “other round” timing being 40%, and “ending” timing being 50%.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the probability set value is the set value “1”, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, the “456 suggestion” effect, and the “direct value suggestion” effect are not selected. ing.

  First, since the “1 negative suggestion” effect is a suggestive effect that denies that the probability set value is the set value “1”, if the probability set value is the set value “1”, “1 negative” is indicated. Executing the "suggestion" may cause inconsistencies in the effect contents, and may confuse the player. Therefore, when the probability setting value is the set value “1”, the “setting suggestion effect” is configured so that the “1 negative suggestion” effect is not selected, the appropriate effect is executed, and unnecessary confusion is given to the player. Does not occur.

  In addition, since the “456 suggest” effect is an effect that indicates that the probability setting value is any of “4 to 6”, the setting value whose probability setting value is not the setting value “4 to 6” (for example, If the "456 suggestion" effect is executed when the setting value is "1"), a discrepancy in the effect content may occur, and the player may be confused. Therefore, when the probability setting value is the set value “1”, the “setting suggestion effect” is configured so that the “456 suggestion” effect is not selected, and the appropriate effect is executed to cause unnecessary confusion to the player. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, the “direct value suggestion” effect is an effect in which the set value of the probability set value is directly indicated to the player, and thus the obtained game value is low (ie, the set value “1” or “2”). ), If the “direct suggestion” effect is executed, the player knows that the game value obtained by the pachinko machine 10 is low, the motivation to continue the game is weakened, and the game is stopped (interrupted). There is a risk of doing it. Therefore, when the probability set value is set to be low, it is configured not to execute the “direct value suggestion” effect, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player's willingness to play decreases.

  Further, the “direct value suggestion” effect can be selected only when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “2”, and is not selected when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” or “1”. ing. With this configuration, the more the jackpot of the withdrawal is repeated during the withdrawal period, the more directly the content of the suggestion can be executed in the "setting suggestion effect", and the value other than the game value by winning the withdrawal jackpot is obtained. Benefits can be given to the player.

  In the first embodiment, when the notification timing of the “other round” is selected as the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, the “setting suggestion effect” is executed in a different number of rounds from the probability setting value. . The determination of the “number of rounds different from the probability setting value” may be performed in a fixed round (for example, the last round in a jackpot), or a round executed by another counter or the like is randomly selected. You may comprise so that it may be.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, “round match” (that is, two rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the timing of “round match”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect can be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the retraction counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, in “other rounds” (that is, 1, 3 to 16 rounds of jackpots), The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i that wins the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “2 to 4”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the “other round” timing, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, if the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the “ending” timing, “even and odd suggestion” effects or “1 negative suggestion” The effect may be selected, and the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect are not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where the withdrawal has not been a single jackpot during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “2”, The “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect can be selected, with “even-odd suggestion” effect at “round match” timing being 20%, and “even-odd suggestion” effect at “other round” timing being 30%. %, “Even and odd suggestion” effects at the timing of “ending” are selected at a rate of 40%, and “1 negative suggestion” effects at the timing of the “ending” are selected at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the probability set value is the set value “2”, the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect are not selected. Is the same as when the probability set value is the set value “1”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, “round match” (that is, three rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 2”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the timing of “round match”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect can be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  If the value of the retraction counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, “other rounds” (ie, 1, 2, 4 to 16 rounds of jackpot) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “3, 4”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the timing of “other round”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the “ending” timing, “even-odd suggestion” effect or “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where no withdrawal has been made in the withdrawal period during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “3”, The "even / odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect can be selected, and "even / odd suggestion" effect at the timing of "round match" is 30%, and "even / odd suggestion" effect at the "other round" timing is 20%. %, “Even and odd suggestion” effects at the timing of “ending” are selected at a rate of 40%, and “1 negative suggestion” effects at the timing of the “ending” are selected at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the probability set value is the set value “3”, the “456 suggest” effect is not selected, and the reason is that the probability set value is set. This is the same as when the value is “1”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, “round match” (that is, four rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 3”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the timing of “round match”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  If the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, “other rounds” (that is, 1 to 3, 5 to 16 rounds of jackpot) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4, 5”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the “other round” timing, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is "6, 7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is The value is “9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the timing of “ending”, “even and odd suggestion” effects and “1 negative suggestion” are performed. The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where no withdrawal jackpot has been made during the withdrawal period (ie, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “4”, The "even / odd suggestion" effect, the "1 negative suggestion" effect, or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "even / odd suggestion" effect at the timing of "round match" is 40%, and the "at other round" timing The production of “even and odd suggestions” is 20%, the production of “even and odd suggestions” at the timing of “ending” is 20%, the production of “1 negative suggestion” at the timing of “ending” is 10%, and the production of “ending” is also The "456 suggestion" effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, “round match” (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 4”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “round match”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, “other rounds” (ie, 1 to 4, 6 to 16 rounds of big hits) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “5, 6”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “other round”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is “7”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “ending”, “even-odd suggestion” effect, “1 negative suggestion” The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where the withdrawal has not been a single jackpot during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “5”, The "even / odd suggestion" effect, the "1 negative suggestion" effect, or the "456 suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "even / odd suggestion" effect at the timing of "round match" is 50%, and the "at the other round" timing The production of "even and odd suggestions" is 20%, the production of "even and odd suggestions" at the timing of "ending" is 10%, and the production of "1 negative suggestion" is also 10% at the timing of "ending". The "456 suggestion" effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the number of rounds to be executed at the time of the jackpot, the jackpot type “probable change A” in which 16 round games are executed (hereinafter, the jackpot type “probable change A” is represented by “16R A jackpot type “probable change B”, “latency probability change A”, “time saving A” or “rush-through A” (hereinafter, jackpot type “probable change B”) in which four round games are executed. , "Latency probability change A", "time saving A", or "rush-in A", may be collectively referred to as "4R big hit".) For this reason, when the 16R jackpot is won, the “setting suggestion effect” can be executed at any timing of “round match” or “other rounds”, while when the 4R jackpot is won, the “setting suggestion effect” is displayed. If the fifth or later round is selected as the notification timing of the “effect”, the “setting suggestion effect” cannot be executed at the determined notification timing at the jackpot.

  The game specifications related to the payout rate such as the number of rounds in the jackpot game are easily performed later than the video development and the software control development in the development process of the pachinko machine 10, and the model is developed due to failure of the certification test. May be changed relatively late in the process. Therefore, if the number of jackpot rounds assumed at the beginning of development is reduced relatively late in the model development process, a round effect that could be executed with the gaming specifications assumed at the beginning of model development will be executed May not be possible. As a result, as in the present embodiment, in the case where the gaming ability of “execute“ setting suggestion effect ”in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability set value” is provided, the number of rounds smaller than the settable range of the probability set value is reduced. When there is a number of jackpot types, it is determined that the lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" has been won. I will.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the round selected as the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is not executed, the notification timing is changed, and the notification timing during the ending effect executed in any jackpot is changed. It is configured to execute “setting suggestion effect”. In this way, by executing the notification timing change processing, when the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won, even if there is no round corresponding to the initially notified notification timing, all the jackpot types are In the ending effect that can be executed in the above, “setting suggestion effect” can be surely executed. Therefore, even if the game specifications are changed, the "setting suggestion effect" is executed in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability set value without changing the video development or software development at the time of model development. Even if the applicable round does not exist while executing the gaming ability of `` do '', by executing the `` setting suggestion effect '' in the ending effect, the winning `` setting suggestion effect '' is surely executed, It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In both cases of “round match” and “other round”, when there is no round selected as the notification timing, the change processing is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, “round match” (that is, 6 rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 5”. That is, if the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect may be selected at the timing of “round match”. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, “other rounds” (that is, 1 to 5, 7 to 16 rounds of big hits) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “6”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the “other round” timing, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect in “ending” is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is “7”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “0” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the “ending” timing, “even and odd suggestion” effects and “1 negative suggestion” are performed. The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where the jackpot of the withdrawal has never been made during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “0”) and the probability set value is the set value “6”, The “even / odd suggestion” effect, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, or the “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “even / odd suggestion” effect at the timing of the “round match” is 60%, and the “other round” timing at the “other round” timing. "Even and odd suggestion" effect is 10%, "even and odd suggestion" effect at the timing of "ending" is 10%, and "1 negative suggestion" effect is also 10% at the "ending" timing, and also at the "ending" timing. The "456 suggestion" effect is selected at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in a situation in which the jackpot of the withdrawal has never been made during the withdrawal period, the higher the probability setting value, the easier it is to select “round match” as the notification timing for executing the “setting suggestion effect”. The lower the value, the more easily “ending” is selected as the notification timing for executing the “setting suggestion effect”. By changing the timing at which the set value can be notified according to the probability set value in this way, a game property that allows the player to estimate the probability set value by the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is created, and the interest of the game is increased. Improvement can be achieved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, “round match” (that is, one round of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected at the timing of “round match”. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, “even and odd” in “other rounds” (ie, 2 to 16 rounds of jackpot) The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the "suggest" effect is "2 to 7". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, at the timing of “other round”, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “8, 9”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected at the “ending” timing. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation in which the player wins the jackpot once during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “1”, Only the “even / odd suggestion” effect can be selected, with “round match” timing being 20%, “other round” timing being 60%, and “ending” timing being 20%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, “round match” (that is, two rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 2”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 3 ". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the timing of the “round match”, an “even / odd suggestion” effect or “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect.

  When the value of the retraction counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, in the “other round” (that is, 1, 3 to 16 rounds of the jackpot), The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4 to 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “7”. I have. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the timing of “other round”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery for winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the “ending” timing, “even-odd suggestion” effect or “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation where the player has won one withdrawal jackpot during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “2”, The "even / odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "even / odd suggestion" effect at the timing of "round match" is 30%, and the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "round match" timing 10%, "even and odd suggestions" at the timing of "other rounds" are 30%, "1 negative suggestions" at the timing of "other rounds" are 10%, and "even and odd suggestions" at the timing of "ending" The effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the timing of "ending" is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, “round match” (that is, three rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0-3”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 4 ". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the timing of “round match”, the “even / odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect.

  If the value of the retraction counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, “other rounds” (ie, 1, 2, 4 to 16 rounds of jackpot) In the above, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “5, 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “7”. Has become. That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the “other round” timing, “even and odd suggestion” effects or “1 negative suggestion” The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the “ending” timing, “even-odd suggestion” effect or “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect and the “direct value suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot once during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “3”, The "even / odd suggestion" effect or the "1 negative suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "even / odd suggestion" effect at the "round match" timing is 40%, and the "1 negative suggestion" effect at the "round match" timing as well. Was 10%, "even and odd suggestions" at the timing of "other rounds" was 20%, "1 negative suggestions" at the timing of "other rounds" was 10%, and "even and odd suggestions" at the timing of "ending" The effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and the effect of “1 negative suggestion” at the timing of “ending” is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, “round match” (that is, four rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “2,” “456 suggestion” effect is “3”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the timing of “round match”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect and the “1 negative suggestion” are made. Or "456 suggestion" effect, and the "direct suggestion" effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, “other rounds” (that is, 1 to 3, 5 to 16 rounds of the jackpot) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5” and “456 suggestion” The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the effect is “6”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the timing of “other round”, “even and odd suggestion” effects and “1 negative suggestion” are performed. Effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning in the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i in the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the “ending” timing, “even and odd suggestion” effects and “1 negative suggestion” are performed. The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot once during the withdrawal period (that is, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “4”, The “even / odd suggestion” effect, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, or the “456 suggestive” effect can be selected, and the “even / odd suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 20%, and also at the timing of “round match”. "1 Negative suggestion" effect is 10%, "456 suggestion" effect at "round match" timing is 10%, "even odd suggestion" effect at "other round" timing is 10%, and "other round" effect is also "1 Negative Suggestion" production at the timing of "10%", "456 Suggestion" production at the "Other Round" timing at 10%, "Even and odd suggestion" production at the "Ending" timing 10%, same "1 negative suggests" director is 10 percent at the timing of "ending", like "456 suggested" directed at the timing of "ending" is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, “round match” (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “1, The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “2,” “456 suggestion” effect is “3”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “round match”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect and the “1 negative suggestion” are made. Effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, “other rounds” (ie, 1 to 4, 6 to 16 rounds of big hits) , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5” and “456 suggestion”. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the effect is “6”. In other words, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “other round”, “even and odd suggestion” effects, “1 negative suggestion” Effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect in “ending” is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is “7”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “ending”, “even-odd suggestion” effect, “1 negative suggestion” The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in a situation in which the player wins the jackpot once during the withdrawal period (ie, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “5”, The “even / odd suggestion” effect, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, or the “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “even / odd suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 10%, also at the timing of “round match”. "1 Negative suggestion" effect is 20%, "456 suggestion" effect at "round match" timing is 10%, "even odd suggestion" effect at "other round" timing is 10%, and "other round" effect is also "1 Negative Suggestion" production at the timing of "10%", "456 Suggestion" production at the "Other Round" timing at 10%, "Even and odd suggestion" production at the "Ending" timing 10%, same "1 negative suggests" director is 10 percent at the timing of "ending", like "456 suggested" directed at the timing of "ending" is selected at a rate of 10%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, “round match” (that is, 6 rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “1”. , The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is “2, 3”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the timing of “round match”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect and the “1 negative suggestion” are made. Effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  If the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "1" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "6", "other rounds" (that is, 1 to 5, 7 to 16 rounds of big hits) In the above, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “4”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “5” and “456 suggestion”. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the effect is “6”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the timing of the “other round”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect and the “1 negative suggestion” are performed. Effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  Further, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is performed. When the value of the counter 223i is "7", the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning in the execution of the "1 negative suggestion" effect is "8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i in the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “1” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the timing of “ending”, “even-odd suggestion” effect, “1 negative suggestion” The effect or “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “direct value suggestion” effect is not associated with the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins once in the pullback jackpot during the pullback period (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is “1”) and the probability set value is the set value “6”, The “even / odd suggestion” effect, the “1 negative suggestion” effect, or the “456 suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “even / odd suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 10%, and also at the timing of “round match”. "1 Negative suggestion" production is 10%, "456 suggestion" production at "round match" timing is 20%, "even odd suggestion" production at "other round" timing is 10%, and "other round" production is also "1 Negative Suggestion" production at the timing of "10%", "456 Suggestion" production at the "Other Round" timing at 10%, "Even and odd suggestion" production at the "Ending" timing 10%, same "1 negative suggests" director is 10 percent at the timing of "ending", like "456 suggested" directed at the timing of "ending" is selected at a rate of 10%.

  As described above, in the situation where the pull-out jackpot is won once during the pull-back period, the content of the probability set value is more specific than in the situation where the pull-back jackpot has not been won during the pull-back period. It is configured such that a “setting suggestion effect” suggested to the player is easily selected. Specifically, in the situation where the player has won one rebate jackpot during the withdrawal period, the content of the probability set value is determined by the player compared to the situation where no rebate jackpot has been won during the withdrawal period. The "1 negative suggestion" effect and the "456 suggestion" effect that are easy to guess are easily executed. Therefore, if the probability setting value is a high setting, it is suggested that in the situation where the pull-out jackpot is won once during the pull-back period, the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won and the setting is high. When the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, the direct game value is provided by winning the jackpot of the withdrawal during the withdrawal period, and the indirect game of suggesting the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It is easy to add value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, “round match” (that is, one round of jackpot) At the timing of the eyes), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “even / odd suggestion” effect is “0 to 2”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, at the timing of “round match”, only the “even / odd suggestion” effect may be selected. Therefore, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect in “ending” is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “3 to 9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “1”, at the “ending” timing, only the “even-odd suggestion” effect can be selected. The value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the other “setting suggestion effects” and cannot be selected.

  In other words, a situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is If “2”) and the probability set value is the set value “1”, the “even-odd suggestion” effect can be selected, and “even-odd suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 30 times. %, “Even-odd suggestion” effects at the timing of “ending” are selected at a rate of 70%.

  In the first embodiment, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “2”, the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i at the notification timing in “other round” is not allocated. That is, since the "setting suggestion effect" is not executed at the notification timing of "other round" in which the content of the probability setting value does not match the number of rounds of the notification timing, the probability setting value is determined only by the notification timing of "setting suggestion effect". Can be estimated by the player. Therefore, the probability setting value can be easily estimated for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, “round match” (that is, two rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “even and odd suggestion” effect is “0, 1”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “ 2,3 ". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the timing of the “round match”, the “even and odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct value suggestion” effect.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, the suggestion content lottery for winning the execution of the “even-odd suggestion” effect in “ending” is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “4 to 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “7 to 9”. That is, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “2”, at the timing of “ending”, “even-odd suggestion” effect or “1 negative suggestion” is performed. An effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct value suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, a situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot once again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots (that is, the value of the pullback counter 223h is If “2”) and the probability set value is the set value “2”, an “even-odd suggestion” effect or a “1 negative suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “round match” timing can be selected. The production of "even / odd suggestion" is 20%, the "1 negative suggestion" at the timing of "round match" is 20%, the "even / odd suggestion" at the timing of "ending" is 30%, and the timing of "ending" is also "1 Negative Suggestion" effect is selected at a rate of 30%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, “round match” (ie, three rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “1 negative suggestion” effect is “0 to 4”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “direct suggestion” effect is "5". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, the “1 negative suggestion” effect or the “direct The suggestion effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even and odd suggestion” effect or the “456 suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, the suggestion contents for winning the “1 negative suggestion” effect in “ending” The value of the lottery counter 223i is "6 to 8", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "direct value suggestion" effect is "9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “3”, at the “ending” timing, “1 negative suggestion” effect or “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even suggestion” effect or the “456 suggestion” effect.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value Is a set value “3”, a “1 negative suggestion” effect or a “direct value suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “1 negative suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 50%. "Direct suggestion" production at the timing of "round match" is 10%, "1 negative suggestion" production at the "ending" timing is 30%, and "direct suggestion" production at the "ending" timing is 10%. %.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, “round match” (that is, four rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "0-3", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the "direct suggestion" effect is " 4 ". That is, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the timing of “round match”, a “456 suggestion” effect or “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “5 to 8”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the “direct value suggestion” effect is “9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “4”, at the “ending” timing, “456 suggestion” effect or “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value Is the set value "4", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "direct suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect at the "round match" timing is 40%, and the "round match effect" "Timing suggestion" production at the timing of "10%", "456 suggestion" production at the "ending" timing is 40%, and "direct suggestion" production at the "ending" timing is 10%. Is selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, “round match” (that is, 5 rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is “0 to 2”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the “direct suggestion” effect is “0”. 3, 4 ". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, at the timing of “round match”, the effect “456 suggestion” or “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “5”, in the “ending”, the suggestion content lottery to win the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect is performed. The value of the counter 223i is "5 to 7", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i to win the execution of the "direct value suggestion" effect is "8, 9". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is "2" and the value of the set value memory 223d is "5", at the "ending" timing, "456 suggestion" production or "direct value suggestion" is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value Is the set value "5", the "456 suggestion" effect or the "direct suggestion" effect can be selected, and the "456 suggestion" effect at the "round match" timing is 30%, and the "round match effect" Of “direct suggestion” at the timing of “Ending”, 20% of “456 suggestion” at the timing of “ending”, and 20% of “direct suggestion” at the timing of “ending” Is selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 18, when the value of the retraction counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, “round match” (that is, six rounds of jackpot) At the timing of the eye), the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the "456 suggestion" effect is "0, 1", and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i winning the execution of the "direct suggestion" effect is " 2-4 ". That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the timing of “round match”, a “456 suggestion” effect or “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect cannot be selected because the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect.

  When the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, the suggestion content lottery for winning the execution of the “456 suggestion” effect in “ending” is performed. The value of the counter 223i is “5, 6”, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i for winning the execution of the “direct value suggestion” effect is “7 to 9”. That is, when the value of the pull-back counter 223h is “2” and the value of the set value memory 223d is “6”, at the “ending” timing, the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct value suggestion” is performed. The effect can be selected, and the value of the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is not associated with the “even-odd suggestion” effect or the “1 negative suggestion” effect, and cannot be selected.

  In other words, in the situation where the player wins the jackpot of the pullback during the pullback period, and subsequently wins the jackpot again during the second pullback period based on reaching the limit of the number of jackpots, and the probability setting value Is the set value “6”, the “456 suggestion” effect or the “direct suggestion” effect can be selected, and the “456 suggestion” effect at the timing of “round match” is 20%, and similarly the “round match” effect. Of "direct suggestion" production at the timing of "Ending", 30% of "456 suggestion" production at the timing of "ending", and 30% of "direct suggestion" production at the timing of "ending" Is selected.

  As described above, in the case where the withdrawal jackpot has been won during the withdrawal period, when the winning of the “setting suggestion effect” is performed, the more the number of withdrawals, the more specific the suggestion content in the “setting suggestion effect” is. (Directly or easily for the player to guess). For this reason, the merit that the player can easily recognize the setting content of the probability setting value as the number of times of retraction increases, and the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes easy to know can be provided. As a result, it is possible to achieve the direct addition of the game value of the jackpot of the withdrawal during the withdrawal period and the indirect addition of the game value of the suggestion of the probability set value, thereby improving the interest of the game during the withdrawal period. it can.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is configured to be easily executed at the timing related to the probability setting value itself (that is, the “round match” timing) according to the number of pullbacks. ing. That is, since the probability setting value can be estimated based on the number of times of withdrawal (situation) and the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, by grasping the number of pullbacks and the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, It is possible to create a game property that allows the player to estimate the probability set value, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The big hit effect flag 223k is a flag that indicates that a big hit effect is to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like, indicating that the big hit is being executed in the ON state.

  The jackpot effect flag 223k is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when an opening command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1222 in FIG. 36). Then, it is turned off at the timing when the big hit state ends (see S1309 in FIG. 38). When the big hit effect flag 223k is turned on, the MPU 221 executes a big hit effect setting process in the big hit effect process for executing a hit-related effect (see S1302 to S1311 in FIG. 38).

  The sub-round counter 223m is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit (the number of times the special winning opening 65a has been opened) on the audio lamp control device 113 side as well as the round counter 203i of the main control device 110.

  The value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to “0” as an initial value when the power is turned on, and a winning is won. It is added (see S1231 in FIG. 36). That is, in the first round of the jackpot, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to “1”, in the second round of the jackpot, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to “2”,. At the 16th round of the jackpot, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set to “16” (see S1231 in FIG. 36). Then, when the ending command indicating the end of the jackpot state is received from the main control device 110, the value of the sub-round counter 223m is cleared to “0” (see S1234 in FIG. 36).

  The sound ramp control device 113 grasps the number of rounds in the jackpot by referring to the value of the sub-round counter 223m, and the value of the sub-round counter 223m matches the notification timing of the determined “setting suggestion effect”. In this case (see S1302 in FIG. 38: Yes), the content of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is executed (see S1303 in FIG. 38).

  The ending flag 223n indicates that the ending period is in the on-state and the jackpot state, and the big symbol ending effect such as the “setting suggestion effect” at the “ending” timing should be executed on the third symbol display device 81 or the like. Is a flag that indicates

  The ending flag 223n is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when an ending command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1233 in FIG. 36). Then, it is turned off at the timing of setting “setting suggestion effect” at the timing of “ending” (see S1305 in FIG. 38). When the ending flag 223n is turned on, the MPU 221 performs an effect setting during the ending period in the jackpot effect (see S1303, S1305 to S1307 in FIG. 38).

  The sound ramp control device 113 grasps the timing of the ending effect at the jackpot by referring to the value of the ending flag 223n, and determines the setting value of the ending flag 223n and the notification timing of the determined “setting suggestion effect”. When they match (see S1302 in FIG. 38: Yes), the contents of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j are executed (see S1303 in FIG. 38).

  The first hold information storage area 223o is information for performing a variation effect of the held first special symbol, that is, acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110, and the number of reserved balls number command. It is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 regarding the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by the above.

  The sound ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223o and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to execute a production.

  The second hold information storage area 223p is information for performing a floating effect of the held second special symbol, that is, the information obtained from the counter buffer 203c along with the start winning in the main control device 110. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 relating to the change effect of the second different symbol transmitted by the above.

  The sound ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223p and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to execute a production.

  The execution information storage area 223q is obtained from the counter buffer 203c in accordance with the start winning prize in the main control device 110, that is, information on the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed on the third symbol display device 81. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

  When the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the MPU 221 stores the above-mentioned first hold information to execute the setting of the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Information for performing the variable effect stored in the first area for storing the first hold information in the area 223o or the second area for storing the second hold information in the second hold information storage area 223p (counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) Are shifted to the execution information storage area 223q.

  Here, the details of the first hold information storage area 223o, the second hold information storage area 223p, and the execution information storage area 223q will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first hold information storage area 223o, the second hold information storage area 223p, and the execution information storage area 223q.

  The first hold information storage area 223o has four areas of first hold information storage first to fourth areas. Each of the first to fourth information storage areas has a jackpot random number counter storage area 223o1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223o2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223o3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223o4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

  The second hold information storage area 223p has four areas of second hold information storage first to fourth areas, like the first hold information storage area 223o. Each of the first to fourth areas for storing the second hold information stores a jackpot random number counter storage area 223p1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored. 223p2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223p3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223p4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

  Further, in the execution information storage area 223q, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223q1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed is stored; The jackpot type counter storage area 223q2 in which the value of C2 is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223q3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the fluctuation type counter storage area in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored 223q4 is provided at least.

  Specifically, the execution information storage area 223q is an area corresponding to the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variation effect temporally suspended first among the suspended first special symbol variation effects. The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second specially-added first special symbol change effect temporally second of the held first special symbol change effect, and the first hold information storage third. The area is an area corresponding to the third specially-designated first special symbol variation effect temporally retained among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and the first reservation information storage fourth area is a reserved This is the area corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation effect that is temporally fourth-oldest held among the first special symbol fluctuation effects that have been performed. Further, the second reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect temporally held first among the second special symbol variation effects held, and The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol of the second special symbol, which is temporally second-oldest among the reserved second special symbol variable effects, and the second reserved information storage third. The area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol change effect that is temporally held third out of the held second special symbol change effect, and the second hold information storage fourth area is This is the area corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuating effect that is temporally fourth-oldest held in the second special symbol fluctuating effect.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command from the main control device 110, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the corresponding special symbol Is extracted from the pending ball number command. Then, the sound ramp control device 113 compares the extracted values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 among the corresponding first to fourth areas for storing the first hold information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second hold information. The jackpot random number counter storage areas 223o1 and 223p1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 223o2 and 223p2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223o3 and 223p3, and the variation type counter storage area 223o4 of the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command. , 223p4.

  Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special reserved at that time is executed. The number of fluctuation effects of the symbol is X, and the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are X-th temporally retained among the fluctuation effects of the retained first special symbol. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the respective counter storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage X-th area are stored. At this time, main controller 110 stores the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the first reserved X-th area of first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved X-th area of the main control device 110 is stored in the first reserved information storage X-area.

  On the other hand, when the sound ramp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, it is stored in the first hold information storage area 223o or the second hold information storage area 223p. Then, a process of shifting the executed information to the execution information storage area 223q is executed. In other words, when the hold information on the second special symbol is present, the execution of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that is temporally held first is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage first area corresponding to the fluctuation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the currently executed fluctuation effect. Are moved to the respective storage areas 223q1 to 223q4. On the other hand, when there is no on-hold information on the second special symbol and only on-hold information on the first special symbol, the execution of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol temporally held first is started. Therefore, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first reserved information storage first area corresponding to the fluctuating effect of the first special symbol retained first are set to the current values. It is moved to each storage area 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the fluctuating effect being executed.

  When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage second area. Each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each of the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the hold information storage fourth area The value is moved to the storage area 223p1~223p4 second holding information storage third area.

  Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223q1 to 223q4 of the execution information storage area 223q, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage second area. Each counter C1 to C3, CS stored in each of the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the hold information storage fourth area The value is moved to the storage area 223o1~223o4 the first holding information storage third area.

  As a result, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223q. In addition, the first to fourth areas for storing the first hold information and the first to fourth areas for storing the second hold information respectively include the first to first areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the four areas and the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved sphere storage area 203e are stored. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 includes counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and held by the main control device 110, respectively. 223q, the first hold information storage area 223o, and the second hold information storage area 223p.

  In performing a pre-reading process (not shown), the sound ramp control device 113 holds the first special symbol and the second special symbol retained from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c. The number of fluctuation effects (number of pending balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are read in advance, and it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is “1” and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is “0”, the reserved ball number of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is one time and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 0, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the first reserved information storage first area. I do. Further, if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is “0” and the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is “4”, the reserved ball number of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 4, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the second reserved information storage fourth area. I do.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113 only in one direction, and the audio ramp control device 113 accesses the RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can not. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 provides a first hold information storage area 223o and a second hold information storage area 223p to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effects are also stored in the sound ramp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first and second on-hold information storage areas 223o and 223p, respectively. , The pre-reading process can be executed by the audio lamp control device 113. That is, when the fluctuating effect of the suspended first special symbol and / or the second special symbol is executed, what is the result of the fluctuating effect (whether a big hit or not, and how long the fluctuating time will be) Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect, and execution of various effects can be determined.

  Note that the above-described shift processing in the first hold information storage area 223o or the second hold information storage area 223p and the execution information storage area 223q is based on the number of held balls (variation pattern) when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received. First reserved information storage first to fourth areas based on the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c before updating based on the reception of the command and the stop type command. Data is moved (shifted) only in the area corresponding to the fluctuating effect that is suspended among the first to fourth areas storing the second suspension information.

  For example, the value of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b before updating when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is “4”, and all the areas of the first reserved information storage area 223o (the first reserved information storage It is assumed that data is stored in the first to fourth areas). In this case, the data of the first area for storing the first hold information is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q, the data of the second area for storing the second hold information is shifted to the first area for storing the first hold information, and the first hold information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

  On the other hand, if the value of the sub first reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is “2”, the data in the first reserved information storage first area is stored in the execution information storage area. 223q, and shifts the data in the first reserved information storage second area to the first reserved information storage first area, thus ending the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first and third hold information storage third and fourth areas in which the variable effects are not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  Regardless of the presence / absence of data, each data of the first to fourth areas of the first pending information storage or the first to fourth areas of the second pending information storage is stored in an area having an area number 1 smaller (the execution information storage area 223q or The first hold information storage first to third areas or the second hold information storage first to third areas) may be respectively shifted. In this case, it is unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in each of the first to fourth areas for storing the first hold information or the first to fourth areas for storing the second hold information. Therefore, creation of a program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 35) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a special symbol change effect or continuous announcement in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S101). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable, a wait process (“1 second” in the present embodiment) is performed. Is executed (S102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main controller 110 is turned on (S104). If the result of the determination is that the RAM erase switch 503 has not been turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally. In this case, the process proceeds to S116 in order to initialize the RAM 203. I do.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S116 in such a case.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S156 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S104: No). S107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

  In the process of S109, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off and the setting key 501 is turned on when the power is turned on. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the display of the probability set value is started on the probability display device 504 (S110), and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111). The “setting confirmation mode” is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process proceeds to S113. I do. In the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the processes of S110 to S112 are skipped and the process proceeds to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the “normal mode”. I do.

  In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value, set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and thereafter, interruption is permitted (S114). Then, the processing shifts to a main processing described later (see FIG. 22).

  The set value command set here is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in an external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of a timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving the set value command, the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the set value memory 223d provided in the RAM 223 (FIG. 33). See S1013).

  On the other hand, in the process of S104, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the startup mode is the “RAM clear mode” or the “setting change mode”. In order to determine, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

  If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 has not been turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 in order to start up the start-up mode in the “RAM clear mode”.

  In the process of S116, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S116, S117) is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power regardless of the setting change, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. You. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power-off occurrence information is not set (S105: No), or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) (S107: No), the initialization of the RAM 203 is similarly performed. A conversion process (S116, S117) is executed.

  In the RAM initialization processing (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the RAM 203 is initialized with an initial value (for example, the first reserved ball number counter 203a). Is set to "0" (S117). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

  Here, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the “setting change mode”, and accepts a change (update) of the probability set value from a person related to the hall or the like and is determined. This is the process.

  In this setting change process (S118), first, the display of the current probability set value is started to be displayed on the probability display device 504 (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. With the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value on the probability display device 504 is started.

  Note that the probability set value displayed here is not necessarily the probability set value set before the power was turned off, but may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the “setting change mode”, the display on the probability display device 504 may be started at a specific probability set value without fail. The specific probability set value may be, for example, “1” which is the minimum value of the probability set values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “3” which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. 4 "or" 6 "which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. Thereby, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the person related to the hall and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

  On the other hand, when the startup mode is set to the “setting change mode”, the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off as it is. . This allows the person involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value while considering the probability set value that was set before the power was turned off.

  When the startup mode is set to the “setting change mode”, the probability display device 504 displays the probability setting value as “3” or more if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is “3” or more. Display starts as "3", and if the probability set value set before the power was turned off is less than "3", the display starts with the probability set value set before the power was turned off as it is. May be performed. For example, when the probability set value set before the power is turned off is high, such as “5” or “6”, there are many cases where the probability set value needs to be reduced slightly (for example, by 1) in many cases. In such a case, if display is started with the probability set value set as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability set value is incremented by one every time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. When the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on when the probability set value is “6”, the probability set value is changed to “1”. 1 ". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from “6” to “5”, the probability set value has to be substantially rotated one cycle while the RAM erase switch 503 is repeatedly turned on. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed as “3”, thereby reducing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, thereby reducing the probability setting value. The value can be updated.

  Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether the probability set value is in the range of “1” to “6” (S122), and the probability set value is not within the predetermined range, that is, becomes an abnormal probability set value. If there is (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be “1” which is the minimum value of the probability setting values (“1” to “6”), or “3” or “4” which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. Or the maximum value of the probability setting value may be “6”. On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S122, when it is determined that the probability setting value is in the range of “1” to “6” (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, and thus the processing in S123 is performed. Is skipped, and the process proceeds to S124.

  In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 has been turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

  As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability is increased. The setting value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

  In the update of the probability setting value in the process of S126, if the previous probability setting value is “1” to “5”, 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that time is “6”. Is performed by returning the probability setting value to “1”. The probability set value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504.

  The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed in the processing of S124 until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes). If it is determined that the RAM erasure switch 503 has been turned on by the processing of S124 (S124: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the probability display device 504 is changed to the probability set value to be used in a future game. (S127), and sets the jackpot random number table 202a according to the probability setting value (S128).

  After the process of S128, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned off (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is OFF, the setting key 501 may be determined to be OFF.

  As a result of the process of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S129: No), the process of S129 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off as a result of the process of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability set value on the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is performed. The process (S118) ends.

  After the end of the setting change process, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 20), shifts the process to S116, executes the RAM 203 initialization process (S116, S117), and erases (clears) the data in the RAM 203. . As described above, by turning on the RAM erasure switch 503 for the person in charge of the hall and the like in the process of S124 to determine the probability setting value, the person in charge of the hall and the like strongly recognizes that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased thereafter. Can be done.

  In the process of S124, the probability set value is determined by detecting the ON of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability set value may be determined by detecting the OFF of the setting key 501.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are roughly performed.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S152, S153).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (“9999”, “99” in the present embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S207 (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process described below (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

  Here, while this main processing is being executed, a timer interrupt processing (to be described later) (see FIG. 23) is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (in this embodiment, 2 milliseconds). In the timer interrupt processing, different processing is executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is performed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display device 83 is performed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when changing display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

  The processes of S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 are updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the regular hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random. In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the ordinary figure random number counter C4 using these as initial values for updating is performed. Randomness can be provided.

  In the processing of S151, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since the NMI interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 32 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S154 is executed.

  In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and the power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is transmitted to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S156), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) ends. Thereby, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed, the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S151 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151, as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process.

  Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S151. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interruption process and the main process (see FIG. 22), based on various processes, a command or a signal to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, a hall computer (not shown), or the like is generated. When a command is generated, the command is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, the hall computer is connected to the pachinko machine 10). (For example, an external output terminal plate (not shown)). In the external output process of S201, the output data such as the command stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the above signal is output to various devices.

  After the processing of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then, the hit processing for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed ( S203). This hit processing (S203) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After S203, next, the normal electric hand control process for executing the drive control process of the normal electric hand 64c is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the ordinary symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol, a winning symbol of the ordinary symbol (for example, “ When the symbol “○” appears and is in a hit state, the ordinary electric hand 64c is kept open for a predetermined time, and when a lost symbol of the ordinary symbol (for example, “x” symbol) appears, the ordinary electric hand 64c is displayed. To maintain the closed state.

  After the processing of S204, next, reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S205). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches a maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the ordinary figure random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the per-figure random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (the first embodiment). In the embodiment, when the numbers reach “9999”, “99”, “99”, “9”, and “99”, respectively, they are cleared to “0”. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number. The initial value of the counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the ordinary figure random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S208). The details of the start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a gate passage process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). If it is determined in this gate passage process (S209) that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the per-figure counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the per-figure per-counter C4 is obtained. The number is stored in a reserved ball storage area (not shown), and the number of reserved ordinary symbols is displayed on the ordinary symbol holding lamp 84.

  After executing the gate passing process (S209), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 based on the processing content of the starting winning process (S208) or the third symbol display device 81. A special figure fluctuation process for setting a fluctuation pattern of the third symbol and the like is executed (S210). The details of the special figure change process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), whether or not a normal symbol is correct is determined, and a variable process of the normal symbol based on the determination result is performed in the normal symbol display device 83. A figure variation process is executed (S211). In the ordinary figure fluctuation processing (S211), the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10) according to the value or the set value of the time reduction counter 203k or the time reduction infinity flag 203m described above. / 10). Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the result, and the display result corresponding to the result is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 83.

  After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), the launch control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213), and the timer interrupt process ends. .

  Note that the firing control process (S212) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on / off of the launch of a sphere. When the launch of the sphere is on, the information of the sphere launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the sphere launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the periodically executed processing is executed by the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 23), and in the main processing, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interruption processing. Although the description has been given of a case in which the processing is performed, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. . For example, the prize ball counting signal, the abnormal payout signal reading process (S202), the hitting process (S203), the normal electric winning combination control process (S204), and the switch reading process (S205) which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. ) May be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step of determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main processing is provided. Only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing executed at predetermined time intervals, but the processing executed at predetermined time intervals is executed in accordance with the state of the game. , The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly even in such a configuration.

  Next, the start winning process (S208), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S208).

  In the start winning process (S208), it is determined whether or not a ball has been won in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if there is a winning, the winning of winning the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. A process of storing (reserving) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the value of each of the held counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the number of held balls is executed.

  In the start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a (start winning) (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entrance switch (not shown) for detecting the entrance (winning) to the first starting port 64a, which is read in the switch reading processing (see S205 in FIG. 23). , And detects a ball entering the first starting port 64a over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there is a start winning) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first reserved ball number in the main controller 110). It is determined whether or not the number of activated balls N1 for the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one special symbol is less than an upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first starting port 64a, if the number of active balls N1 is not N1 <4 (S302: No), the starting prize-winning process (S208) ends, and a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Return to

  On the other hand, if the number N1 of operation-reserved balls is smaller than 4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number N1 of operation-reserved balls) is incremented by 1 (S303). Since this time is a prize to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as a storage location of each of the random numbers C1 to C3, CS1 (S304), and the processing is performed. Shifts to S309.

  In the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S301: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (start winning). (S305). Here, similarly to the first starting port 64a, a special figure 2 entrance switch (shown in FIG. 23) for detecting a ball entry (winning) into the second starting port 64b read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 23). Based on the output signal of (b), a ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 23).

  If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 64b (there is a winning start) (S305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second reserved ball number in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the number of active balls N2 of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S306). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting opening 64b (S305: No), or even if there is a winning in the second starting opening 64b, if the number N2 of pending operation balls is not N4 <4 (S306: No), this is determined. After the start winning process (S208), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the number N2 of pending operation balls is smaller than 4 (S306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number N2 of pending operation balls) is incremented by 1 (S307). Since this time is a prize in the second starting opening 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as a storage location of each of the random numbers C1 to C3 and CS1 (S308), and the processing is performed. Shifts to S309.

  In the process of S309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6), and are set as storage destinations in S304 or S308. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas or the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is If it is designated as a storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a Each is reserved (stored) in the storage area 203d4. To (S309). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as a storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are stopped. It is suspended (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S309).

  Specifically, for example, in the processing of S304 based on winning in the first starting port 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as a storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after the addition in the processing of S303. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each of the storage areas of the first reserved third area, the counters C1 to C3 are respectively contained in the respective stored areas of the first reserved fourth area. , CS1 are reserved.

  Further, for example, in the processing of S308 based on winning in the second starting port 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as a storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the processing of S307 is performed. Is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the second holding first area. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is “2”, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is “3” in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, the counter C1 to C3 is stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition is "4", each stored area of the second reserved fourth area is stored. , CS1 are reserved.

  Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number N1 of activated balls or the number N2 of activated balls) after the addition in the processing of S303 or S307, and the first value by the processing of S309. The retained ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is voiced. In order to transmit the command to the lamp control device 113, the command of the number of reserved balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the external ballparking command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S310 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S310 may use the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309, or the first reserved in the processing of S309. What read out the value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be used.

  Further, in the processing of S301 and S305, when a ball wins simultaneously in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the processing of winning the ball in the first starting port 64a is executed with priority, and the second starting The process of waiting for the ball to enter the mouth 64b is waited, and in the next start interrupting process (S208) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), the process of winning the ball to the waiting second starting port 64b is executed. May be configured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special figure change processing (S210), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special figure change processing (S210).

  This special figure variation processing (S210) is for performing dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and control relating to the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special figure variation process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S401). During the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during the predetermined time before the jackpot game start (that is, the jackpot opening), During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (ie, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S401, if any of the special symbols is in a big hit (S401: Yes), the special figure change processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23).

  In the process of S401, if it is determined that it is not a big hit (S401: No), it is next determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S402). If the display mode of the display device 37 is not the dynamic display (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after stopping the dynamic display (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). Thereby, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S403, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the dynamic display (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of active balls N2 of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) related to the symbol is larger than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not “0” (S404: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) related to the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S405). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the second special symbol is started by the later-described fluctuation start process (S410). This is because the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is reduced by one.

  Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 hold first area → hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

  On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number N2 of reserved balls for operation) is “0” (S404: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a Is determined (S407) is greater than or equal to “0” (the number N1 of operation-reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol reserved in the main controller 110). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) relating to the first special symbol. First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) (S408). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the suspended dynamic display (fluctuation effect) on the first special symbol is started by the later-described fluctuation start process (S410). This is because the number decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved sphere storage area 203d toward the reserved sphere execution area 203f. 1 hold first area → hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

  After the data shift processing in S406 or S409, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). The change start process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S407, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of activated reserved balls N1) is “0” (S407: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not the device is in a demonstration state, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S411). In this determination processing, after transmitting the demonstration command to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the operation reserved ball number N1 or It is determined that the demonstration is being performed until any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is determined to be larger than “0”.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not being performed (S411: No), a demonstration command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S411: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S201 of FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display demonstration command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs a demonstration on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demonstration command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no pending ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, if the fluctuating effect is not started even after the elapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S411 that the demonstration is not being performed (S411: No), a process of further determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation is performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S412 may be executed after the second predetermined time has elapsed to set the demonstration command. Thereby, when there is no pending ball after the fluctuation stop, the player can show the stopped design of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in dynamic display (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S413). ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the dynamic display time is set. If the (variable time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the special LED group 37b ( That is, a display mode in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern is set.

  On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S413: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set on the special symbol display device 37. (S415). The stop symbol is set in advance by a fluctuation start process (S410) described later with reference to FIG. In the change start process (S410), it is determined by the process of S406 or S409 whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. The symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined by the value of C2.

  In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, each of the lighting patterns corresponding to the type (type) of the big hit is used. The LED group is lit and displayed.

  When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop effect of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display of the special LED group 37b on the special symbol display device 37. In order to perform synchronized and confirmed display, a confirmed command is set (S416), and the process proceeds to S417. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Upon receiving this confirmation command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm and display the stopped symbol.

  In the process of S417, the RAM 203 determines whether or not the “time reduction state” or the “probability variation state” in which the prize assist function is finite (ie, until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times). It is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203k provided in is greater than “0” (S417).

  In the process of S417, if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is not “0” (S417: Yes), it is a “time reduction state” or a “probability variation state” in which the prize-winning function is finite, and in that state, Since the special symbol dynamic display (fluctuation effect) has been completed once, the value of the time reduction counter 203k is decremented by 1 (S418), the special figure fluctuation process (S210) ends, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) See).

  On the other hand, in the process of S417, if the value of the time reduction counter 203k is “0” (S417: No), it is not “time reduction state” or “probability fluctuation state” in which the winning assist function is limited, but “normal game state”. , "The latent probability variation state" or the "probability variation state" in which the prize assist function is infinite, the process of S418 is skipped, the special figure variation process (S210) ends, and the timer interrupt process ( Return to FIG. 23).

  Next, a change start process (S410), which is one of the special figure change processes (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S410). This fluctuation start processing (S410) performs a jackpot or a loss lottery (big hit lottery) according to the game state based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and special symbols. The dynamic pattern (variable pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are determined. When a jackpot is won, the jackpot type is determined according to whether or not the number of jackpots has reached the limit.

  In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is turned on to determine the game state (S451). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (that is, off) (S451: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortening state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low. Since the state is the probability state, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S452), and the process proceeds to S454. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is ON (S451: Yes), the gaming state is the “probability fluctuation state” or the “latent probability fluctuation state”, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S453), and the process proceeds to S454.

  In the process of S454, the jackpot lottery for judging whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S452 or S453 (hit / fail judgment). ) Processing is performed (S454).

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value. And the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low-probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value “1” is 50 / 10,000 and the setting value “6” is 60 / 10,000. When the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state (“probability variation state” or “latent probability variation state”), the jackpot probability is set to “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. , The jackpot random number value is defined so as to be 500/10000 with the setting value “6” and 600/10000 with the setting value “6”.

  In the process of S454, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is determined. As a result of the processing in S454, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S454: Yes), then, the number of wins of the jackpot this time reaches the limit number of times after initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit. Limit processing is performed in order to determine whether or not there is (S455).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a limit process (S455), which is one process of the change start process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the limit processing (S455).

  In this limit processing (S455), as described above, the special symbol has a high probability after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit and until the number of jackpots reaches six (that is, before reaching the limit). A jackpot type table 202b that can select the jackpot type in the jackpot from the jackpot types including the jackpot type to be set is set. On the other hand, every time the number of jackpots reaches six since the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after reaching the previous limit, the jackpot type of the jackpot is selected from the jackpot types that do not generate the special symbol high probability state. The jackpot type table 202b which can select the jackpot type is set.

  In the limit process (S455), first, in the process of S454 of the change start process (see FIG. 26), since it is determined that a jackpot has been won, 1 is added to the value of the limit counter 203h (S471). Then, a limit count command indicating that the limit counter 203h has been incremented by one is generated, and the limit count command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S472). The limit number command set in S472 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the next timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the limit number command, the sound ramp control device 113 recognizes that one big hit has occurred, and adds 1 to the value of the sub limit counter 223e (see S1213 in FIG. 35). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of jackpots based on the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, and executes control relating to “setting suggestion effect”.

  After the process of S472, it is then determined whether or not the value of the limit counter 203h added by 1 in S471 is less than "6" (S473). If the result of the determination is that the value of the limit counter 203h is less than “6” (S473: Yes), the limit number has not been reached in the current jackpot, so the jackpot type table 202b before reaching the limit is set (S474). ), The limit processing (S455) is terminated. After the end of the limit processing (S455), the process returns to the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 26).

  On the other hand, in the process of S473, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203h is not less than “6”, that is, when it is determined that the value of the limit counter 203h is “6” or more (S473: No), Since the limit number has been reached in the current big hit, the big hit type table 202b at the time of reaching the limit is set (S475), and this limit processing (S455) is ended. After the end of the limit processing (S455), the process returns to the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 26).

  In this way, the value of the limit counter 203h is updated every time a big hit occurs, and the big hit type is determined from the big hit types that can generate the high probability state of the special symbol according to the value of the limit counter 203h, By determining the jackpot type from the jackpot types that can not generate the special symbol high probability state, it is possible to always make the special symbol low probability state for each jackpot limit number, the special symbol high probability state It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive jackpot "continuously running" by continuing.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first special symbol before or at the time of reaching the limit set in the limit processing (S455), or the second before or at the time of reaching the limit. The display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the special symbol and the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f (S456). ).

  In this processing, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the jackpot type tables 202b1 and 202b2, that is, the maximum jackpot is 16 rounds, and the next jackpot is executed. Until the special symbol is in the high probability state and the prize assist function is continued, the "probability change state" shifts to the "probability change state" or after the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, the special symbol is in the high probability state and special "Probability change B" in which the prize assist function is effective until the symbol fluctuates 100 times, or "Latent probability change A" in which only the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next big hit after the maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, or the maximum round Special symbol is in low probability state, but special symbol fluctuates 100 times after 4 rounds of jackpot It is determined whether "Pickup A", in which the prize assist function is effective, or "Push A", in which the special symbol is in a low-probability state and has no prize assist function after the maximum number of rounds of four rounds. . Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot (display mode of the special LED group 37b) on the special symbol display device 37 is set.

  Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203f is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e. And if the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, The big hit type is determined from the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8) set in S474 or S475. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the above The big hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 (see FIG. 9) set in S474 or S475.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S457), and the process proceeds to S460. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Then, the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected rendering mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, a stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

  Specifically, in the processing of S457, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot. Select Then, a variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S454 that the hit is not a big hit (S454: No), the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S458). In the process of S458, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved ball number counter are set. The non-reach (shortened) effect mode and the "non-reach" effect mode are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b and / or the current game state. (Normal) ”,“ Normal Reach ”effect,“ Super Reach ”effect, or“ Special Reach ”effect. In the first embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “normal gaming state” or a “latency probability varying state”, or a “probability varying state” or a “time shortening state”, The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the effect mode is different.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined (S459), and the process proceeds to S460. In the processing of S459, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop symbol is displayed in the lost symbol. Specifically, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each of the loss display modes (effect modes) determined in the process of S458, the variation pattern table 202e corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the attached fluctuation pattern. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time that are defined in advance.

  Thus, the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the setting process of the effect mode and the variation pattern at the time of the loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number value C3 and CS1. Thus, the program can be shared, and the number of development steps at the time of development can be reduced.

  In the process of S460, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S457 and S459, the variation that notifies the display controller 114 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern via the audio lamp controller 113. A pattern command is set (S460). More specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won in the lottery and the jackpot is “probable change A”, and the “super reach” fluctuation pattern of “25 seconds” is selected, the jackpot / probable change A, a variation pattern command indicating “super reach” of “25 seconds” is set. In addition, if a change pattern of “25 seconds” “super reach” is selected after a loss in the jackpot lottery, a change pattern command indicating a loss of “25 seconds” “super reach” is set. .

  As described above, even if the fluctuation effect is the same fluctuation time, by setting the fluctuation pattern command together with the validity of the fluctuation effect and the content of the rough fluctuation pattern, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform And the fluctuation time can be grasped, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect can be determined in detail based on the information.

  Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S456 or S458 is set (S461), and the special figure change process (see FIG. 25). Return to).

  Specifically, for example, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “probable change A”, without specifying the specific third symbol stop mode (for example, “7” symbol etc.), “ A stop type command indicating "probable change A" is set. In addition, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is “time saving A”, it is “time saving A” without specifying a specific stop state of the third symbol (for example, “4” symbol or the like). Set a stop type command indicating that

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the “Super Reach” production mode is selected, the specific stop mode (for example, “787”) of the third symbol is not specified and “ A stop type command indicating that this is a “super reach” effect mode is set. In addition, if the jackpot is not won and the “normal reach” effect mode is selected, a specific stop mode (for example, “737” or the like) of the third symbol is not specified, and the “normal reach” at the time of the loss is specified. "Set a stop type command indicating the effect mode. Furthermore, if the jackpot is not won and the “non-reach” effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, “258” or the like) is not specified and “ A stop type command indicating that it is in the “non-reach” effect mode is set.

  As described above, by setting the rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variable effect in the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success / failure, and In detail, based on the information, the stop result of the variable effect can be determined.

  These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are used in an external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of a timer interrupt process to be executed next. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When receiving the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound ramp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the command, and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the hit processing (S203), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the hit processing (S203).

  In the winning process (S203), when a special symbol big hit occurs, the number of times (round number) of opening the special winning opening 65a is set according to the type of the big hit and the opening time of the special winning opening 65a is set. . Then, in the case of the jackpot state, the big win port opening / closing control process (S509) for opening or closing the big jackpot 65a is executed, and the big jackpot state ends when the big jackpot state ends. The process (S511) is executed.

  In the hitting process (S203), it is first determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (S501). If the result of the determination is that there is no big hit (S501: No), it is next determined whether or not the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has been completed (S502). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has not been completed (S502: No), the hit processing (S203) is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). If the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has been completed (S502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a big hit has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S503).

  As a result of the determination in S503, when it is determined that the big hit has not been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S503: No), the hit processing (S203) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23) See). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S503: Yes), first, in order to execute the control relating to the won jackpot, the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 16R. No, that is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type “probable change A” has been won (S504).

  As a result of the determination in S504, if the number of the winning jackpot rounds is 16R (S504: Yes), "16" is set to the round counter in order to perform the opening control of the winning port 65a 16 times in this jackpot ( S505), the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is not 16R, that is, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 4R (S504: No), in order to perform opening control of the jackpot 65a four times in this jackpot, the round is performed. "4" is set to the counter (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter. If the value of the round counter is set (ie, “1” or more), the MPU 201 controls the opening of the special winning opening 65a and sets the value of the round counter to 1 Subtract. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes “0”, the running big hit is terminated.

  In the process of S507, the jackpot opening time (for example, “10 seconds”) is set (S507), and then, in order to transmit an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set. The command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S508), the hit processing (S203) ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23).

  In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the big hit has already been made (S501: Yes), the special winning opening opening / closing control processing (S509) for executing the opening / closing control of the special winning opening 65a is executed.

  Here, the winning opening opening / closing control process (S509), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509). As described above, in the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509), the opening / closing control of the special winning opening 65a is executed based on the number of times of opening the special winning opening 65a set in the winning process (S203).

  In the special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509), first, the opening time set in S507 of the winning process (S203) or the interval set in S540 (see FIG. 30) of the opening process (S527) described later. It is determined whether or not the time has elapsed (S521). If it is determined that the opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S521: No), it is not the opening timing of the special winning opening 65a, so that the processing of S522 to S525 is skipped to continue closing the special winning opening 65a. Then, the process proceeds to S526.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S521, if the opening time or the interval time has elapsed (S521: Yes), since the opening timing of the special winning opening 65a is set, the opening of the special winning opening 65a is set (S522), and then the winning counter is set. “10” is set to 203j (S523). Then, the maximum opening time (30 seconds in the first embodiment) of the special winning opening 65a is set (S524), and an opening command indicating that the special winning opening 65a has been opened is generated. The command transmission ring buffer is set (S525), and the process proceeds to S526.

  In the process of S526, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 65a is being opened (S526). As a result of the determination, if the special winning opening 65a is not open (S526: No), the special winning opening 65a is not open, but is during the opening time or the interval time, and the process of S527 is skipped. The special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509) ends, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, in the processing of S526, when it is determined that the special winning opening 65a is being opened (S526: Yes), the open processing is performed to determine the closing condition of the open special winning opening 65a (S527). ), The special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509) ends, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 28).

  Here, the opening processing (S527), which is one of the special winning opening opening / closing control processing (S509) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S527). In the opening process (S527), a process is performed to determine whether or not the closing condition of the open special winning opening 65a is satisfied.

  In the opening process (S527), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in S524 of the above-described winning opening / closing control process (S509) has elapsed (S531). If the result of the determination is that the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed (S531: Yes), the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the special winning opening 65a in that round. The value of the counter 203j is cleared to "0" (S532), and the process shifts to S536 to close the special winning opening 65a. The closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S536 will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S531, if it is not the timing when the opening time of the special winning opening 65a has elapsed (S531: No), then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening switch (not shown) is turned on, that is, the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not the ball has won the ball 65a (S533).

  In the processing of S533, if the ball has won the special winning opening 65a (S533: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203j is subtracted by 1 (S534), and the value of the winning counter 203j obtained by subtracting 1 is "0". It is determined whether or not the value is larger than “” (S535). If the value of the winning counter 203j is not greater than "0" (S535: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter 203j is equal to or less than "0", 10 or more balls win in the special winning opening 65a. Since the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is satisfied, the process proceeds to S536 to close the special winning opening 65a.

  In the processing of S533, when it is determined that the ball has not won the special winning opening 65a (S533: No), or in the processing of S535, the value of the winning counter 203j is a value larger than “0”. If it is determined (S535: Yes), the closing condition of the special winning opening 65a is not satisfied, and the processing of S536 to S540 is skipped in order to continue opening of the special winning opening 65a, and this opening is performed. The middle processing (S527) ends. After the end of the opening process (S527), the process returns to the special winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 29).

  In the closing process of the special winning opening 65a from S536, first, the closing setting of the special winning opening 65a is performed (S536), and then the closing command indicating to the sound lamp control device 113 that the special winning opening 65a is closed. Is set (S537), and the process proceeds to S538. Note that the close command set in the process of S537 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the next timer interrupt process. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, in the processing of S538, since one round of the special winning opening 65a has been consumed, the value of the round counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S538), and the value of the round counter 203i obtained by subtracting 1 is a value larger than “0”. It is determined whether or not this is the case (S539). If the value of the round counter 203i is larger than “0” (S539: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of times the large winning opening 65a is left open) remains, so the next big winning An interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the opening of the mouth 65a is set (S540), the processing during opening (S527) ends, and the processing returns to the special winning opening opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 29).

  On the other hand, in the process of S539, when the value of the round counter 203i is not a value larger than “0” (S539: No), that is, when the value of the round counter 203i is equal to or less than “0”, the special winning opening in this jackpot Since all the opening operations of 65a have been completed, the interval time is not set (ie, S540 is skipped) in order to end the big hit state, and this opening processing (S527) is ended to open and close the special winning opening. The process returns to the control process (see FIG. 29).

  Returning to the hit processing (S203) in FIG. 28, the description will be continued. After the special winning opening opening / closing control process in S509 (see FIG. 29), it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter 203i is greater than “0” (S510). If the result of the determination is that the round counter 203i is greater than “0” (S510: Yes), the big hit state is continued, so the big hit end setting processing of S511 is skipped and this hit processing (S203) ) To end.

  On the other hand, in the process of S510, when the value of the round counter 203i is not a value larger than “0” (S510: No), that is, when the value of the round counter 203i is equal to or smaller than “0”, the special winning opening at the jackpot. Since all the opening operations of 65a have been completed, a big hit end process is performed to end the big hit state (S511), and this hit process (S203) is ended.

  Here, the big hit end processing (S511), which is one of the hit processing (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (S511). In the jackpot termination process (S511), the probability change flag 203g, the time saving counter 203k, or the time saving infinity flag 203m is set based on the winning jackpot type, and if the number of jackpots has reached the limit number, the limit is set. The number of times is cleared to “0”, and a process of initializing the number of times of the jackpot is executed.

  In the jackpot ending process (S511), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is the jackpot type “probable change A”, “probable change B” or “latency probable change A” (S551). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type is “probable change A”, “probable change B” or “latency probable change A” (S551: Yes), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is changed to the high probability of the special symbol until the next jackpot occurs. In order to set the state, the probable change flag 203g is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S554. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is not “probable change A”, “probable change B” or “latency probable change A” (S551: No), the jackpot type “time saving A” or “rush-through A” is won, and after the end of the jackpot In order to set the gaming state to the special symbol low probability state until the next big hit occurs, the probable change flag 203g is set to OFF (S553), and the process proceeds to S554.

  Next, in the process of S554, it is determined whether or not the won jackpot is the jackpot type “probable change B” or “time saving A” (S554). As a result of the determination, if the winning jackpot is the jackpot type “probable change B” or “time saving A” (S554: Yes), the winning state is activated until the special symbol changes 100 times as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot. In order to perform the process, “100” is set to the value of the time reduction counter 203k (S555), and the process proceeds to S557. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot type “probable change B” or “time saving A” (S554: No), the winning of the jackpot type “probable change A”, “latent probability change A” or “rush-through A” is a finite prize. The value of the time reduction counter 203k is cleared to "0" in order to make the auxiliary function inactive (S556), and the process proceeds to S557.

  In the process of S557, it is determined whether or not the won jackpot is the jackpot type “probable change A” (S557). As a result of the determination, if the winning jackpot is the jackpot type “probable change A” (S557: Yes), the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the time reduction infinity flag 203m in order to activate the prize assist function until the next jackpot occurs. Is set to ON (S558), and the process proceeds to S560. On the other hand, if it is not the jackpot type “probable change A” (S557: No), since the jackpot type “probable change B”, “latency probable change A”, “time saving A” or “rush-through A” is won, the time saving infinity flag 203m Is set to off (S559), and the process proceeds to S560.

  As described above, in the jackpot ending process (S511), by setting the probability change flag 203g, the time saving counter 203k, and the time saving infinity flag 203m based on the winning jackpot type, various game states can be started upon the end of the jackpot. Can be.

  Next, in the process of S560, it is determined whether the value of the limit counter 203h is less than “6” (S560). The value of the limit counter 203h is updated (1 added) at the start of the fluctuation when the jackpot is won (see S471 in FIG. 27), and when the updated value of the limit counter 203h is not less than “6”, that is, If the number of times is equal to or greater than "6" and has reached the limit number (S560: Yes), the value of the limit counter 203h is cleared to "0" in order to initialize the limit number of jackpots (S561). A limit clear command indicating that the value of 203h has been initialized (that is, the limit count has been initialized) is generated, and the limit clear command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. (S562), the process proceeds to S563. The limit clear command set in S562 is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

  Upon receiving the limit clear command, the sound ramp control device 113 recognizes that the jackpot limit count has been initialized, and clears the value of the sub limit counter 223e to “0” (see S1215 in FIG. 35). Then, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of jackpots based on the value of the sub-limit counter 223e, and executes control relating to “setting suggestion effect”.

  If the value of the limit counter 203h is less than “6” in the process of S560 (S560: Yes), the number of times of the limit has not yet been reached, and the processes of S561 and S562 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S563. Move to.

  As described above, in the jackpot end process (S511), when the number of hits of the jackpot has been reached, the limit number is initialized so that the effect at the time of reaching the limit can be executed during the execution of the jackpot. With the configuration, after the end of the jackpot, the number of jackpots can be counted from the initial value of the limit number.

  In the processing of S563, the ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (S563). The ending command set in the processing of S563 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 23) of the next timer interrupt processing. It is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the ending flag 223n to ON to execute a jackpot ending effect (see S1233 in FIG. 36). Then, the sound ramp control device 113 executes an effect in the ending period of the jackpot based on the set value of the ending flag 223n.

  After the end of the process of S563, a jackpot end setting process for setting an ending time or the like is performed (S564), and the jackpot end process (S511) ends, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 28).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110.

  The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S601). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 33) started upon power-on and a main process (see FIG. 34) executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 33, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1116 (see FIG. 34). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 34), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1116 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1004. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the processing is started in step S1003, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In addition, in the process of S1002, if the power-off process flag is ON (S1002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process of S1116 is being performed. Then, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to “0”.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output from the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 34). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is performed, the process of S1008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of step S1008 is performed via steps S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), the process skips S1009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1010, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to S1012.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is that when the process from S1004 to the process in S1008 is performed via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1012, it is determined whether a set value command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed until the set value command is received (S1012: No). When the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the set value memory 223d, and the process proceeds to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 34) is performed until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is received. By waiting for the transition, the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 can be reliably grasped on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the processing after the main processing can be executed based on the probability setting value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, since the start process of the main control device 110 has not been reached and the start process of the main control device 110 has not been completed normally, The startup process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally terminated, and the process does not shift to the main process. With this configuration, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the start-up process of the main control device 110 has been normally executed, and that the main control device 110 has started normally. Runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in a state where there is no running can be prevented.

  In the process of S1012, a process of waiting until a set value command is received from the main control device 110 is performed. In this case, only the sound lamp control device 113 is operated due to a momentary power failure (so-called momentary power failure). If the power is turned off and the main controller 110 keeps the power on, the sound lamp controller 113 repeatedly executes the process of S1012, and may not be able to return to the normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110 for a predetermined period, the control related to the set value is not executed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is in a safe mode in which other control is started. May be configured to start up.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

  When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S1101 was executed (S1101). If the one or more millisecond has not elapsed (S1101: No). , Without performing the processing of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. Unlike S1102 to S1109, which need not be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the fluctuation effect processing of S1110 is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S1111 in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, the command determination process is performed. , The setting relating to the variable effect can be performed without delay.

  In the process of S1101, if it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S1101 was performed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

  In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1107 described later (S1103), and thereafter, the power-on notification processing is executed (S1104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot effect process of executing an effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106. The big hit effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  If the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the period of the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation”, a process of changing the stage is performed, and display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. A rear image change command for the device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. Also, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation effect, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, and pressing the frame button 22 during the “reach display” allows the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to an effect having a feeling, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1106) is completed, then a lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, an output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1108, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / outputting process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Run in time.

  In the process of S1110, in order to display the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect process is a process for starting the variable effect based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110. Execute Details of the fluctuation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the fluctuation effect process, a command determination process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S1112, a counter updating process for updating various counters such as the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). Specifically, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is “99”, and the suggestion content lottery counter is 223). When 223i reaches "9"), each of them is cleared to "0".

  The updated setting suggestion lottery counter 223f is used for selecting whether or not to execute the “setting suggestion effect” during the jackpot, and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i is used when the execution lottery for the “setting suggestion effect” is won. , Is used to select the content (type and notification timing) of the “setting suggestion effect”.

  When the processing in S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off processing is executed (S1116). After the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1111). This command determination processing (S1111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 has been received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the command is changed by the main control device 110. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S1202). When it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

  The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in a later-described variation effect process (see FIG. 39), a display variation pattern for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used to set a command. After that, the command determination processing (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

  The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the case of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect in the variable effect process (see FIG. 39) described later. Used for After that, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set to ON (S1206), the command determination process (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  Note that the main control unit 110 transmits the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation effect is started, and then indicates the fluctuation production stop type in which the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON in the processing of S1206, in the fluctuation effect processing executed later (see FIG. 39), the fluctuation start flag 223a is first extracted based on the values of the respective counters C1 and the like included in the pending ball number command. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation effect matches the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation effect extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. Also, it is determined whether or not the stop type of the variable effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the pending ball number command matches the stop type of the variable effect extracted from the received stop type command. Is determined. As a result of these determinations, in one variation effect, if the variation pattern based on the pending ball number command does not match the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, or a stop type based on the pending ball number command and a stop type command If the stop type does not match, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, an abnormal command reception due to noise) has occurred, and error processing for indicating the abnormality is performed.

  When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1204 (S1204: No), it is next determined whether a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), it is determined whether or not the timing at which the “time reduction state” has ended (S1208). This determination may be made by counting the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol by using a sub time reduction counter (not shown), and determining whether or not the dynamic display has been performed 100 times after the big hit. This may be performed by a state command or the like indicating the end of the “time reduction state” from the device 110. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the “time reduction state” has ended (S1208: Yes), it means that the game state has transitioned from the “time reduction state” to the “normal game state”, and the so-called pullback period ends. Therefore, the value of the withdrawal counter 223h is cleared to "0" (S1209), the command determination process (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34). On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is not the end of the “time reduction state” (S1208: No), the processing of S1209 is skipped, the command determination processing (S1111) is ended, and the main processing (FIG. 34) See).

  As described above, when the "time reduction state" ends, the retraction counter 223h is cleared to "0" and the number of retractions is initialized. With such a configuration, how to withdraw the jackpot in a state where the withdrawal counter 223h is not initialized (that is, during the withdrawal period) and obtain the game value by the jackpot, and execute the “setting suggestion effect”. It is possible to create a game property of increasing the probability and its accuracy, and to improve the interest of the game during the withdrawal period.

  As a result of the processing in S1207, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), it is next determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command ( The value of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) is extracted, and the extracted value is used as a sub-number of the sound ramp control device 113. It is stored in the one reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (S1211). Then, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, which are also included in the reserved ball number command, are updated to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b updated in S1211. Alternatively, the first to fourth areas of the first pending information storage area 223o indicated by the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223c, or the first to fourth information storage areas of the second pending information storage area 223p. To the fourth area (S1212), the command determination process (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. By the processing of S1212, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the second sub reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound ramp control device 113 is changed to the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 223c of the main control device 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the second sub reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound ramp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. The value can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110.

  Further, the audio lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first hold information storage area 223o or the second hold information storage area 223p. I have. That is, when the suspended fluctuation effect is executed, the result of the fluctuation effect is determined (whether or not a jackpot, the fluctuation time, etc.) will be determined before the execution of the fluctuation effect, Execution of various effects can be determined.

  As a result of the processing of S1210, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S1210: No), it is next determined whether or not the limit number command has been received (S1213). If the limit number command has been received (S1213: Yes), it means that one big hit has occurred, so the value of the sub limit counter 223e is incremented by 1 (S1214), and this command determination processing (S1111) is performed. Then, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As a result of the processing in S1213, if it is determined that the limit number command has not been received (S1213: No), then it is determined whether a limit clear command has been received (S1215). If the limit clear command has been received (S1215: Yes), it means that the jackpot limit count has been cleared, so the value of the sub limit counter 223e is cleared to "0" (S1216), and this command determination processing is performed. After (S1111), the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the limit counter 203h stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the sound ramp control device 113 stores and updates the number of special symbol jackpots based on the command (limit count command or limit clear command) transmitted from the main control device 110 and related to the number of jackpots. The number of jackpots in the pachinko machine 10 is managed.

  As a result of the processing in S1215, when it is determined that the limit clear command has not been received (S1215: No), it is determined whether a command related to the jackpot, that is, an opening command, an opening command, a closing command, an ending command, or the like has been received. It is determined whether it is (S1217). If it is determined that the command relating to the jackpot has not been received (S1217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1219), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated. Return to the processing (see FIG. 34). Here, if the received other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, the corresponding command is processed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the received command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1219, temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then executed as a command output of the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the processing (S1102).

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1217, when it is determined that the command relating to the jackpot has been received (S1217: Yes), the process proceeds to the jackpot command processing (S1218) in order to execute the processing corresponding to the command relating to the jackpot. After the end of the jackpot command process, the command determination process (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  Here, the jackpot command process (S1218) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot command processing (S1218). In the jackpot command process (S1218), as described above, a process based on a command (opening command, opening command, closing command, ending command, or the like) related to the jackpot received from the main control device 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot command process (S1218), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1221: Yes), the big hit effect flag 223k is set to ON to start the big hit effect (S1222), and the process proceeds to S1223. I do. By turning on the big hit effect flag 223k in S1222, various effects at the time of the big hit can be executed in the big hit effect process (see FIG. 38) described later.

  In the process of S1223, the jackpot type of the jackpot is the jackpot type “latent probability change A”, “hour reduction A” or “rush A” (hereinafter, the jackpot type “hidden probability change A”, “hour reduction A” or “rush A” Is sometimes collectively referred to as “unfavorable hit”) (S1223). As a result of the determination, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is the unfavorable hit (S1223: Yes), the unfavorable hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1224), and the process proceeds to S1226. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a disadvantage jackpot (S1223: No), that is, when the winning jackpot type is “probable variation A” or “probability variation B”, the disadvantage flag 223g is set to off. (S1225), the process proceeds to S1226.

  Next, in the process of S1226, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is the jackpot that has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period (S1226). In this determination, the value of the sub limit counter 223e is “6” and the value of the sub time reduction counter (not shown) that counts the number of time reductions in the sound ramp control device 113 indicates the “time reduction state”. (For example, "100" is set when entering the "time reduction state", and the value of the sub-time saving counter is larger than "0" when 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuation effect is executed.) , The jackpot is determined to be the jackpot that has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period, otherwise (for example, if the value of the sub limit counter 223e is other than “6”, or If the value is "0"), it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot that has reached the limit number of times during the pullback period.

  As a result of the determination in S1226, if it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot that has reached the limit number during the withdrawal period (S1226: Yes), then, is the value of the withdrawal counter 223h smaller than “2”? It is determined whether or not the value is “2” (S1227). If the value of the retraction counter 223h is smaller than “2” (S1227), the value of the retraction counter 223h is incremented by 1 (S1228), and the process proceeds to S1229. On the other hand, if the value of the retraction counter 223h is not smaller than “2” (S1227: No), that is, if the value of the retraction counter 223h is “2” or more, the value of the retraction counter 223h has already reached the maximum value. Therefore, the process of S1228 is skipped, and the process shifts to S1229.

  In the process of S1226, if it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot that has reached the limit number during the pullback period (S1226: No), the processes of S1227 and S1228 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1229.

  In the process of S1229, the values of the disadvantage flag 223g and the return counter 223h set in the processes of S1224 to S1228, and the respective values of the set value memory 223d and the sub limit counter 223e set in the previous process are set. Is executed, a setting suggestion lottery process of executing the "setting suggestion effect" and executing the content and timing lottery is executed (S1229). After the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is executed, the big hit command process (S1218) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35).

  Here, the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229). The setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is executed in the jackpot command process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” lottery and A lottery of the contents (type and notification timing) is executed.

  In the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229), first, the setting suggestion lottery table 222e (see FIG. 17) based on each value of the retraction counter 223h, the disadvantage flag 223g, the sub limit counter 223e, and the setting suggestion lottery counter 223f. , An execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect” is performed (S1241), and the process proceeds to S1242.

  In the process of S1242, it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” in the process of S1241 has been won (S1242), and if it is determined that the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” has been won (S1242). S1242: Yes) Then, based on the values of the pull-back counter 223h, the setting value memory 223d, and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i, the suggestion content lottery table 222f (see FIG. 18) is used to execute the "setting suggestion effect". The type and the notification timing are randomly selected (S1243). Then, the data relating to the type and the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” determined in S1243 are set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j (S1244), and the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229) is ended to execute the jackpot command process (S1229). Return to FIG. 36).

  Based on the setting suggestion content memory 223j set in the process of S1244, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a "setting suggestion effect" in a jackpot effect process (S1105; see FIG. 38) described later.

  In the process of S1242, when it is determined that the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” has not been won (S1242: No), the processes of S1243 and S1244 are skipped, and the setting suggestion lottery process (S1229). And returns to the jackpot command processing (see FIG. 36).

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1221 that the opening command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not a release command has been received (S1230). As a result of the determination, if the release command has been received (S1230: Yes), it means that the number of rounds at the time of the big hit has been updated, so the value of the sub-round counter 223m is incremented by 1 (S1231), and the big hit command processing ( S1218) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35). The sound ramp control device 113 grasps the number of rounds of the jackpot being executed based on the value of the sub-round counter 223m, and executes various effects (for example, “setting suggestion effect”).

  If the release command has not been received as a result of the processing in S1230 (S1230: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S1232). As a result of the determination, if the ending command has been received (S1232: Yes), the ending flag 223n is set to ON to execute the jackpot end effect (S1233), and then the value of the sub-round counter 223m is set. “0” is cleared (S1234), and the big hit command processing (S1218) ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 35). Based on the set value of the ending flag 223n, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether it is the timing of the ending at the time of the big hit and executes various effects (for example, “setting suggestion effect” or the like).

  If the ending command has not been received as a result of the processing in S1232 (S1232: No), command processing relating to other jackpots (for example, processing corresponding to a close command) is executed (S1235), and this jackpot command processing ( S1218) ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 35).

  Next, the jackpot effect process (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect process (S1105). This jackpot effect process (S1105) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the sound lamp control device 113, and when the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to ON based on the reception of the opening command. Then, each process related to the effect at the time of the big hit is performed.

  In the big hit effect process (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit effect flag 223k is set to ON (S1301). If the big hit effect flag 223k is not set to ON (S1301: No) as a result of the determination, the big hit effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34) because the big hit is not in progress. On the other hand, if the big hit effect flag 223k is set to ON (S1301: Yes), the process goes to S1302 in order to execute the effect related to the big hit because the big hit is in progress.

  In the process of S1302, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” matches the number of jackpot rounds (S1302). This determination is based on the fact that the data regarding the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is a value corresponding to the sub-round counter 223m (for example, if the data regarding the notification timing is “3”, The number is three rounds). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” matches the number of rounds of the jackpot (S1302: Yes), it is determined that the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” has arrived, and the setting suggestion content has been reached. The execution of the "setting suggestion effect" according to the type (contents) of the "setting suggestion effect" stored in the memory 223j is set (S1303), and the big hit effect process (S1105) is ended to execute the main process (FIG. 34). See). In the process of S1302, if the determination of S1302: Yes is performed even once, the configuration is such that the determination of S1302: Yes is not performed again in the jackpot effect process (S1105) in the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1302, when it is determined that the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” does not match the number of rounds of the jackpot (S1302: No), then, it is determined whether the ending flag 223n is turned on. Is determined (S1304). If the ending flag 223n is turned on (S1304: Yes), the ending flag 223n is set to off (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306.

  In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not “ending” is set as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” (S1306). This determination is made based on whether or not the data relating to the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is a value indicating “ending”. When it is determined that “ending” is set as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” (S1306: Yes), the process proceeds to S1303, and the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” comes. It is determined that the setting suggestion effect has been performed, and the “setting suggestion effect” according to the type (contents) of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is executed and set (S1303).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if “ending” is not set as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” (S1306: No), next, although “winning lottery” of the “setting suggestion effect” has been won, It is determined whether the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (absent) (S1307).

  Specifically, for example, five rounds are set as the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, but the fifth round is executed in the big hit because the winning type of the winning is the 4R big hit. If not, it is determined that the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (there is no timing).

  In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds has not arrived (S1307: Yes), the notification timing of the "setting suggestion effect" is determined. Then, the process proceeds to S1303 in order to execute the “setting suggestion effect” in the ending effect, and it is considered that the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” has arrived, and the “setting” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j. The “setting suggestion effect” corresponding to the type (contents) of the suggestion effect is executed and set (S1303). In the process of S1307, if there is a timing at which the notification timing set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j matches the number of rounds, or “setting suggestion effect” is set in the setting suggestion content memory 223j in the first place. If not (no win), (S1307: No), the big hit effect process (S1105) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  In this way, even if the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won, even if the initially set number of rounds is not a jackpot type, the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is The change processing is executed to ensure that the “setting suggestion effect” is executed in the ending effect that can be executed in all jackpot types. Therefore, without changing the video development or software development at the time of model development, while executing the playability of "performing the" setting suggestion effect "in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability set value", temporarily If not, by executing the "setting suggestion effect" in the ending effect, the winning "setting suggestion effect" can be reliably executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the process of S1304, when it is determined that the ending flag 223n is not turned on (S1304: No), it is next determined whether or not the timing of ending the big hit state, that is, whether or not the ending period has ended. (S1308). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot state (S1308: Yes), the jackpot effect flag 223k is set to off (S1309), and then the value of the setting suggestion content memory 223j is initialized (for example, , Null data) (S1310), terminates the big hit effect processing (S1105), and returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  In the process of S1308, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the jackpot state (S1308: No), the other processes related to the jackpot effect are executed (S1311), and the jackpot effect process (S1105) ends. Then, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  Next, the variable effect process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variable effect processing (S1110). The variable effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and executes various processes for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variable effect.

  In the fluctuation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1401). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The process (S1110) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation effect because both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received. (S1402) Next, it is determined whether or not the variable effect to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of the discrimination, if it is a variable effect relating to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data included in the first hold information storage first area provided in the first hold information storage area 223o is transferred to the execution information storage area 223q. The data is shifted (S1404), and the data included in the first to third information storage areas provided in the first to-hold information storage area 223o is shifted to the first to third information storage first to third areas. (S1405), the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

  That is, in this case, the variation effect of the reserved first special symbol is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol suspended temporally first is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first pending information first area corresponding to the performed fluctuation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223q1-223q4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage first area. Moving the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage third area to the respective storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223o1 to 223o4 of the first hold information storage third area.

  As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main controller 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223q, and the first reserved information storage first The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored in the first to fourth areas, respectively. become.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1403 that the effect is not a variable effect on the first special symbol, that is, if it is determined that the effect is a variable effect on the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second hold information storage area The data included in the second reserved information storage first area provided in the second reserved information storage area 223p is shifted to the execution information storage area 223q (S1407), and the second reserved information storage second data provided in the second reserved information storage area 223p is further shifted. The data included in the fourth to fourth areas is shifted to the second to third information storage first to third areas (S1408), the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410. Transition.

  In other words, in this case, the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that has been held is reduced by one, and the execution of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that has been held first in time is started. The values of the respective counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second pending information first area corresponding to the performed fluctuation effect are stored in the execution information storage area 223q corresponding to the fluctuation effect being executed. It moves to each storage area 223q1-223q4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second area for storing the second hold information are moved to the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the first area for storing the second hold information. Moving the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage third area to the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage second area, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage fourth area are moved to the respective storage areas 223p1 to 223p4 of the second hold information storage third area.

  As a result, the same value as each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 is stored in the execution information storage area 223q, and the second reserved information storage first The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 are stored in the first to fourth areas, respectively. become.

  Next, in the process of S1410, a variation pattern of a variation effect to be executed now is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q (S1410). After that, in order to display a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 34). You. The display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display.

  Next, in the process of S1412, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223q, the type of stop of the variable effect to be executed from now on is acquired (S1412). After that, a stop type command for display is set based on the acquired stop type of the variable effect (S1413), the variable effect process (S1110) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by a command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 34). You. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set in the process of S1411 is definitely displayed. I do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, “setting suggestion effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 40, a case in which “setting suggestion effect” of “direct value suggestion” is executed at the timing of “round match” when the probability setting value is set to “6” will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a case where “round match” is selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”. FIG. 40 (a) illustrates that the big hit results in the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram showing the derived state, and FIG. 40 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the jackpot game is started from the state of FIG. 40 (a) and the fifth round is being performed. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 40 (b) and a “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the sixth round, and FIG. 40 (d) is a diagram showing FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where the big hit game progressed from the state of (c) and the 7th round was performed. In FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (d), the display style of the third symbol is omitted (the same applies to the description in FIGS. 41, 42 and 47).

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the left display area Dm1 (left symbol row Z1; the same applies hereinafter) of the main display area Dm, the middle display area Dm2 (middle symbol row Z2; the same applies hereinafter), and the right display area. In Dm3 (right symbol row Z3; the same applies hereinafter), a state in which the third symbol of the symbol “6” is stopped and displayed is shown. In other words, it indicates that the big hit with the “6” symbol has been derived in the variable effect.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in such a manner as to be glad that the jackpot result is derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. The words are displayed in praise of the player with the symbol "Yeah!" In the left small area Ds1, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 40 (b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 40 (a), the jackpot game progresses, and the entire main display area Dm is enlarged, and the sub-display area Ds and the like are erased. Have been. In the center portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, one of a plurality of character designs that have appeared in a fluctuation effect or the like that a jackpot has occurred appears in each corresponding round. In FIG. A character design appears, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character design was happy to have a big hit.

  In addition, in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, a big hit symbol display area in which a symbol display indicating the type of the third symbol which has caused the current big hit game is displayed is formed. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the symbol “6” is displayed in the big hit symbol display area. Therefore, the player can check the third symbol in which the big hit has occurred during the big hit game by the symbol display displayed in the big hit symbol display area, and play the game while estimating the game state after the big hit game ends. It can be carried out.

  Further, a round number display area for displaying the current round number is formed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm. In FIG. 40B, a character display of “round” indicating that the display is a round display and a numerical display of “5” indicating the current number of rounds are displayed immediately below the character display in the round number display area. ing. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40B, it is suggested that the big hit game of the fifth round is performed. Therefore, the player can grasp the progress status of the current jackpot game by the round display in the round number display area.

  In the main display area Dm, below the round number display area, not only the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, that is, not only the prize balls based on the prize in the grand prize port 65a but also the general prize port 63 A prize ball number display area for displaying the total number of prize balls based on winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (both shown in FIG. 3) is formed. In FIG. 40 (b), a total prize ball number display capable of displaying a 4-digit number “0643 shots” is displayed in the prize ball number display area.

  The breakdown of the 643 prize balls in FIG. 40 (b) is, for example, 10 wins in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fourth round × 15 prize balls × 4 rounds = 600 rounds, 5 rounds Number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 2 × 15 prize balls = 30 shots, number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 × 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 3 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 award ball = 3 balls, for a total of 643 shots.

  As described above, the player can grasp the prize balls (game value) acquired in the current jackpot game by the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area, and obtain the prize balls. It is possible to feel a sense of exaltation and a sense of accomplishment due to the increased number of the winning prize balls. In FIG. 40B, since the “setting suggestion effect” is not executed, the total prize ball number displayed in the prize ball number display area is a general font (for example, Gothic font; It may be referred to as "general font.").

  Next, FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the situation of FIG. 40 (b) and the jackpot game of the sixth round is being executed. Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a girl character design different from the character design of FIG. 40 (b) appears, and an effect is performed as if the girl character design was happy to have a big hit. Is done. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed as in FIG. 40B is shown.

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round advances by one from FIG. 40B, and a round display of “6” is displayed. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40 (c), the round display of “6” indicates that the jackpot game of the sixth round is being performed.

  Further, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is displayed. At this time, as the "direct suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" in the probability setting value "6", only the font of "6" indicating the tens place in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is a special typeface font. Is displayed in.

  The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 40 (c) is, for example, 10 wins in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round × 15 prize balls × 5 rounds = 750 rounds, 6 rounds The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 65 x 15 prize balls = 0, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 1 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 764 shots.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the “direct suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect”, the font of the same number as the probability set value in the total prize ball display is changed from a general font to a special font. It is configured. Specifically, for example, when the probability setting value is “4”, when the number “4” appears, the font of the number is changed from a general font to a special font, and the probability setting value is changed. Is "6", when the number "6" appears, the font of the number is changed from a general font to a special typeface font.

  In the case of “456 suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, when the probability setting value is “4”, “5” or “6”, “4”, “5” and “6” are displayed in the total prize ball number display. Is changed from a general font to a special typeface font.

  Furthermore, in the case of “1 negative suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, when the probability setting value is other than “1”, that is, when the probability setting value is “2” to “6”, the total number of prize balls In the display, the font of the numerals “2” to “6” is changed from a general font to a special font.

  Also, in the “setting suggestion effect” “even / odd suggestion”, if the probability setting value is an odd number (ie, “1”, “3” or “5”), “1” is displayed in the total prize ball number display. , "3" and "5" are changed from the general font to the special font, and if the probability setting value is an even number (that is, "2", "4" or "6"), In the display of the total number of prize balls, the font of the numerals "2", "4" and "6" is changed from a general font to a special font.

  By configuring in this way, the player can determine in advance that, when a special font appears in the total prize balls displayed during the jackpot game, the special font suggests a probability set value. By visually recognizing this special font on condition that it is recognized, it is possible to grasp or guess that the number indicated by the special font is the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the "setting suggestion effect" of "1 negative suggestion" and "even and odd suggestion", the number of "0" or "7" to "9" also means an even or odd number, or a number greater than 1. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to execute the "setting suggestion effect" only with a number in the range of "1" to "6" used as the probability setting value. In other words, the numbers that are not used in the probability setting value are expressed only in a general font. With such a configuration, the expression range of the “setting suggestion effect” can be limited, the rarity of the “setting suggestion effect” can be increased, and the effect of the “setting suggestion effect” can be enhanced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 40 (c), only the tens place “6” in the total prize ball display of “0764 shots” in the sixth round is displayed in a special typeface font, and the other numbers are in a general font. Is displayed. For this reason, the player who sees the special font and the general font, if “1 negative suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, first displays “2,074 shots” in the total prize ball number display “2. Numerals above ", that is, both" 6 "and" 4 "must be special fonts. In FIG. 40 (c), only" 6 "is a special font. Know that there is no.

  Next, if it is “even suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, in the total prize ball number display of “0764 shots”, both the even numbers “6” and “4” must be special fonts. In FIG. 40 (c), since only "6" is a special typeface font, it is understood that it is not "even and odd".

  Next, in the case of "456 suggestion" effect of "setting suggestion effect", in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots", both "6" and "4" must be special fonts. However, in FIG. 40C, since only “6” is a special typeface font, it is understood that it is not “456 suggestion”.

  Next, in the case of "direct suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the numbers of the total prize ball display of "0764 shots" is displayed in a special typeface font, and FIG. Since only the numeral “6” is displayed in the special typeface font, it is understood that “immediate value suggestion” in the probability setting value “6” is provisionally applied.

  Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 40 (c), only “direct value suggestion” is applied as “setting suggestion effect”, and the player grasps that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is “6”. be able to. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while guessing at which round the "setting suggestion effect" is performed or not, and when a special font appears. In addition, it is possible to guess what kind of “setting suggestion effect” is, and to create a game property of estimating a probability setting value from the content, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, in a round in which the "setting suggestion effect" can be performed, the content of the "setting suggestion effect" can be easily reflected accurately, so that the content of the "setting suggestion effect" can be easily understood. it can. Specifically, in the numbers that are not related to the probability setting values “1” to “6” used in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the numbers “0”, “7” to “9”, the “setting” "Suggested production" cannot be expressed.

  Therefore, instead of “0” and “7” to “9”, which are not used as the probability setting values, the contents of the numerical display of the total prize ball number display are any of “1” to “6” used as the probability setting values. By displaying the total prize ball count including the number of prize balls, it is possible to accurately reflect the content of the “setting suggestion effect” in the total prize ball count display. For example, while the total prize ball number display including “4”, “5”, and “6” (for example, “0456 shots”, “0564 shots”, “0654 shots”, etc.) is displayed, the “setting suggestion effect” is displayed. Is executed, if "4", "5" and "6" are displayed in a special typeface font, "setting suggestion effect" may be "456 suggestion" or "1 negative suggestion" When "4" and "6" are displayed in a special typeface font, it can be understood that "even or odd" is indicated, and only one of the numbers (for example, only the number "6") is special. When displayed in a font typeface, it can be understood that it is "immediate value suggestion".

  On the other hand, in the case of the total prize ball number display including the numerical display of “0”, “7” to “9”, even when the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, any “setting suggestion effect” is performed. Even if executed, the contents of the "setting suggestion effect" may not be able to be expressed.

  Therefore, the player has a playability of how to display the total number of prize balls that easily reflects the content of the “setting suggestion effect” easily. For example, during a jackpot, other than the special winning opening 65a The game can be played while a ball is awarded to the general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a and / or the second starting opening 64b, and the total number of prize balls in which the content of the "setting suggestion effect" is easily reflected accurately. Depending on the playability of whether or not to include the numerical display of "1" to "6" in the display, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the total prize ball number display of the sixth round in FIG. 40C indicates that the number of prizes to the general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, and the second starting opening 64b cannot be changed from the fifth round. "0764 shots" when there is no winning in the special winning opening 65a, "0779 shots" when there is one winning in the special winning opening 65a, and "0779 shots" when there are two winnings in the special winning opening 65a. 0794 shots "," 0809 shots "when three prizes are won in the grand prize mouth 65a," 0824 shots "when four prizes are entered in the grand prize mouth 65a, 5 prizes in the grand prize mouth 65a In the case of “0839 shots”, “0854 shots” when there are six winnings in the special winning opening 65a, “0869 shots” when there are seven winnings in the special winning opening 65a, "0884 shots" when there are eight winnings, and "089" when there are nine winnings in the special winning opening 65a. Departure ", the prize to the winning opening 65a is displayed" 0914-shot "in the case of 10. Therefore, in the case where the probability set value is “6”, in the “direct suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect” in the sixth round, the case where the number of winnings to the special winning opening 65a is 0 or 7 The special font "6" which is the "immediate suggestion" appears.

  When the number of winnings in the special winning opening 65a reaches ten, the jackpot game of the sixth round ends, but if a special typeface font appears as "setting suggestion effect", it will take a while. During the period (for example, 3 seconds), the display of the special typeface font as the “setting suggestion effect” is maintained. With this configuration, the “setting suggestion effect” can be reliably executed in the round that has been won for the “setting suggestion effect”.

  Next, FIG. 40 (d) shows a state in which the big hit game has progressed from the situation of FIG. 40 (c) and the big hit game of the seventh round is being executed. Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a boy character design different from the character designs of FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c) appears, and is the boy character design happy to have a big hit? Is performed. In the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed as in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (c).

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round is advanced by one from FIG. 40C, and a round display of “7” is displayed. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 40D, the round display of “7” indicates that the big hit game of the seventh round is being performed.

  Further, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of "0914 shots" is displayed. In FIG. 40D, since the “setting suggestion effect” has not been executed, the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area is represented by a general font.

  The breakdown of the 914 prize balls in FIG. 40 (d) is, for example, 10 prize balls × 15 prize balls × 6 rounds = 900 rounds, 7 rounds in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the sixth round. The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 65 x 15 prize balls = 0, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 1 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 914 shots.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a case in which “setting suggestion effect” of “even / odd suggestion” is executed at the timing of “other round” when the probability setting value is set to “6” will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a case where “other round” is selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”. FIG. 41 (a) shows that the big hit result in the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 is shown. FIG. 41B is a diagram showing a state where the jackpot game has been started from the state of FIG. 41A and the fourth round is being performed. 41C is a diagram illustrating a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 41B and the “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the fifth round, and FIG. 41D is a diagram illustrating the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the state where a big hit game progressed from the state of (c) and the 6th round was performed.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which the third symbol of "6" symbol is stopped and displayed. . In other words, it indicates that the big hit with the “6” symbol has been derived in the variable effect.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in such a manner as to be glad that the jackpot result is derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. The words are displayed in praise of the player with the symbol "Yeah!" In the left small area Ds1, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 41 (b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 41 (a), the jackpot game proceeds, and the entire main display area Dm is enlarged, and the sub-display area Ds and the like are erased. Have been. In the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, any of a plurality of character designs appearing in a fluctuation effect etc. appears for each corresponding round. In FIG. 41 (b), a boy character design appears. Thus, an effect is executed as if the boy character design was pleased with the occurrence of the big hit.

  In addition, in the big hit symbol display area, a state where “6” symbol is displayed is shown. Further, in the number-of-rounds display area, a numeral display of "4" is displayed, which indicates that the jackpot game of the fourth round is being performed.

  Also, a total prize ball number display capable of displaying a four-digit number “0562” is displayed in the prize ball number display area. The breakdown of the 562 prize balls in FIG. 41 (b) is, for example, 10 wins in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the third round × 15 prize balls × 3 rounds = 450 rounds, 4 rounds 6 wins in the large winning opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 90 shots, 2 wins in the general winning opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 20 shots, 2 wins in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 2 balls, for a total of 562 shots.

  In FIG. 41B, since the “setting suggestion effect” is not executed, the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area is represented by a general font.

  Next, FIG. 41 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game progresses from the situation of FIG. 41 (b) and the fifth round big hit game is executed. Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, an uncle character design different from the character design of FIG. 41B appears, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character design is pleased that a big hit has occurred. Is done. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed as in FIG. 41B is shown.

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round advances by one from FIG. 41 (b), and a round display of “5” is displayed. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 41 (c), the round display of "5" indicates that the jackpot game of the fifth round is being performed.

  Furthermore, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of “0652 shots” is displayed. At this time, as the “even suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect” in the probability setting value “6”, the font of “6” indicating the hundredth place which is an even number in the total prize ball number display of “0652 shots” is one. Is displayed in a special typeface font.

  The breakdown of the 652 prize balls in FIG. 41 (c) is, for example, 10 prize balls × 15 prize balls × 4 rounds = 600 rounds, 5 rounds in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fourth round. The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 2 x 15 winning balls = 30 shots, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 2 x 10 winning balls = 20 shots, 2 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 2 balls, for a total of 652 shots.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41 (c), in the display of the total prize balls of “0652 shots” in the fifth round, the “6” in the hundredth place and the “2” in the first place are special fonts. All other numbers are displayed in general font. For this reason, the player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, if “1 negative suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, first displays “2652 shots” in the total prize ball number display of “0652 shots”. "," 2 "," 5 ", and" 6 "must be special fonts. However, in FIG. 41C," 6 "and" 2 "are special fonts. Since "5" is a general font, it is grasped that it is not "1 negative suggestion".

  Next, if it is "even suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", in the total prize ball number display of "0652 shots", even "6" and "2" must both be special fonts. Since both "6" and "2" are displayed in the special font in FIG. 41 (c), it is understood that the even display of "even and odd suggestion" is provisionally applied.

  Next, in the case of "456 suggestion" effect of "setting suggestion effect", both "6" and "5" in the total prize ball number display of "0652 shots" must be special fonts. However, in FIG. 41 (c), only "6" is a special typeface font, "5" is not a special typeface font, and "2" is a special typeface font. Figure out.

  Next, in the case of "direct suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the numbers is displayed in a special font, and in FIG. 41 (c), a plurality of numbers of "6" and "2" are displayed. Because it is not displayed in a special typeface font, grasp that it is not "direct value suggestion".

  Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 41 (c), only the even number display of “even suggestion” is applied as the “setting suggestion effect”, and the player sets the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 to an even number by the “even suggestion”. You can understand that there is.

  In addition, the total prize ball number display of the fifth round in FIG. 41 (c) indicates that the number of prizes to the general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, and the second starting opening 64b cannot be changed from the fourth round. "0622 shots" when there is no winning in the special winning opening 65a, "0637 shots" when there is one winning in the special winning opening 65a, and "0627 shots" when there are two winnings in the special winning opening 65a. "0652 shots", "0667 shots" in the case of three winnings in the special winning opening 65a, "0682 shots" in the case of four winnings in the special winning opening 65a, 5 winnings in the special winning opening 65a In the case of “0697 shots”, “0712 shots” when there are six winnings in the special winning opening 65a, “0727 shots” when there are seven winnings in the special winning opening 65a, If there are eight prizes, “0742 shots” will be given. Departure ", the prize to the winning opening 65a is displayed" 0772-shot "in the case of 10. Therefore, in the “setting suggestion effect” of the “fifth round” in the “round suggestion effect”, the number of winnings in the large winning opening 65 a is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, , 8, and 10 (that is, except for 9), the special typeface fonts “2”, “4”, and “6” that are “even / odd suggestions” appear.

  Next, FIG. 41D shows a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the situation of FIG. 41C and the jackpot game of the sixth round is being executed. Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a girl character design different from the character designs of FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c) has appeared, and is the girl character design happy to have a big hit? Is performed. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed as in FIGS. 41 (b) and 41 (c).

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round advances by one from FIG. 41 (c), and the round display “6” is displayed. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 41D, the round display of “6” indicates that the big hit game of the sixth round is being performed.

  Further, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is displayed. In FIG. 41D, since the “setting suggestion effect” has not been executed, the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area is expressed by a general font.

  The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 41 (d) is, for example, 10 wins in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round × 15 prize balls × 5 rounds = 750 rounds, 6 rounds The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 65 x 15 prize balls = 0, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 1 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 764 shots.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a case will be described in which the “setting suggestion effect” of “456 suggestion” is executed at the timing of “round match” when the probability setting value is set to “6”. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a case where “round match” is selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”. FIG. 42 (a) shows that the big hit results in the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing the derived state, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram showing a state where the jackpot game has been started from the state of FIG. 42 (a) and the fifth round has been performed. (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 42 (b) and the “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the sixth round, and FIG. 42 (d) is a diagram showing It is the figure which showed the state where the big hit game progressed from the state of (c) and the 7th round was performed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a state in which the third symbol “6” is stopped and displayed is shown. . In other words, it indicates that the big hit with the “6” symbol has been derived in the variable effect.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in such a manner as to be glad that the jackpot result is derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. The words are displayed in praise of the player with the symbol "Yeah!" In the left small area Ds1, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Next, in FIG. 42 (b), the jackpot game is started from the situation of FIG. 42 (a), the jackpot game progresses, and the entire main display area Dm is enlarged, and the sub-display area Ds and the like are erased. Have been. In the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, one of a plurality of character designs that appear in a variable effect or the like indicating that a big hit has occurred appears in each round. In FIG. 41B, the uncle character design is used. Is displayed, and an effect is executed as if the uncle character design is pleased that a big hit has occurred.

  In addition, in the big hit symbol display area, a state where “6” symbol is displayed is shown. Further, in the number-of-rounds display area, a numeral display of "5" is displayed, which indicates that the jackpot game of the fifth round is being performed.

  In addition, a total prize ball number display capable of displaying a four-digit number “0643” is displayed in the prize ball number display area. The breakdown of the 643 prize balls in FIG. 42 (b) is, for example, 10 prize balls × 15 prize balls × 4 rounds = 600 rounds, 5 rounds in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fourth round. Number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 2 × 15 prize balls = 30 shots, number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 × 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 3 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 award ball = 3 balls, for a total of 643 shots.

  In FIG. 42B, since the “setting suggestion effect” has not been executed, the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area is represented by a general font.

  Next, FIG. 42 (c) shows a state where the big hit game has progressed from the situation of FIG. 42 (b) and the big hit game of the sixth round is being executed. Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a girl character design different from the character design of FIG. 42 (b) appears, and an effect is performed as if the girl character design was happy to have a big hit. Is done. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed, as in FIG.

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, the round advances by one from FIG. 42 (b), and the round display “6” is displayed. That is, in the round number display area of FIG. 42C, the round display of “6” indicates that the big hit game of the sixth round is being performed.

  Further, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is displayed. At this time, as the “456 suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect” in the probability setting value “6”, a number corresponding to “4”, “5” or “6” in the total prize ball number display of “0764 shots” The font of “6” indicating the tens place and the font of “4” indicating the ones place are displayed in special fonts.

  The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 42 (c) is, for example, 10 prize balls × 15 prize balls × 5 rounds = 750 rounds, 6 rounds in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round. The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye 65 x 15 prize balls = 0, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 1 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 winnings in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 764 shots.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), in the total prize ball number display of “0764 shots” in the sixth round, the tens place “6” and the first place “4” are special fonts. It is displayed, and the other digits are displayed in general font. For this reason, the player who sees the special font and the general font, if “1 negative suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, first displays “2,074 shots” in the total prize ball number display “2. 42, the numbers “6” and “4” must both be special fonts. In FIG. 42 (c), since “6” and “4” are special fonts, “1” Grasp that the "negative suggestion" is provisionally applied.

  Next, if it is “even suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, in the total prize ball number display of “0764 shots”, both the even numbers “6” and “4” must be special fonts. In FIG. 42 (c), since "6" and "4" are special typeface fonts, it is understood that "even and odd suggestions" are provisionally applied.

  Next, in the case of "456 suggestion" effect of "setting suggestion effect", in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots", both "6" and "4" must be special fonts. However, in FIG. 42 (c), since "6" and "4" are special fonts, it is understood that "456 suggestion" is provisionally applied.

  Next, if "direct suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the numbers must be a special typeface font, but in FIG. 42 (c), a plurality of "6" and "4" Because numbers are not displayed in special typeface fonts, understand that they are not "direct suggestions." Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 42 (c), a plurality of suggestions of “1 negative suggestion”, “even / odd suggestion”, and “456 suggestion” are applied as “setting suggestion effect”, and therefore, the player needs only this display mode. Then, it is difficult to estimate the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value cannot be clearly grasped.

  Next, FIG. 42 (d) shows a state where four balls have been won in the special winning opening 65a during the same sixth round jackpot game from the situation of FIG. 42 (c). Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, the same girl character design as the character design in FIG. 42 (c) is continuously displayed. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed as in FIG.

  Here, in the award ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total award ball number display of “0824 shots” is displayed. At this time, as the “456 suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect” in the probability setting value “6”, a number corresponding to “4”, “5” or “6” in the total prize ball number display of “0824 shots” Only the font of "4" indicating the first place is displayed in a special typeface font.

  The breakdown of the 824 prize balls in FIG. 42 (d) is, for example, 10 prize balls × 15 prize balls × 5 rounds = 750 rounds, 6 rounds in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round. 4 prizes in the large winning opening 65a x 15 prize balls = 60 shots, 1 prize in the general prize opening 63 x 10 prize balls = 10 shots, 4 prizes in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 824 shots.

  In the state shown in FIG. 42D, the first place “4” is displayed in a special typeface font in the total prize ball display of “0824 shots” in the sixth round, and the numbers in the other places are general fonts. Is displayed in. For this reason, the player who sees the special typeface font and the general font, if “1 negative suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, first displays “2824 shots” in the total prize ball number display of “2824 shots”. 42, "2" and "4" must be displayed in a special font, but in FIG. 42 (d), only "4" is a special font. Unlike the situation in ()), grasp that it is not "1 negative suggestion".

  Next, if it is "even suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", in the total prize ball number display of "0824 shots", even numbers "2" and "4" must both be special fonts. In FIG. 42 (d), only “4” is a special typeface font, which is different from the situation of FIG. 42 (c).

  Next, in the case of the "setting suggestion effect" effect of "456 suggestion", in the total prize ball number display of "0824 shots", the numbers matching the numbers "4", "5" and "6" are special. Since it is displayed in a font style font, the first place “4” is a special font style, and therefore, in FIG. 42D, “456 suggestion” is provisionally applied similarly to FIG. 42C. Understand that.

  Next, if "direct suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", only one of the numbers must be a special font, but in FIG. 42 (d), only the numeral "4" is a special font. Since it is displayed, it is understood that “immediate value suggestion” in the probability setting value “4” is applied to provisional proposal. However, in FIG. 42 (c), in view of the fact that a plurality of numbers are displayed in a special typeface font, since it is already known that "direct suggestion" does not apply, it is not "direct suggestion". Figure out.

  Therefore, by checking the plurality of display modes of FIGS. 42C and 42D, only “456 suggestion” is applied as the “setting suggestion effect”, and the player performs the “setting suggestion effect”. In one round, the content of the total prize ball number display, which changes every time a ball wins in the special winning opening 65a or the like, is checked at any time, so that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is “4” or more (ie, "4", "5" or "6").

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a so-called limit function, the situation when the player wins a jackpot type that is disadvantageous (low in advantage) to the player is limited. It is configured such that the closer to the number of times, the easier it is to win the “setting suggestion effect”. For this reason, even when the disadvantageous jackpot type is won and the remaining limit number of the jackpot is reduced, the closer the number of jackpots at the time of winning to the limit number is, the more the player is suggested to set the probability setting value. It is easy to execute, and the advantage that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known is provided, and the disappointment due to winning the disadvantaged jackpot type can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from getting excited about the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a situation where the jackpot of the pullback is won during the pullback period, by winning the jackpot again, it becomes easier to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. It is configured. With this configuration, in addition to the game value of winning the jackpot during the pullback period, the advantage that it becomes easy to recognize the content of the probability set value is given, and how to win the jackpot during the pullback period. It is possible to create amusement and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, when the player predicts that the number of jackpots is different from the limit number in a situation where the “setting suggestion effect” has not yet been executed after winning the pullback jackpot (for example, the remaining limit The number of times 5 to 3 times) is a right-handed game, a lottery game with the second special symbol is performed, and a winning type is determined to be an advantageous jackpot type for the player. It is possible to aim for the prize ball. On the other hand, if the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game to perform a lottery game with the first special symbol, and dares to win a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, thereby indirectly playing the game. It is possible to aim for the execution of the value-setting suggestion effect. As a result, the game characteristics of hitting the ball in different ways based on the number of jackpots and the number of pullbacks are created. It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a situation where the jackpot of the pull-back is won during the pull-back period, the jackpot is won again, so that the content of the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the “setting suggestion effect” is provided. Are configured to be more easily suggested. In other words, it is configured to easily recognize the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 by causing the player to win the jackpot of the pullback, winning the jackpot in that state, and in particular, winning the jackpot type disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, in addition to the game value of winning the jackpot during the pullback period, the advantage that it becomes easy to recognize the content of the probability set value is given, and how to win the jackpot during the pullback period. It is possible to create amusement and improve the interest of the game. Further, for example, when the player predicts that the number of jackpots is different from the limit number in a situation where the “setting suggestion effect” has not yet been executed after winning the pullback jackpot (for example, the remaining limit The number of times 5 to 3 times) is a right-handed game, a lottery game with the second special symbol is performed, and a winning type is determined to be an advantageous jackpot type for the player. It is possible to aim for the prize ball. On the other hand, if the player predicts that the number of times is close to the limit, the player performs a left-handed game to perform a lottery game with the first special symbol, and dares to win a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, thereby indirectly playing the game. It is possible to aim for the execution of the value-setting suggestion effect. As a result, the game characteristics of hitting the ball in different ways based on the number of jackpots and the number of pullbacks are created. It is possible to improve the interest of the people.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the “setting suggestion effect” is more easily executed as the situation when the disadvantageous jackpot is won is closer to the limit number. In other words, when the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, it is configured that there is a high possibility that the number of remaining limits at the time of a big hit is small or absent. Therefore, by changing the execution probability of the "setting suggestion effect" according to the limit number, in the case where the "setting suggestion effect" is executed, the gaming ability to make the player guess the limit number and whether or not the limit has been reached is created. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the probability setting value is higher, “round match” is easier to be selected as the notification timing for executing the “setting suggestion effect”, and as the probability setting value is lower, the “setting suggestion effect” is higher. Is configured so that “Ending” is easily selected as the notification timing for executing As described above, the timing at which the set value can be notified is changed according to the probability set value. The higher the probability set value, the easier the “setting suggestion effect” is performed during the round, while the lower the probability set value, the more the ending By configuring so that the "setting suggestion effect" is easily executed during the game, it is possible to create a gaming property that allows the player to estimate the probability setting value according to the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect", thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the round selected as the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is not executed, the notification timing is changed to change the notification timing during any of the jackpots. It is configured to execute “setting suggestion effect” at the notification timing. In this way, by executing the notification timing change processing, when the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is won, even if there is no round corresponding to the initially notified notification timing, all the jackpot types are In the ending effect that can be executed in the above, “setting suggestion effect” can be surely executed. Therefore, even if the game specifications are changed at the time of model development, without changing the video development or software development at the time of model development, the "setting suggestion effect in the round corresponding to the set value of the probability set value" Even if there is no applicable round, even if there is no applicable round, by executing the `` setting suggestion effect '' in the ending effect, the winning `` setting suggestion effect '' is surely executed As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the case where the payback jackpot has been won during the pullback period, when the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is won, the larger the number of withdrawals, the more “setting suggestion”. The content of the suggestion in the “effect” is configured so that the player can easily estimate the probability set value. For this reason, the merit that the player can easily recognize the setting content of the probability setting value as the number of times of retraction increases, and the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 becomes easy to know can be provided. As a result, it is possible to achieve the direct addition of the game value of the jackpot of the withdrawal during the withdrawal period and the indirect addition of the game value of the suggestion of the probability set value, thereby improving the interest of the game during the withdrawal period. it can.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is such that the timing associated with the probability setting value itself (ie, the timing of the “round match”) increases as the winning of the pullback during the pullback period is won. ). That is, the probability setting value can be estimated based on the number of pullbacks and the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”. Therefore, by grasping the number of pullbacks and the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, It is possible to create a game property for estimating the probability set value and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the “time reduction state” ends, the retraction counter 223h is cleared to “0” and the number of retractions is initialized. With such a configuration, the probability of executing the “setting suggestion effect” while returning the jackpot in a state where the withdrawal counter 223h is not initialized (that is, during the withdrawal period) and giving the game value by the jackpot is provided. In addition, it is possible to create a game property of improving the accuracy of the game, and to improve the interest of the game during the withdrawal period.

  Also, by configuring the “setting suggestion effect” to be executable in any of a plurality of rounds (that is, round 1 to round 6) corresponding to the numbers used in the probability setting value in the jackpot game, The game can be performed while allowing the player to guess whether the "setting suggestion effect" is performed or not, and even if a special typeface font appears, the type of the "setting suggestion effect" In addition to estimating whether or not the game is a game, it is possible to create a game property of estimating a probability set value from the content, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in a round in which the "setting suggestion effect" can be performed, the content of the "setting suggestion effect" is easily reflected accurately, so that the content of the "setting suggestion effect" can be easily understood. it can. Specifically, by displaying the total prize ball count including any one of “1” to “6” used as the probability set value, the content of “setting suggestion effect” can be accurately displayed in the total prize ball count display. Can be reflected in Therefore, the player has a playability of how to display the total number of prize balls that easily reflects the content of the “setting suggestion effect” easily. For example, during a jackpot, other than the special winning opening 65a The game can be played while a ball is awarded to the general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a and / or the second starting opening 64b, and the total number of prize balls in which the content of the "setting suggestion effect" is easily reflected accurately. Depending on the playability of whether or not to include the numerical display of "1" to "6" in the display, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, during each round game, when the winning in the special winning opening 65a reaches the maximum winning number (ie, 10), the jackpot game of each round ends, but the “setting suggestion effect” When a special font is displayed, the display of the special font as "setting suggestion effect" is maintained for a while (for example, 3 seconds). With this configuration, the “setting suggestion effect” can be reliably executed in the round that has been won for the “setting suggestion effect”.

  Further, when the content of the total prize ball display for executing the “setting suggestion effect” is updated as needed in the round in which the “setting suggestion effect” is performed, and the content of the “setting suggestion effect” applies to the updated number. Each time the number appears, a special typeface font, which is "setting suggestion effect", is displayed so that the probability setting value can be suggested. With this configuration, in one round in which “setting suggestion effect” can be performed, a special font is displayed at the timing when a prize ball is generated by causing a ball to be won in the special winning opening 65 a or the general winning opening 63. The game can be performed while allowing the player to confirm whether or not to give out, and it is possible to provide not only a prize ball (game value) in the first prize but also a suggestion of a probability set value based on the one prize. Can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to create a game at each timing when one prize is generated, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, it is easy to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. Was composed. On the other hand, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small jackpot with a small game value given from a jackpot (a jackpot advantageous to the player and a jackpot disadvantageous to the player) is selected, the “setting” is set. It is configured to make it easier to win the "Suggested production".

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 corresponding to a 2nd special symbol.

  The special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 of the second embodiment have a low probability of a special symbol whose gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time shortened state” for each set value, respectively. For the low probability state used in the state (period other than "probability fluctuation state" or "latency probability fluctuation state") and the height of the special symbol with a higher probability that the gaming state will be a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol It is divided into two types, a high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" which is a probability state.

  Then, for each set value, the number of jackpot random numbers included in the low probability state and the high probability state is differently set. Further, an increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for shifting from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for from the number of loss random numbers corresponding to the loss. In this way, by changing the number of jackpot random numbers according to the game state, the jackpot probability is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  On the other hand, although the small hit probability in each special symbol is different, each set value for each special symbol, and the number of small hit random numbers included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are the same. It is set as follows. In this way, by setting the number of small hit random numbers to the same value for each set value and for the low probability state and the high probability state, the game value considering only the small hit game in all the set values and the game state Are equalized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the increase in the jackpot random value in the high probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by the low probability state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is configured to compensate for the number of loss random numbers in the above, while being within the range of the number of loss random values in the low probability state. In addition, the number of the small random number values is not changed between the low probability state and the high probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the second embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot random number which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 The number of the values (big hit random numbers) of the counter C1 is 50, and the values “0 to 49” are defined (set) in the special drawing 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the setting value is “1”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 500, and the value “0 to 499” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is set so that it is easy to win 10 times from the probability state.

  When the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 are both 100, and The value “50 to 149” in the case of the probability state or the value “500 to 599” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “1” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (losing random value) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value. For 9850, the values “150 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) that result in a loss is 9400 other than the jackpot random value and the small random number value, and the values “600 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “1” is set to be 9850/10000 = 98.5 / 100 (that is, 98.5%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%).

  Note that, for all the set values (that is, “1” to “6”), the increase in the jackpot random number value of the first special symbol in the special symbol high-probability state is determined by the number of lost random number values in the “normal game state”. , And the number of jackpot random numbers in the increment is within the range of the number of lost random numbers in the “normal gaming state”.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 52, and the value is “0 to 51”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 520, and the values “0 to 519” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the high probability of the special symbol is high. The state is set so as to be easily hit 10 times from the low probability state.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the set value “1”. As in the case, the value “52 to 151” in the case of the low probability state or the value “520 to 619” in the case of the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. Have been. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “2” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. 9848, and the values “152 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is 9380 remaining values other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “620 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the setting value “2” is set to be 9848/10000 = 98.48 / 100 (that is, 98.48%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9380/10000 = 93.8 / 100 (that is, 93.8%).

  Therefore, although the set value “2” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “1”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 54, and the value is “0 to 53”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 202a1 is 540, and the value “0 to 539” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (ie, 5.4%), and the high probability of the special symbol is high. The state is set so as to be easily hit 10 times from the low probability state.

  When the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 are set to “1” and “1”. As in the case of the set value “2”, the number is 100 each, and the values “54 to 153” in the low probability state or the values “540 to 639” in the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table. It is defined (set) in 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “3” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. 9846, and the values “154 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) that are lost is 9360 remaining numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “640 to 9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 9846/10000 = 98.46 / 100 (that is, 98.46%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9360/10000 = 93.6 / 100 (that is, 93.6%).

  Therefore, although the set value “3” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as compared with the set value “2”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 56, and the value is “0 to 55”. Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” is set to be 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 560, and the value “0 to 559” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.6%), and the high probability of the special symbol is high. The state is set so as to be easily hit 10 times from the low probability state.

  When the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “3”, the values are “56” to “155” in the case of the low probability state or “560 to 659” in the case of the high probability state, respectively, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “4” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 9844, the values “156 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of lost random numbers (losing random number values) is the remaining 9340 numbers other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “4” is set to be 9844/10000 = 98.44 / 100 (that is, 98.44%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9340/10000 = 93.4 / 100 (that is, 93.4%).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values (big hit random value) of the big hit random number counter C1 that becomes a big hit in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is 58, and the value “0 to 57” Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that become a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 580, and the value “0 to 579” is Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 580/10000 = 5.8 / 100 (that is, 5.8%), and the high probability of the special symbol is high. The state is set so as to be easily hit 10 times from the low probability state.

  When the set value is “5”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 are the set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “4”, the values are “100” in both cases, and the values “58 to 157” in the case of the low probability state or the values “580 to 679” in the case of the high probability state are stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “5” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 9842, the values “158 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is 9320 remaining values other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “680-9999” are the special figure. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “5” is set to be 9842/10000 = 98.42 / 100 (that is, 98.42%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9320/10000 = 93.2 / 100 (that is, 93.2%).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

  Next, when the set value is "6", the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 202a1 is 60, and the value is "0 to 59". Is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set so as to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%). I have.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) that are large hits in the high probability state in the special figure 1 big jackpot random number table 202a1 is 600, and the values “0 to 599” are Are defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is low. It is set so that it is easy to win 10 times from the probability state.

  When the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 are set values “1” to “1”. As in the case of “5”, the number is 100 each, and the value “60 to 159” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 699” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. Stipulated (set). That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value “6” is 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the remaining number other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "160 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 9300 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “700 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in one big hit random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the low probability state of the first special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 9840/10000 = 98.4 / 100 (that is, 98.4%), The loss probability of the first special symbol in the high probability state of the first special symbol is set to be 9300/10000 = 93/100 (that is, 93%).

  Therefore, although the set value “6” in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (1% both) as the set value “5”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 of the second embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 has a low probability of a big hit. The number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) is 50 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, and the value “0 to 49” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. Have been. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 500 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0-499” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%) as in the case of the first special symbol. The high probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 are both 9400 pieces. The value “50 to 9449” in the low probability state or the value “500 to 9899” in the high probability state is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “1” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “1”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. The value “9450-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 for 550 pieces. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 100 other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the value “9900 to 9999” is the special figure. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “1” is set to be 550/10000 = 5.5 / 100 (that is, 5.5%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to be 100/10000 = 1/100 (that is, 1%).

  In addition, in all the set values (that is, “1” to “6”), the increase amount of the big hit random number value of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol is determined in the same manner as the first special symbol in the “normal game state”. ), The number of the jackpot random numbers in the increment is within the range of the number of the lost random numbers in the “normal game state”.

  As described above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (1% → 94%), and is smaller than the random number value of the second special symbol. The number is set to be very easy to select. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easier to win a small hit than a big hit or a loss.

  Next, when the set value is “2”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 52, and the values “0 to 51” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%), like the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  When the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random number value) which is a jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 520 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0-519” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), like the first special symbol. Thus, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value “1”. In the same manner as in the case of (1), the number “52 to 9451” in the case of the low-probability state or the value “520 to 9919” in the case of the high-probability state are defined in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 (setting). ) Has been. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “2” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “2”, the number of random number values (loss random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 548, the values “9452 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random numbers) which are lost is the remaining 80 other than the jackpot random number and the small random number, and the values “9920 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “2” is set to be 548/10000 = 5.48 / 100 (that is, 5.48%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to be 80/10000 = 0.8 / 100 (that is, 0.8%).

  Therefore, although the setting value “2” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is equal to the setting value “1” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “1”.

  Next, when the set value is “3”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 54, and the values “0 to 53” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%), similarly to the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpot in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 540 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0 to 539” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%) as in the case of the first special symbol. Thus, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (small hit random value) which are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “2”, the number is 9400, and the value “54 to 9453” in the case of the low probability state or the value “540 to 9939” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “3” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “3”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. The value “9455-9999” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. In the high probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random numbers) is the remaining 60 numbers other than the big hit random number and the small hit random number, and the values “9940 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “3” is set to be 546/10000 = 5.46 / 100 (that is, 5.46%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

  Therefore, although the setting value “3” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is equal to the setting value “2” (both 94%) and the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

  Next, when the set value is “4”, the number of the jackpot random number counter C1 (the jackpot random number value) which becomes the jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 56, and the values “0 to 55” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” is 56/100000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%), similarly to the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the jackpots in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 560 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0-559” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.6%) as in the case of the first special symbol. Thus, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “4”, the number of small random numbers (small hit random value) in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “3”, the number is 9400, and the value “56 to 9455” in the case of the low probability state or the value “560 to 9959” in the case of the high probability state is the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “4” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “4”, the number of random number values (losing random value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random value. For 544, the values “9456 to 9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. In the case of the high probability state, the number of random values (losing random values) which are lost is the remaining 40 random numbers other than the big hit random value and the small hit random value, and the values “9960 to 9999” are the special figures. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “4” is set to be 544/10000 = 5.44 / 100 (that is, 5.44%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to be 40/10000 = 0.4 / 100 (that is, 0.4%).

  Therefore, although the set value “4” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (94%) as the set value “3”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

  Next, when the set value is “5”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as that of the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , 58, and the values “0 to 57” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random value) which are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 580 like the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0-579” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” is 580/10000 = 5.8 / 100 (that is, 5.8%) as in the case of the first special symbol. Thus, the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “4”, the number is both 9400, and the value “58 to 9457” in the case of the low probability state or the value “580 to 9979” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “5” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “5”, the number of random number values (loss random number value) that is lost in the low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining number other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. 542, and the values “9458-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers that are lost (loss random number values) is the remaining 20 other than the big hit random number value and the small hit random number value. It is defined (set) in the two big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “5” is set to be 542/10000 = 5.42 / 100 (that is, 5.42%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set to be 20/10000 = 0.2 / 100 (that is, 0.2%).

  Therefore, although the set value “5” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (94% both) as compared with the set value “4”, the big hit probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which can be said to be a setting in which a jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “4”.

  Next, when the set value is “6”, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (small jackpot random value) which becomes a jackpot in a low probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the same as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , And 60 values thereof are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%), similarly to the first special symbol. It is set to be.

  On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the number of random number values (small jackpot random numbers) that are the big hits in the high probability state in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 600 in the same manner as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The value “0-599” is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), similarly to the first special symbol, and The high probability state is set to be 10 times bigger than the low probability state.

  Here, when the setting value is “6”, the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the low probability state and the high probability state in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the set value “1”. Similarly to the case of “5”, the number is 9400, and the value “60 to 9449” in the case of the low probability state or the value “600 to 9999” in the case of the high probability state is stored in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. Is specified (set). That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value “6” is 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%) in any game state, and the low probability state and the high probability of the special symbol It is set so that the winning probability of the small hit is equal to the state.

  Therefore, when the set value is “6”, the number of random numbers that are lost in the low probability state (loss random number value) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the number of remaining random numbers other than the jackpot random number value and the small random number value. For 540, the values “9460-9999” are defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. In the case of the high-probability state, the number of random numbers (losing random values) that are lost is the remaining 0 other than the jackpot random numbers and the small random numbers. The corresponding value is not stored. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol in the low probability state of the second special symbol of the set value “6” is set to be 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), The loss probability of the second special symbol in the high probability state of the second special symbol is set so as to be 0/10000 = 0/100 (that is, 0%), so that the loss combination does not appear. .

  Therefore, although the setting value “6” in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hitting probability (94% both) as compared with the setting value “5”, the jackpot probability is slightly improved (low). (Probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

  As described above, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2, both of the increase in the number of big hit random numbers in the high probability state are compensated for from the number of lost random numbers in the low probability state. In addition, the configuration is made so as to be within the range of the number of loss random numbers in the low probability state. In addition, the number of the small random number values is not changed between the low probability state and the high probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the jackpot random value, thereby suppressing an increase in man-hours when designing the game specification. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel (a so-called simultaneous variation machine), An exclusive small winning opening (not shown) that is opened when a winning is won is provided on the right side of the gaming board 13 in a front view and on the downstream side of the normal electric hand 64c (downside of the gaming board 13 in a front view). The following gameplay is executed using the jackpot random number table 202a. Specifically, for example, in the “normal gaming state”, a left-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the left-handed game is performed, and the big hit game is won in the dynamic display of FIG. Depending on the type of the jackpot, the winning assist function is not activated while the probability assisting function is not activated, the probability assisting function is activated, or the probability assisting function is activated. It realizes the gaming ability of "time reduction state". Also, in the "time shortened state", a right-handed game is previously recommended as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and how the special display 2 is dynamically displayed during the situation where the winning assisting state is valid. In the above, the game performance of whether to win the jackpot game is realized. Further, in the "probability variation state" in which the winning assist function is activated, a right-handed game is previously encouraged as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed, and while the winning assist state is maintained, the next big hit game is determined. It is possible to realize the gaming ability of whether or not such a jackpot type. In the “probability change state” in which the winning assist function is not activated, a right-handed game is previously recommended as a game specification, and the right-handed game is performed. The winning probability of the symbol is about 1/2, so that the ordinary electric hand 64c is opened) While the ball is won in the second starting port 64b, the small winning game is won based on the winning, and the small winning game is won. The "probability changing state" is configured such that the winning assist function is not activated without winning the jackpot game based on the winning in the second starting opening 64b without increasing the winning ball based on the winning in the second starting port 64b. Are preliminarily set as the game specifications so as to realize the gambling property of making the game value of the small hit game long by continuing the period of the game.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured to perform a lottery of a “setting suggestion effect” with a predetermined probability when a small hit with a small gaming value obtained from a big hit is won. It is configured such that the successive winning in small wins makes it easier to win the lottery of “setting suggestion effect”. Specifically, the number of consecutive wins in the small hit game is counted, and when the counted value is equal to or more than a first predetermined value (for example, 50 times), the winning probability of the “setting suggestion effect” is calculated. It is configured to rise (for example, double) than usual. Then, when the count value is equal to or more than a second predetermined value (for example, 100 times) larger than the first predetermined value, the winning probability of the “setting suggestion effect” is further increased (for example, 5 times). Configure. With this configuration, the more consecutively winning the small hit game, the higher the possibility of grasping the setting contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10, and the player is provided with the pachinko machine 10. In this case, it is possible to easily inform the user of the determination factor for determining whether or not the game can be continued. For this reason, even in a case where the small jackpot is won rather than the big jackpot and the gaming value of the jackpot is not obtained, it is easy for the player to suggest the setting content of the probability set value, and the pachinko machine 10 The advantage that it becomes easy to know the probability set value of is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the winning assist function is deactivated in the “probability fluctuation state”, the winning auxiliary function is deactivated again. Furthermore, in the subsequent game, the contents of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 are configured to be more specifically suggested in a “setting suggestion effect” that can be executed by winning a small hit. Specifically, for example, during the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is inactive, the jackpot is won again in the jackpot type that generates the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is inactive again, and The content of the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be more specific by overlapping the number of wins of the small hit during the "fluctuation state". With such a configuration, the execution probability of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined based on the number of consecutive wins of the big hit type in which the winning assist function does not operate and the “probability change state” occurs, and the number of consecutive wins of the small hit. By changing the content of the suggestion, the game playability of how the winning assist function generates a non-operating “probability change state” can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured to select a relatively long variation pattern different from when a small hit is won, when a big hit is won, or when a loss is extracted. Specifically, at the time of loss, when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation effect for deriving the loss result, for example, any one of the fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of “3 seconds” to “120 seconds” is selected, and Sometimes, when selecting a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation effect for deriving the jackpot result, for example, any fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of “25 seconds” to “130 seconds” is selected. On the other hand, at the time of the small hit, when selecting the change pattern of the variable effect for deriving the small hit result, the change time of “200 seconds” to “300 seconds” which is longer than the change time selected at the time of the loss and the big hit Select one of the following fluctuation patterns. And it is comprised so that "setting suggestion effect" can be performed only by the fluctuation pattern which can be selected at the time of a small hit. By configuring in this way, even if a small jackpot that is less favorable than a big jackpot is won and the gaming value of the jackpot is not obtained, in the fluctuation pattern that can only be selected at the time of the small jackpot, "setting suggestion effect" Is executed, the player can easily suggest the setting contents of the probability set value, and the merit that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, when performing the “setting suggestion effect” in the variable effect based on the small hit, the timing exceeding the maximum change time (that is, “120 seconds” or “130 seconds”) that can be selected at the time of a loss or a big hit (ie, , “120 seconds” or later, or “130 seconds” or later), the “setting suggestion effect” is performed at a timing that cannot be executed at the time of a loss or a big hit, which is surprising. By performing the effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small hit with a small game value obtained from a big hit is won, the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is performed with a predetermined probability. In addition, it is configured such that the successive winning in the small hits makes it easier to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. And, the second special symbol is easier to win the small hit than the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is more likely to lose than the big hit and the small hit, and the second special symbol is smaller than the big hit and the loss. It is configured to be easy to win. With this configuration, a game is executed in a game state in which the second special symbol that is easy to win continuously in small hits can be executed (that is, a “probability variation state” or a “time reduction state”). Therefore, it is possible to continuously win the small hit game, and the more consecutively the small hit game is won, the more the possibility of grasping the setting content of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player to be informed of the factors for determining whether or not to continue the game with the pachinko machine 10. For this reason, even in a case where the small jackpot is won rather than the big jackpot and the gaming value of the jackpot is not obtained, it is easy for the player to suggest the setting content of the probability set value, and the pachinko machine 10 The advantage that it becomes easy to know the probability set value of is provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, with the same configuration as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the same effect as that obtained by the configuration can be obtained.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a jackpot game with a smaller number of rounds (ie, four rounds) than the number of stages of the probability set value (ie, six stages) may occur, and the timing of the notification of the “setting suggestion effect” may be made. When the selected round is a jackpot in which the selected round is not executed, the notification timing is changed to execute the “setting suggestion effect” at the notification timing in the ending effect executed in any of the jackpots. Was. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured so that the number of rounds of all jackpots is equal to or greater than the number of rounds of the probability set value, and there is no need to change the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect”. The configuration is as follows.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. And description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 of the third embodiment is divided into a group of whether the hit number is before reaching the limit or at the time of reaching the limit, and a gaming state in which the big hit occurs. It is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other in the group.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as the jackpot type, after the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the jackpot probability of the ordinary symbol are both in the high probability state until the next jackpot. After the jackpot of the maximum round number of six rounds corresponding to the "variable state" and the jackpot of six rounds, the special jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot, and the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. In the meantime, the "probability variation B" corresponding to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol becomes the high probability state, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes the high probability state after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds On the other hand, the "latency probability variation A" corresponding to the "latency probability variation state" in which the hit probability of the symbol is normally low, and the maximum number of rounds is 6 After winning, the special symbol's big hit probability is in the low probability state, but until the special symbol dynamic display is executed 100 times, the normal symbol's winning probability is in the high probability state. There is a "time saving A", and a "rush-through A" in which both the special symbol jackpot probability and the ordinary symbol hit probability are in a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of six rounds.

  The special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 are configured so that the jackpot types that can be selected based on the limit reaching presence or absence and the game state at the time of the jackpot occurrence are different. On the other hand, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each other.

  In the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 44, before the limit is reached, and when the big hit of the first special symbol occurs in the “normal game state”, the big hit for “probable change A” The value “0-9” of the type counter C2 is associated, the value “10-29” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “probability change B”, and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “latency probability change A”. Are associated with “30-89”, and the value “90-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time saving A”. If the first special symbol jackpot has occurred before reaching the limit and in the “latency probability variation state” (the “probability variation state” and the “time reduction state” are also the same), the “probable variation A” On the other hand, the value "0-9" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated, the value "10-19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "probability B", and the jackpot is obtained with "latency probability change A". The value “20-89” of the type counter C2 is associated, and the value “90-99” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with “time saving A”.

  That is, in the winning / non-winning lottery of the first special symbol in the “normal gaming state” before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. If the value of C1 is a value that is a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probable change A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “25”, “20” is set as the jackpot type. Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "43", the jackpot is determined. "Latent probability variation A" is determined as the different value of the jackpot type counter C2 is equal to "95", "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the win / loss lottery of the first special symbol in the “latency probability fluctuation state” before reaching the limit, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the value of the counter C1 is a value that is a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the big hit type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 big hit type. Determined from the table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “probable change A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “12”, it is determined as the jackpot type. If the “probable change B” is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “25”, Ri "latent probability variation A" is determined as the type, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", "time reduction A" is determined as the jackpot type.

  Therefore, in the “normal game state”, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “probable change A” is 10% and the jackpot type of “probable change B” is 20%. , The jackpot type of “latent probability change A” is 60%, and the jackpot type of “time saving A” is 10%. Also, in the “latency probability fluctuation state”, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “probable change A” is 10% and the jackpot type of “probable change B” is 10%. 10%, the big hit type of "latency probability change A" is 70%, and the big hit type of "hour reduction A" is 10%.

  Next, in the example of the special figure 1 big hit type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 44, when a big hit of the first special symbol occurs at the time of reaching the limit, any game including the "normal game state" or the "latency probability fluctuation state" Even in the state, the value "0-89" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "rush A", and the value "90-99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "hour saving A". It is attached.

  That is, in the winning or losing lottery of the first special symbol in all the gaming states at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Is a jackpot type, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “7”, “rush-through A” is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “95”, “ Time saving A "is determined.

  Therefore, in all game states, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol at the time of reaching the limit, the jackpot type of “rush A” is 90%, the jackpot type of “hour saving A” is 10%, Will be elected.

  The special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the third embodiment is different from the special figure 2 big hit type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol in the first embodiment in that the number of rounds is 6R or more. The only difference is the difference, and the other contents (game specifications) are the same.

  As described above, since the number of rounds in all the jackpot types is set to be at least the number of steps of the probability setting number, "Execute" setting suggestion effect "with the number of rounds corresponding to the probability setting value" That can be realized.

  Next, the jackpot effect process (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the third embodiment. In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the third embodiment, the number of rounds of each jackpot type is always equal to or greater than the number of stages of the probability setting value, and the “setting suggestion effect” is executed at the initially set “setting suggestion effect” execution timing. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not “setting suggestion effect” has not been performed at the time of the ending (see S1307 in FIG. 38) is unnecessary.

  In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not “ending” is set as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” in the process of S1306 (S1306). If “ending” is not set as the execution timing (S1306: No), the “setting suggestion effect” has already been executed, or the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” has not been won in the first place. Is not performed, the big hit effect processing (S1105) is ended, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the case of adopting the playability of “executing“ setting suggestion effect ”with the number of rounds corresponding to the probability setting value”, all jackpots are obtained. By configuring the number of rounds of each type to be equal to or greater than the number of stages of the probability set value, the “setting suggestion effect” can be reliably executed at the initially set notification timing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” from being biased at the time of ending due to the absence of the initially set number of rounds as in the first embodiment. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the “setting suggestion effect” has been executed in the ending of the jackpot, so that the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can achieve the same effect as that obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is configured so as not to indicate to the player the remaining number of times of the limit until “at the time of reaching the limit” at which the “probability variation state” is not given when the jackpot is won. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the target round in which the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, during the round game, the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, and whether or not the remaining limit number of times is indicated. Is determined, and a “remaining limit number suggestion effect” for suggesting (notifying) the remaining limit number to the player at the start of the round according to the determination result is executed.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. And description thereof is omitted.

  First, the jackpot effect process (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the fourth embodiment. In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the round in which the “setting suggestion effect” is executed matches the remaining limit number. The remaining limit number is suggested by displaying the "remaining limit number suggestion effect" in which the "round start display" displayed from time to time is changed from the normal display mode to the special mode. Then, during the round game of the round, the “setting suggestion effect” is executed by changing the font of the number of the total prize balls displayed.

  In the jackpot effect process (S1105) of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” matches the number of rounds of the jackpot (S1302: Yes), then The number of jackpots remaining until a jackpot type that does not generate a “probability change state” is won (that is, a period during which a state in which a jackpot type that generates a “probability change state” can be won and a jackpot is likely to occur is maintained) Is determined to be equal to the number of rounds (S1351). This determination is made by determining the value of the sub-round counter 223m and the value of the sub-limit counter 223e. That is, when the value of the sub-round counter 223m is “6”, it is determined whether the value of the sub-limit counter 223e is “0”.

  In the process of S1351, when it is determined that the number of rounds and the remaining limit number match (S1351: Yes), it is determined that the execution timing of the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” has arrived, and the round game is started. In the “round start display” displayed at the time, the “remaining limit count” corresponding to the value obtained by subtracting the value of the sub limit counter 223e from the maximum remaining limit count (ie, “6”) (ie, the value of the sub round counter 223m) A suggestion effect ”(see FIG. 47D) is set (S1352), and the process proceeds to S1353. On the other hand, in the process of S1351, if it is determined that the number of rounds and the remaining limit number do not match (S1351: No), the process of S1352 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1353. In this case, the “round start display” is executed in the “normal display mode” without performing the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” (see FIGS. 47B and 47F).

  In the process of S1353, it is determined that the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” has arrived, and the “setting suggestion effect” corresponding to the type (contents) of the “setting suggestion effect” stored in the setting suggestion content memory 223j is generated. It is set to be executed during the round game (S1353), the big hit effect processing (S1105) ends, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, when the “setting suggestion effect” is performed and the number of rounds to be executed matches the remaining limit number, the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” is also performed. Then, when the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” can be executed together, the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” is executed first at the start of the round, and then, during the round game, the “setting suggestion effect” is performed. To perform the effect. With this configuration, the game is executed together with the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” which are factors for determining whether or not to continue the game. The advantage of making it easier to recognize such judgment elements, and creating a playability of how to execute the "setting suggestion effect" and the "remaining limit number suggestion effect" to improve the interest of the game. Can be.

  Also, even when both the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” can be executed, the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining And the limit number suggestion effect "is not displayed at the same time, and one of the suggestion effects is sequentially executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent in advance that one of the suggested effects is overlooked due to execution of the duplicated suggested effect, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which of the suggested effects. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets confused about the content of the game.

  Next, referring to FIG. 47, when the probability setting value is set to “6”, the “setting suggestion effect” of “direct value suggestion” at the timing of “round match” and the “remaining limit effect” in the round The case where the “number suggestion effect” is executed will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a case where “round match” is selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 47 (a) is a third symbol of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the jackpot result is derived in the variable effect on the display device 81, and FIG. 47B illustrates that the big hit game is started from the state of FIG. 47A and the first round is started. FIG. 47C is a diagram illustrating a state in which “round start display” is displayed, and FIG. 47C is a diagram illustrating a state in which the first round is being performed from the state in FIG. 47B. (D) is a diagram showing a state in which a “round start display” indicating that the jackpot game has progressed from the state of FIG. 47 (c) and the sixth round has started is displayed, and FIG. 47 (e) is a diagram showing The sixth round is performed from the state of FIG. 47 (d). 47 is a diagram showing a state in which “setting suggestion effect” is being executed in the sixth round. FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the seventh round starts from the state of FIG. 47 (e). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state where "start display" is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), in the left display area Dm1, the middle display area Dm2, and the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, a state in which the third symbol “6” is stopped and displayed is shown. . In other words, it indicates that the big hit with the “6” symbol has been derived in the variable effect.

  At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed in such a manner as to be glad that the jackpot result is derived, and furthermore, the character is displayed in the right small area Ds3. The words are displayed in praise of the player with the symbol "Yeah!" In the left small area Ds1, a predetermined background (not shown) is displayed, and no character design or the like is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 47B shows a state in which a “round start display” indicating that the big hit game is started from the situation of FIG. 47A and the first round is started appears. In the “round start display”, the sub-display area Ds and the like are deleted as the entire main display area Dm is enlarged. Then, in the central portion of the enlarged main display area Dm, the black character display of “Round” of katakana and the black number display of “1” are combined, and the display object of “Round 1” is displayed on the screen. A “normal round start effect”, which is an effect (moving image) approaching from the depth direction toward the front of the screen, is executed. In the first embodiment, the “round start display” is performed for a predetermined period (for example, “2 seconds”) from the stage when the round is started, and thereafter, the effect of the round game (for example, FIG. 47 (c)) is displayed. Switch.

  Next, FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the first round game has been started from the situation of FIG. 47 (b). Here, in the central portion of the main display area Dm, one of a plurality of character designs appearing in a fluctuation effect or the like appears for each corresponding round. In FIG. 47 (c), a boy character design appears. Thus, an effect is executed as if the boy character design was pleased with the occurrence of the big hit.

  In addition, in the big hit symbol display area, a state where “6” symbol is displayed is shown. Further, in the number-of-rounds display area, a numeral display of "1" is displayed, which indicates that the jackpot game of the first round is being performed.

  In addition, a total prize ball number display capable of displaying a four-digit number of “0045” is displayed in the prize ball number display area. The breakdown of the 45 winning balls in FIG. 47 (c) is, for example, 3 winnings in the first winning opening 65a × 15 winning balls = 45 hits, and 0 winnings in the general winning opening 63, for example. X 10 prize balls = 0 shots, and 0 prizes to the second starting port 64b x 1 prize ball = 0 shots, for a total of 45 shots.

  In FIG. 47 (c), since the “setting suggestion effect” has not been executed, the total prize ball number display displayed in the prize ball number display area is expressed by a general font.

  Next, FIG. 47D shows a state in which the jackpot game has progressed from the situation of FIG. 47C, and a “round start display” indicating that the sixth round has started is appearing. Here, as the “setting suggestion effect”, the content of “immediate value suggestion” has been elected to be executed at the timing of “round match”, so the round game of the same number of rounds as the probability setting value of “6” During the execution of the “setting suggestion effect”, the probability setting value and the number of rounds match, so at the start of the round with the same number of rounds as the probability setting value of “6”, the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” Is executed.

  Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 47D, in the “round start display” executed at the start of the sixth round, the character display indicating “round 6” is changed to “normal round start effect”. ), A gold character display of “Round” in katakana and a gold numeral display of “6” are combined to display an image in which a display object “Round 6” is stationary on the screen, The “remaining limit number suggestion effect” in which the effect of adding a sparkling effect around “6” is combined is executed. Note that, at this stage, the character display of the special typeface font that is "setting suggestion effect" has not appeared. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” in the “round start display”. Also, by executing the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” in the “round start display”, it is possible to suggest that the “setting suggestion effect” is performed during the round game to be performed. Therefore, in the "round start display", the player who sees the "remaining limit number suggestion effect" pays attention to whether or not the special type font "setting suggestion effect" appears in the round game to be performed. Since the player can concentrate on the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, FIG. 47 (e) shows a state in which the “round start display” of FIG. 47 (d) ends, the screen contents are switched, and the jackpot game of the sixth round is being executed. Here, in the central part of the main display area Dm, a girl character design different from the character design of FIG. 47 (c) appears, and an effect is performed as if the girl character design was happy to have a big hit. Is done. In addition, in the big hit symbol display area of the main display area Dm, a state is shown in which the symbol display of “6” is displayed, as in FIG.

  Further, in the round number display area of the main display area Dm, a round display of “6” is displayed. That is, in the number-of-rounds display area of FIG. 47 (e), the sixth round jackpot game is performed by the round display of “6” as indicated by the number of rounds indicated by “round start display”. It suggests.

  Further, in the prize ball number display area of the main display area Dm, a total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is displayed. At this time, as the "direct suggestion" of the "setting suggestion effect" in the probability setting value "6", only the font of "6" indicating the tens place in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" is a special typeface font. Is displayed in.

  The breakdown of the 764 prize balls in FIG. 47 (e) is, for example, 10 wins in the large winning opening 65a from the first round to the fifth round × 15 prize balls × 5 rounds = 750 rounds, 6 rounds The number of winnings in the large winning opening 65a of the eye x 15 prize balls = 0 shots, the number of winnings in the general winning opening 63 x 1 prize ball = 10 shots, 4 prizes in the second starting opening 64b × 1 prize ball = 4 balls, for a total of 764 shots.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (e), only the tens place “6” in the total prize ball display of “0764 shots” in the sixth round is displayed in a special font, and the other numbers are in a general font. Is displayed. For this reason, the player who has viewed the special font and the general font, if “1 negative suggestion” of the “setting suggestion effect”, first displays “2,074 shots” out of the total prize ball number display “2. Numerals above ", that is, both" 6 "and" 4 "must be special fonts, but in FIG. 47 (e), only" 6 "is a special font, so" 1 negative suggestion " Know that there is no.

  Next, if it is "even suggestion" of "setting suggestion effect", in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots", both the even numbers "6" and "4" must be special fonts. Since only "6" is a special typeface font in FIG.

  Next, in the case of "456 suggestion" effect of "setting suggestion effect", both "6" and "4" in the total prize ball number display of "0764 shots" must be special fonts. However, since only “6” is a special typeface font in FIG. 47E, it is understood that it is not “456 suggestion”.

  Next, in the case of “direct suggestion” of “setting suggestion effect”, only one of the numbers of the total prize balls of “0764 shots” is displayed in a special font, and FIG. Since only the numeral “6” is displayed in the special typeface font, it is understood that “immediate value suggestion” in the probability setting value “6” is provisionally applied.

  Therefore, in the display mode of FIG. 47E, only “direct value suggestion” is applied as “setting suggestion effect”, so that the player grasps that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is “6”. be able to. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while guessing at which round the "setting suggestion effect" is performed or not, and when a special font appears. In addition, it is possible to guess what kind of “setting suggestion effect” is, and to create a game property of estimating a probability setting value from the content, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  As described above, even when the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” can be executed together, the “setting suggestion effect” that suggests the contents to the player by changing the number display is provided. "Remaining limit number suggestion effect" is not displayed at the same time, and one of the suggestion effects is sequentially executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent in advance that one of the suggested effects is overlooked due to execution of the duplicated suggested effect, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which of the suggested effects. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets confused about the content of the game.

  Next, in FIG. 47 (f), a state in which the “round start display” indicating that the sixth round of the round game has been completed and the seventh round has started from the situation of FIG. 47 (e) appears. Is shown. In the “round start display”, a “normal round start effect”, which is an effect (moving image) in which a display object “round 7” approaches from the screen depth direction to the screen front direction, is executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the “setting suggestion effect” is performed, when the number of rounds to be executed matches the remaining limit number, the “remaining number of limit times” "Suggestion effect" is also performed. Then, when the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” can be executed together, the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” is executed first at the start of the round, and then, during the round game, the “setting suggestion effect” is performed. To perform the effect. With this configuration, the game is executed together with the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” which are factors for determining whether or not to continue the game. The advantage of making it easier to recognize such judgment elements, and creating a playability of how to execute the "setting suggestion effect" and the "remaining limit number suggestion effect" to improve the interest of the game. Can be.

  Also, even when both the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” can be executed, the “setting suggestion effect” and the “remaining And the limit number suggestion effect "is not displayed at the same time, and one of the suggestion effects is sequentially executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent in advance that one of the suggested effects is overlooked due to execution of the duplicated suggested effect, and it is not possible to recognize which number is which of the suggested effects. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player gets confused about the content of the game.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment is added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment, and the like. The embodiment may be modified to be configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is obvious that other numerical values can be adopted.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, when the player wins a disadvantage that is disadvantageous for the player, the player can easily win the “setting suggestion effect” according to the remaining limit number without considering the continuity of the disadvantage. Was composed. For example, if after winning a disadvantage, the user wins a jackpot that is not a disadvantage (that is, the jackpot type “probable change A” or the like; hereinafter, referred to as “advantage hit”), and then wins again the disadvantage, Since the remaining limit number of jackpots is reduced based on the three jackpots, even if the winner is won on the way and the disadvantage is not continuous, when the disadvantage is won again after the advantage, The configuration suggestion effect was configured to be easily executed.

  On the other hand, you may be comprised so that it may become easy to win "setting suggestion effect" on condition that unfavorableness continues. Specifically, for example, as the remaining limit number decreases in a state where the disadvantage is continuous, it becomes easier to win the "setting suggestion effect", while when the limit number is reached, the winning is achieved in the advantageous hit, The winning probability of “setting suggestion effect” is configured to be returned to the initial setting. With such a configuration, even when the disadvantages are continuous, the advantage that the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10 is easily known is created. Can be alleviated due to the continuation of. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from getting excited about the game and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the content (type and notification timing) of the “setting suggestion effect” may be determined according to the cumulative number of disadvantageous operations until the limit number of times is reached. Specifically, the continuity of the disadvantage is not taken into account, and the more the total number of disadvantages occurs, the more the total number of disadvantages occurs until the limit number of times is reached (that is, until six jackpots occur). , Or an effect that specifically (directly) suggests a probability setting value in the “setting suggestion effect” may be easily executed. With this configuration, even when the advantage hit occurs in the middle and the continuity of the disadvantage is interrupted, the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is simply set according to the number of times the disadvantage event occurs. It is possible to create a merit that it becomes easy to know, and to alleviate the disappointment that the remaining limit number decreases and the disappointment due to the continuous disadvantage. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from getting excited about the game and to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the cumulative number of disadvantages may be cleared each time the limit number is reached, or the cumulative number of disadvantages may not be cleared each time the limit number is reached. May be configured to count the number of times, and the greater the number of times counted, the easier it is to execute the “setting suggestion effect”.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the configuration suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot round. On the other hand, at times other than during the jackpot round, that is, during the jackpot opening period or the interval period, or during the execution of the fluctuation effect (for example, during a predetermined “reach display” or when a specific notice appears, etc.) ), A “setting suggestion effect” may be executed during a demonstration effect (for example, during a model-linked effect by RTC or during a gaming machine customization by a button operation by a player).

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, when the player wins at a disadvantage that is disadvantageous for the player, the player is likely to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. On the other hand, a predetermined period is set in advance, so that the player can easily win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” due to another disadvantageous event occurring for the player during the predetermined period. Is also good. More specifically, for example, after a large hit of 1, a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) or more of dynamic display has been executed, but the big hit has not been won, or the first starting port 64a or the like. When a ball is successively won to the general winning opening 63 where no special symbol lottery can be received without winning a ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of balls are given to the out opening where no game value is given. In the case of inflow, etc., it may be configured such that it is easy to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, when the player wins at a disadvantage that is disadvantageous for the player, the player is likely to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. On the other hand, it may be configured such that it becomes easy to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” due to an advantageous event occurring for the player during the predetermined period. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of jackpots have been generated, or when a jackpot has been performed, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10,000 shots) are paid in total. When the game is issued, or when the game is won consecutively for an advantageous win, it may be configured such that the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is easily won. With this configuration, it is possible to remarkably improve the interest, in conjunction with the interest that an advantageous event has occurred, and the interest that the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, when the player wins at a disadvantage that is disadvantageous for the player, the player is likely to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. On the other hand, you may comprise so that it may be possible to win the execution lottery of "setting suggestion effect" due to an event that is not related to advantage or disadvantage. Specifically, for example, each time a predetermined time is measured by a real time clock (Real Time Clock; hereinafter, abbreviated as “RTC”), an execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect” may be performed. Alternatively, when the game is continuously executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, the ball is continuously fired), the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” may be performed.

<Modification 6>
In the above-described first embodiment, it is configured such that it is easy to win a “setting suggestion effect” that suggests a probability setting value by winning at a disadvantage. Alternatively, or in addition, in the pachinko machine 10 with the limit function, by winning unfavorably, it is configured to easily win the “remaining number suggestion effect” indicating the remaining number of times of the limit. You may. With this configuration, when a jackpot is won, the remaining number of jackpots reaching the limit number can be suggested to the player, and a determination element for determining whether or not to continue the game in the pachinko machine 10 is presented. Then, it is possible to create a playability of whether or not to continue the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Variation 7>
In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won, based on the probability setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, the probability setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is suggested based on the probability setting value on that day. Was configured to execute. On the other hand, it is configured to execute a “change suggestion effect” that suggests that the probability set value has been changed from the previous day's probability set value and a “previous day setting suggestive effect” that suggests the previous day's probability set value May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the determination factor (estimation factor) of the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10, create a game property for estimating the probability set value, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the “setting suggestion effect” is configured to be executed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, the “setting suggestion effect” may be configured to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to distinguish (recognize) from a player other than the player playing the game. Specifically, an LED or the like that can be visually recognized only from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, a probability set value is displayed on the LED, and it is difficult to recognize if the third symbol display device 81 is not always visually recognized. (For example, an effect having a subliminal effect). With this configuration, it is possible for a person who is not playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 to make it difficult to recognize the probability set value of the pachinko machine 10, and for example, does not play a game that the setting is low. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 recognizes that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the type of the “setting suggestion effect” and the notification timing are simultaneously selected by the suggestion content lottery table 222f and the suggestion content lottery counter 223i. On the other hand, the type of the “setting suggestion effect” and the notification timing may be separately selected. Specifically, for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a “setting suggestion effect” is to be performed, a notification timing is determined separately from the lottery, and then, when the “setting suggestion effect” is executed, the “setting suggestion effect” May be configured to be selected by lot.

<Variation 10>
In the first embodiment, the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined first, and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the corresponding round number exists. If the relevant round number does not exist, the notification timing is determined. Is changed (that is, executed at the time of ending). On the other hand, even before the notification timing of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined by lottery, the number of jackpot rounds is grasped, and the notification timing to be executed is selected from the notification timings including the number of rounds. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the bias of the notification timing to a predetermined time (that is, at the time of ending) due to the change based on the absence of the corresponding round, and to execute a balanced effect. .

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, based on the occurrence of a jackpot when the winning assist function is activated when the limit is reached, it is determined that the jackpot is a pullback jackpot during a so-called pullback period, and based on the subsequent winning of the jackpot. It was configured so that it was easy to win the execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect”. That is, even if the limit is reached based on the jackpot of the first special symbol or the limit is reached based on the jackpot of the second special symbol, it is determined that the pullback is a jackpot if the prize assist function is activated. Had to be configured. On the other hand, when the limit is reached by the jackpot in the second special symbol and the jackpot is won during the “time reduction state” based on the jackpot, the jackpot is determined as a so-called pullback jackpot, and based on the subsequent jackpot winning. May be configured so that it is easy to win the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. That is, by making the so-called pullback jackpot achievement conditions more difficult, the sense of accomplishment of winning the pullback jackpot can be amplified, and the interest of the game during the pullback period can be improved.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, the winning is always performed when the limit is reached, and the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is performed based on the winning. On the other hand, at the disadvantage when the limit is reached, the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” may not be performed. Since the disadvantage at the time of reaching the limit always comes, when the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is performed at the disadvantage at the time of reaching the limit, the “setting suggestion effect” frequently appears. There is a possibility that it will. Therefore, by configuring so that the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” is not performed at the disadvantage when reaching the limit, it becomes possible to receive the execution lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” only by the player's own pull, It is possible to create a playability of whether or not a lottery of the “setting suggestion effect” can be received, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol which can be executed by performing a right-handed game after winning the jackpot type "probable change A" or "probable change B", it is advantageous if the limit is not reached. In addition to the jackpot type “probable change A”, which is a hit, the jackpot type “hour reduction A”, which is a disadvantage, can be elected. On the other hand, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be executed by performing the right-handed game, it may be configured such that, before the limit is reached, only the winning is won and the winning is not performed. In this case, in the case of a game state in which a right-handed game can be performed, only the advantageous hit occurs until the limit is reached, so that the game does not transition to an unfavorable game state until the limit is reached, and is obtained while allowing the player to play the game with confidence It is possible to increase the game value. However, until reaching the limit, it becomes a digestive operation of generating a jackpot up to the limit number of times, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, as in the above-described first embodiment, if a situation where a pull-back jackpot is won, it is easy to win the lottery of the “setting suggestion effect”. In addition to the playability of whether to return the jackpot during the game, if the jackpot is pulled back, the game value to be obtained is increased while creating the playability of whether or not to win the "setting suggestion effect", It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment or the third embodiment, the number of jackpot rounds that can be generated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol match (16R or 4R in the first embodiment, the third embodiment). (16R or 6R). On the other hand, the number of jackpot rounds generated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be clearly different from the number of jackpot rounds generated in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the first special symbol, it is configured such that the number of rounds is always equal to or greater than the number of steps of the probability set value, and the jackpot is won (easy to win). It is configured such that a jackpot that is less than the number of steps of the set value is won (easily won). With this configuration, when a left-handed game is performed and a jackpot is won, the round corresponding to the probability set value is always executed, and the “round match” is performed based on the “setting suggestion effect”. While it is possible to guess the set value, if a right-handed game is performed and the jackpot is won, the round corresponding to the probability set value is not necessarily executed, so the credibility of the “setting suggestion effect” of “round match” Poor condition. Therefore, creating a playability of hitting the launching style of the ball to pursue the accuracy of the "setting suggestion effect", combining the special symbol type (number of rounds per jackpot) with the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" With various game characteristics, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In the first embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot type according to the first special symbol and the ratio of the jackpot type according to the second special symbol may be exchanged.

<Modification 15>
In the second embodiment, in the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed (that is, in the “probability changing state” or the “time shortening state”), the small hits that are most likely to be won are successively won. This makes it easy to win the lottery for the “setting suggestion effect”. On the other hand, in a game state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, when a loss that occurs less frequently than the small hit is selected, the winning probability of the “setting suggestion effect” is increased in subsequent games ( (For example, 2 times).

<Modification 16>
In the second embodiment, in the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is inactive, if a winning type that generates the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is inactive again is won, the subsequent game In such a configuration, the content of the "setting suggestion effect" that can be executed by winning a small hit is configured to be more specifically suggested. On the other hand, in a game state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, when a loss that occurs less frequently than the small hit is selected, the small hit is won based on the fact that the loss has been won. The content of the “setting suggestion effect” that can be executed by the user may be configured to be more easily suggested.

<Modification 17>
In the second embodiment, the gaming state in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed (that is, the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is activated, the “probability variation state” in which the winning assistance function is not activated, or “ In the "time shortened state"), it is configured that it is easy to win the execution lottery of the "setting suggestion effect" by successively winning small wins that are most likely to be won. On the other hand, when the small win game is won, the small win game (not shown) is in a gaming state in which a ball can be won. Only in such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which an execution lottery of “setting suggestion effect” is performed. This makes it easier for the player to generate an advantageous event by winning the "probability variation state" in which the prize assist function is not activated, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-described embodiments, winning is performed at a disadvantage, and the information regarding the pachinko machine 10 is used to indicate a probability setting value that is a material for determining whether or not to continue the game. . On the other hand, information other than the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 and advantageous to the player may be notified (suggested). Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 determines the payout rate of the pachinko machine 10, the frequency of winning in the first starting opening 64a, the frequency of winning in the general winning opening 63, the efficiency of winning in the large winning opening 65a, and the like. You may comprise so that the information useful to the player who performs a game may be alert | reported.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, when the execution of the “setting suggestion effect” is determined, a symbol related to the “setting suggestion effect” is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . On the other hand, the “setting suggestion effect” may be executed by changing a display object that can be always recognized over time. Specifically, for example, a “setting suggestion effect” is performed by changing the content of a character symbol that is constantly displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display content of a setting suggestion indicator provided on the game board 13. Is changed to perform a "setting suggestion effect", or to drive a display object that is always visually recognized, to make the display object hidden behind it visible, and to execute the "setting suggestion effect" on the display object. You may.

<Variation 20>
In each of the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages of “1” to “6”, and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed. However, the probability setting value can be changed. The number of stages is not limited to six, and may be changed to an arbitrary stage.

<Modification 21>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described. However, the winning probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

<Variation 22>
If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the startup processing, a specific probability set value (for example, “1”) is set from the range of “1” to “6”. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during a timer interrupt process), the probability set value should not be forcibly set to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to sudden change of the jackpot probability during the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability set value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described. However, the probability set value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within a normal range. In order to change the probability setting value by the person involved in the hall to change the probability setting value, to prompt the person involved in the hall to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, A specific probability setting value within the range may be compulsorily set.

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (check sum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the “setting change mode”, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although described, this may be performed with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is rotatable from an on state to a setting change position provided in a direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is configured to be urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is turned from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode”, the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the “setting change mode”, and is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, Even if the board box 100 is not opened, the board box 100 may be operated by persons involved in the hall. This also makes it easy to determine the probability set value.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the “setting change mode” or the “setting confirmation mode” when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 may be an indispensable condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, it may be configured such that whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is set as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation can be set so that the hole can be selected.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 503 may be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins one winning opening by the setting key 501 (for example, change from three to five), and the driving of a movable role assisting winning in the winning opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or a member (for example, a stage or a croon on which the ball can roll) that affects the flow-down state of the ball It is possible to change the setting relating to the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of steps, such as the inclination mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the inclination mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). You may comprise.

<Modification 30>
In the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured so as to face the lateral direction (leftward or rightward) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

<Modification 31>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the small random numbers, and the lost random numbers are set as continuous values, and a large hit or a small hit is determined by a range determination (for example, “0” or more). (Whether or not it is “49” or less) so as to reduce the control burden on main controller 110. On the other hand, each random number value (i.e., the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value) that gives the game value may be arranged in a distributed (dissipated) manner instead of a continuous arrangement. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated with “0 to 999”, the jackpot random number value is “7,341,555,777,831” and the small jackpot random value is “77,175”. , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 ".

  Here, when a value that becomes a random number of the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in the low-probability state and the high-probability state, if it is “0 to 50”) continuously exists, There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility of being illegally assigned to the jackpot is increased. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modified example, it is possible to make it difficult to externally predict each random number value to which a game value is given, to enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state, which are defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a, are respectively set so as not to be duplicated. A jackpot random value may be set. With this configuration, the value of the random number to be a big hit is changed by changing the value of the random number to be a big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be hardly predicted, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number C2, and the like are updated by software processing such as a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot random number counter C1 and the like are updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With this configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

<Modification 33>
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the jackpot random number value increases evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the large random number (or the small random number) is increased unequally or at a predetermined rate each time the set value is increased. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random value is increased by “2” for each of the set values “1” to “3”, and the jackpot random value is set to “5” for the set values “4” to “6”. Increase by one. With this configuration, the game value that can be provided by the setting difference changes greatly, and a game with inflection (sharpness) due to the setting difference can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, the combination of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the big hit type corresponding to the value of the big hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter (not shown) for determining the content of the small hit is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the big hit type or the small hit type is changed. You may comprise so that the setting difference by a change may arise.

<Modification 35>
In the above embodiment, the number of executions of each special symbol in the "time reduction state" is counted by using the common time saving counter 203k for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, using a special figure 2 time reduction counter that counts only the number of fluctuation effects of the second special symbol, and a total time reduction counter that counts the total number of fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The number of executions of the dynamic display of each special symbol in the “time reduction state” may be configured to be counted, and the end condition of the “time reduction state” may be determined. A special figure 1 time reduction counter for counting the number of times may be provided so that the “time reduction state” may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, and the termination condition of the “time reduction state” may be determined. . With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 36>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, each special symbol may be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is acquired (the order in which the special symbols are held), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be replaced with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. You may comprise so that it may perform more preferentially.

<Modification 37>
In the above embodiment, the random number value (ie, the jackpot random number value) that gives the game value is changed in accordance with the setting change, and the change is compensated for from the random number value (ie, the lost random number value) that does not give the game value. Was configured as follows. On the other hand, when a random number value (for example, a jackpot random value) that gives a game value is changed due to a setting change, the change is replaced with a random value (for example, a small random number value) that gives another game value. )). With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) in such a manner as to be in the order of “big hit random value range”, “small hit random value range”, and “loss random number value range”. )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the "range of jackpot random numbers", "range of jackpot random numbers" (hereinafter referred to as "range of jackpot random numbers"), " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be in the order of “range of lost random number values”. Here, the “range of the re-hitting random number value” is configured to correspond to an increase in the hit random number value due to the setting change. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and with the change in the setting. The range of the random number value that is not changed (that is, the large random number value and the small random number value that do not change even when the setting is changed) can be fixed. Thus, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not a hit is made, the basic hit / fail determination of a fixed random value is made common to all the set values, and an increase in the jackpot random value due to the setting change is added in accordance with the set value. , The design of the control program can be facilitated, and the number of development steps can be reduced.

<Modification 39>
In the above embodiment, each random number value is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so as to be in the order of “range of jackpot random value”, “range of small hit random value”, and “range of lost random value”. I was On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in the order of increasing (or decreasing) the number of random number values.

<Modification 40>
In the above embodiment, each random number value is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so as to be in the order of “range of jackpot random value”, “range of small hit random value”, and “range of lost random value”. I was On the other hand, the “range of jackpot random value” which is increased according to the setting change is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so as to be adjacent (adjacent) to the “range of lost random number value” which is decreased according to the setting change. ). Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of “range of small hit random value”, “range of big hit random value”, and “range of lost random value”. . With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is made adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and with the change in the setting. The range of the random number value that is not changed (that is, the small random number value per hit) can be fixed. Thus, for example, in a control program for determining whether or not a small hit is appropriate, the determination of the random number value of the small hit is made common to all the set values, and the increase in the random number of the big hit due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. This facilitates the design of the control program and reduces the number of development steps.

<Modification 41>
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the big hit probability of the special symbol is improved (increased by a factor of 10) when shifting from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”. On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability changing state", the small winning probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when shifting from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, the degree of increase in the special symbol jackpot probability may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Further, when shifting from the “normal gaming state” to the “probability changing state”, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the big hit probability is 5 times and the small hit probability is also 5 times). Good.

<Modification 42>
In the second embodiment, the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol is configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. The winning probability of the small hit game in may be configured to be equal.

<Modification 43>
In the above-described embodiment, the so-called loop type game specification is configured to maintain the “probability fluctuation state” until the next big hit occurs when the vehicle enters the “probability fluctuation state”. On the other hand, even if any of the jackpots is won after the end of the jackpot, a game in which a “probability change state” (a so-called “ST type”) in which execution of a predetermined number of dynamic displays is completed after the end of the jackpot is given. It may be configured by specification. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 44>
In the above-described embodiment, in all the setting values, when the special symbol changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased evenly (all 10 times increase). On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each set value (for example, the set value “1” is five times, the set value “2” is six times,..., The set value “6” is ten times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon itself of winning the jackpot game earlier in the high probability state becomes the setting suggestion. Therefore, in the high-probability state, a game characteristic of how quickly to win the jackpot is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 45>
In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that a setting difference occurs in the jackpot probability in any of the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, the configuration is such that the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low-probability state or high-probability state) is eliminated and the setting difference of the jackpot probability in the other state (high-probability state or low-probability state) is provided. May be.

<Modification 46>
In the second embodiment, the jackpot random value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random value is compensated for from the lost random value. On the other hand, a configuration may be such that the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random value is compensated for from the small jackpot random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on the setting change from each of the small hit random value and the loss random value, and to fix the change in the jackpot random value in a fixed manner. There is no need to supplement from a predetermined random number value of one. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 for the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, when there is no jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect”, the “setting suggestion effect” is performed at another timing (ending effect). On the other hand, when the jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the “setting suggestion effect” does not exist, the “setting suggestion effect” may be executed in another round existing in the jackpot. In this case, if the “setting suggestion effect” is selected to be executed in a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, but the round does not exist, the round that matches the probability setting value is excluded. Alternatively, a configuration suggestion effect may be performed in another round.

<Modification 48>
In the above embodiment, a setting suggestion effect is provided as an effect that suggests a probability setting value that can be set in a plurality of stages, and is configured to suggest to a player in the setting suggestion effect based on the probability setting value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of stages of events that can occur in the pachinko machine 10 are suggested to the player based on the lottery result. For example, any state (stage) of the gaming state (for example, “normal gaming state”, “latency probability changing state”, “probability changing state”, and “time reduction state”) of the pachinko machine 10 provided in a plurality of stages. It may be configured to indicate the state (step) of the multi-stage effect, or to indicate the state of the multi-stage jackpot expectation. You may.

<Modification 49>
In the above embodiment, the jackpot that is advantageous to the player (that is, the jackpot type “probable change A” or “probable B”) and the disadvantageous jackpot that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot (that is, the jackpot type “hidden” Regardless of whether it is “variable change A”, “time saving A” or “rush A”), the number of jackpots is counted, and if the number of jackpots reaches the limit number, an unfavorable jackpot is forcibly selected. Was to be configured. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the limit number is added only to the specific jackpot and the limit number is not counted for other jackpots other than the specific jackpot. Specifically, for example, when a jackpot type “probable change A” or a jackpot type “probable change B” that is a jackpot having a high degree of advantage for the player occurs, the number of those jackpots is counted, and the total number thereof is a predetermined number. When the limit number is reached, a disadvantageous jackpot is forcibly selected. On the other hand, if a jackpot type “latent probability change A”, a jackpot type “hour saving A”, or a jackpot type “rush A” (or a small hit), which is a jackpot (hit) with a low degree of advantage for the player, The number of jackpots is not counted, and the limit number is not affected. With this configuration, in the case of winning a jackpot type having a low degree of advantage for the player, a jackpot advantageous to the player can be given up to the limit number without being counted as the limit number. Therefore, the player's dissatisfaction due to the appearance of a jackpot having a low degree of advantage for the player can be suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number, a disadvantageous jackpot (that is, jackpot type “hour saving A” or “rush A”) is selected with a probability of 100%. Was. On the other hand, when the number of jackpots reaches the limit number, the disadvantageous jackpot is not always selected. It may be configured to increase the probability. Specifically, for example, before reaching the limit, the selection rate per advantage is 80%, and the selection rate per disadvantage is 20%, while when the limit is reached, the selection rate per advantage is 20%, and the selection per disadvantage is achieved. The configuration is such that the ratio is 80%. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, as the “at the time of reaching the limit”, every time the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches six, only the jackpot type that does not generate the “probability variation state” at the sixth jackpot is selected. Was composed. On the other hand, as the “at the time of reaching the limit”, a jackpot type that generates the “probability variation state” until the number of jackpots of the special symbol reaches the sixth jackpot is configured to be selectable. In the selection of the jackpot type at the time of winning the jackpot, it may be configured to select only from the jackpot types that do not generate the “probability change state”.

<Modification 52>
In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion of the probability setting value is made based on whether the display content displayed on the total prize ball display during the jackpot game is displayed in a general font or a special font. On the other hand, at the time of the jackpot start, during the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, other display objects to be displayed, for example, a round number display indicating the number of rounds, a symbol display indicating a jackpot symbol, or during a round game You may be comprised so that the setting suggestion of a probability setting value may be performed according to the kind of appearing character design. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting of the probability setting value is suggested by a display object displayed during the fluctuation effect, for example, a character design, a cut-in image, a numeral display, or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the “round start display” at the time of the jackpot is changed from “normal round start effect” to “remaining limit number suggestion effect” to suggest the number of jackpots until the limit number is reached. Was configured as follows. On the other hand, at the time of the jackpot start, during the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, other display objects to be displayed, for example, a round number display indicating the number of rounds, a symbol display indicating a jackpot symbol, or during a round game The remaining limit number may be suggested according to the type of the character pattern that appears. Further, it may be configured to suggest the remaining number of times by a display object displayed during the fluctuation effect, for example, a character design, a cut-in image, a numeral display, or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 54>
In the above embodiment, each time a specific event condition is satisfied, that is, every time a prize is generated during a jackpot game, the display content indicating the occurrence of the specific event is changed (that is, the display content of the total prize ball number display is changed). Displaying in a general font or in a special typeface font) suggests setting of a probability setting value or suggesting a remaining limit count. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability set value or the remaining limit number is suggested by a temporal change of a display object that changes each time. More specifically, a so-called morning demonstration screen display or a special effect performed when a predetermined time elapses by a real time clock or the like after the power is turned on suggests a probability set value or a remaining limit count. . With this configuration, the setting of the probability setting value or the suggestion of the remaining limit number is performed at a predetermined timing even when the specific event condition is not satisfied, so that the player who has confirmed the suggestion can play the game. It is possible to motivate the operation and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 55>
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that the set value information of the probability set value or the remaining limit number of times that the jackpot type that generates the “probability variation state” can be selected when the predetermined condition is satisfied is indicated. On the other hand, it may be configured to indicate information that is meaningful to the player or that is advantageous to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, it may indicate that it is a "probability fluctuation state" that does not notify the fact that it is a "probability fluctuation state", suggests that there is a continuous jackpot in the number of reserved balls, It may be configured to suggest the number of times of ST or the number of time reductions, or to present a rare and rare character image. With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

<Modification 56>
In the fourth embodiment, when the “setting suggestion effect” is executed at the timing of “round match”, when the remaining limit number and the round number match, the “remaining limit number” is displayed in the “round start display”. The direct value of the remaining number of limits was presented as a "suggested effect." On the other hand, the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” may be configured not to be a direct value but to use an ambiguous expression. Specifically, like the “setting suggestion effect”, the remaining limit number may be expressed by an expression other than the direct value, such as “even / odd suggestion”, “1 negative suggestion”, or “456 suggestion”. Then, the content of the “remaining limit number suggestion effect” is sequentially embodied by the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the number of consecutive unfavorable hits). With this configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp from the display control device may be transmitted to the audio lamp control device. Further, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of components can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received in the command determination process (S911) executed by the sound lamp control device 113. When the stop type command is received in response to the above, the change start flag may be set to ON. This makes it possible to prevent a strange variation effect from being executed when a variation pattern command is not received and a stop type command is received.

  Further, the variation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the variation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag has been turned on, a display that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the sound lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can be. In this case, at the timing when the stop type command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine a stop symbol of the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of one frame of image for which the drawing processing is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the image for one frame is always displayed at the same time interval (20 millisecond interval). Therefore, the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, in the demonstration effect, a third symbol composed of a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” may be stopped and displayed. Further, a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided, and the third symbol display device is provided. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect executed on the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, a continuous announcement effect may be executed by providing an accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. In addition, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous announcement effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous announcement effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  Thus, each time the variable effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is operated in a predetermined manner. When the sound is output from the sound output device 226 or when the illuminations 29 to 33 are turned on or off, the player can have a sense of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player normally continues the game while watching the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed, but the display of symbols by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that an unusual effect is performed on the player. Can be easily recognized. Further, the continuous announcement effect can be easily and continuously performed by a simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, actuation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination portions 29 to 33. A preview effect can be made.

  Further, if the continuous announcement effect is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous announcement effect is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 performs a lottery process at the time of start / stop judgment and the start of change, a continuous announcement effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, and a change effect is performed by the display control device 114. When performing a notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, the load can be prevented from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be reduced.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous announcement effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the audio output device 226. The continuous announcement effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling them in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute a variety of continuous announcement effects. In addition, the method of executing the continuous announcement effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , Or a combination thereof) to prepare a plurality of continuous announcement production modes that are selected in accordance with the game state (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R regular jackpot, departure) after the end of the continuous announcement effect. Is also good.

  In addition, when a continuous announcement effect is performed, an image for a continuous announcement effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous announcement effect is completed. The stop symbols to be displayed may be displayed by displaying a so-called “chance eye”, which is a combination of predetermined symbols. In this case, if it is determined in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27C) that the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 has received the continuous advance command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on, and Alternatively, other stop symbol determination flags may be set to off. In the command determination processing, after the stop identification command processing, processing corresponding to the continuous advance command is executed in other command processing, so that the chance pattern is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eyes can be definitely displayed when the fluctuation stops. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays a chance as a stop symbol for each variable effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a prize (start prize) in the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, the main control device 110 determines the number of retained balls added by “1” as the sound lamp control device 113. A description has been given of a case where the counter C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning prize and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in response to the hold ball number command notified to The type of the counter included in the ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the value of another counter. When the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired along with the winning prize, information indicating the values of the respective counters is included in the command for the number of reserved balls. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the voice lamp control device 113 may be used, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when notifying the value of each counter acquired along with the start winning prize to the sound lamp control device 113, the value of each notified counter is added to the command in the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether or not this is the case may be included. Thus, based on the information on the number of hold times included in the command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores, in one of the pre-read information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of hold times, The value of the counter can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the ball count command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the ball count command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When the command of the number of reserved balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether the jackpot is a jackpot, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, In this case, a part or all of the outliers and the like are determined, and these determination results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with a part or all of the value of the counter, It may be stored in the RAM 223.

  Further, for example, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the winning winning in the first starting port 64a may be performed in preference to the variable effect based on the winning winning in the second starting port 64b. This allows the player to pay more attention to the starting port in which the variable effect is preferentially performed.

  In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a case where two starting ports, a first starting port 64a and a second starting port 64b, are provided on the game board 13 as starting ports from which a jackpot lottery is started when a ball is entered. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding reserved ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved ball number retained with the winning in the corresponding starting port. The number may be counted. In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be held in association with the start winning in the corresponding opening may be set for each starting opening.

  When there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 to notify that the holding has been performed in accordance with the winning in the starting port includes May be included to indicate whether or not a hold has been made by winning a prize at the start port of the player. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating which of the starting ports has the fluctuation effect suspended. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball number command is received. Is set, and the variation pattern command is received. If the number of retained balls counter for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command is reduced by 1, the number of retained balls can be counted for each starting port.

  In the case where a plurality of starting ports are provided on the game board 13, the counter value obtained with each of the starting ports (winning prize) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired with the start winning prize is the command acquired with the start prize to any starting opening. Information indicating whether or not there is may be included. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 when the fluctuation is started may include information indicating a fluctuation effect associated with a start winning prize to which starting opening. . Further, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a pre-reading information storage area is prepared for each start-up opening, and the respective counter values transmitted from the main control unit 110 in accordance with the start winning at the corresponding start-up opening are stored in the RAM 223. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. Thus, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the starting opening that has detected the start winning that has triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating effect being held for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, in the case where the probability of becoming a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outdated type, and the like are different depending on the starting opening that has won the start, in the pre-reading process, whether or not each variable effect will be a jackpot, It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the miss type in the case of a miss, etc., based on which starting port is a winning start. In addition, in the case where the variable effect based on the start winning prize to one starting opening is performed in preference to the variable effect based on the starting winning prize to another starting opening, the change based on the starting winning prize to the first starting opening is performed. The pre-reading process can be performed sequentially from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of times of suspension of the variable effect, which is the most recent big hit, can be correctly determined.

  When a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 gives a continuous notice when the values of the respective counters obtained based on the winning start at the starting port are received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is determined, the continuous announcement effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time, regardless of the starting opening where the starting prize has been won. Also, a plurality of starting ports are provided, and in a pachinko machine that executes a variable effect for a winning in one starting port with priority over a variable effect for a winning in another starting port, The start of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only from the pre-read result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the starting opening where the variable effect is executed. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning in the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous announcement effect is not started for this variable effect. If a continuous announcement effect is started for a variable effect corresponding to winning in a low-priority starting opening, and if the variable effect is continuously suspended in a high-priority starting opening, the continuous announcement effect is hard to end. There is a possibility that a situation will occur. On the other hand, in the present modified example, it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting port with the lower priority. Is not started, so that such a situation can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four. It is not limited, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, for the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately for each starting port. And any number other than "." Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of retained balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b can be changed in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or an area divided into four. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of the reserved balls. A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the light emitting member. May be notified.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display that is performed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above embodiments, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 were scrolled so fast that the player could not visually recognize it was used. Thus, all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all of the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Group A: It is easy to derive a setting suggestion if you are disadvantaged before reaching the limit>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times There is also a function having a function (a so-called limiter function) for transitioning (or easily transitioning) the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first hit in which the game state after the end of the hit is changed to the first game state advantageous to the player, and the game state after the end of the hit is changed from the first game state to the player And a second winning state that transits to a second gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible (forcibly) to make a transition to the first game state without fail (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672). )).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win which is less advantageous (unfavorable) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one hit, and the number of hits is reduced to a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”) until the number of times reaches is reduced. In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of Group A has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Game machine information suggesting means (for example, “setting suggestion effect”) for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result) A determination as to whether or not the limit counter 203h is less than “6”);
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means (for example, such as a lottery result that can derive a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result) Determination of whether the limit counter 203h is equal to or greater than “6”).
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine A0 comprising: derivation mode changing means for changing the mode of deriving the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived, than when the second lottery result is derived. .

  According to the gaming machine A0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the determination information acquisition unit performs based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. Then, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the derivation mode of the gaming machine information is changed from when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means becomes the predetermined number. Even in the case where the number until reaching the game number has decreased, the game machine information deriving mode is changed and executed from the time when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the information on the gaming machine can be changed by the player, and information different from the case where the second lottery result is derived can be obtained. Disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result which is disadvantageous from the second lottery result is derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A0,
The derivation mode changing means includes:
A gaming machine A1 wherein when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A0. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing unit, the gaming machine information is configured to be more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result, in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means to the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine A2, which is suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A0 or A1. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even if the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the second lottery result is derived for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine A3, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A2. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number has decreased, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which a lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) is forcibly derived. When there is little or no difference from the game machine information, the game machine information is easily derived. Thereby, for example, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The information that does not derive the gaming machine information when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine A4 comprising non-deriving means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A3. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number arrives, it is derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If the gaming machine information is derived also in the first lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine A5 wherein it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A4. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A5,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery result is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is derived, when the continuous determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A5. That is, the continuity determining means determines whether the first lottery result is continuously derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the consecutive determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information suggesting means makes it easier to derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even if the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases continuously, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can know information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide an advantage that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, can be reduced, thereby reducing disappointment. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A5,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine A7, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A0 to A5. That is, the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means means the disadvantageous number counting means. Is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), gaming machine information is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. It is configured to be easy. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, when the number of times of derivation of the first lottery result is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even if a lot of first lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, it becomes easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine. And the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived more than the second lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A7,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67), into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and different from the first ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state where game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state where game balls can enter,
An easy ball entry state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a difficult ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the first ball entry means from the easy ball entry state. Movable means (for example, the normal electric 64c) which can be changed to
Driving means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means,
First determination information obtaining means for obtaining first determination information (for example, the value of a jackpot random number counter C1) based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second determination information obtaining unit that obtains second determination information (for example, a general map counter C4 value) based on a game ball entering the second ball input unit,
The determining means includes:
A first determination unit that determines the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit;
A second determination unit for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit,
The special game generating means,
Changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means,
The driving means,
Driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means,
A gaming machine A8 wherein the movable means is driven such that a period during which the ball is easily entered in the first game state is shorter than a period during which the ball is easily entered in the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A0 to A7. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in area. The second ball entry means different from the ball means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Further, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which game balls can enter. Then, the movable means is in an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball can easily enter the first entering means, and the entry area in which the game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter the first entering means from the easy-to-enter state. It is configured to be able to change to a ball difficult state, and the movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first judgment information is obtained by the first judgment information acquisition means provided in the judgment information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first judgment information is acquired. The second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the entering of the game ball. The first determination information provided by the first determination information obtaining means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is obtained by the second determination means provided in the determination means. The second determination information obtained by the means is determined. Further, the variable ball entry means is changed by the special game generation means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the driving unit drives the movable unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit, and the period during which the ball enters the easy ball entry state in the first game state is changed from the period during which the ball easily enters the second game state. The movable means is driven so as to be shorter. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result of the counting unit is determined. Even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A8,
The second determining means includes:
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the drive means in the second game state. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A8. That is, the second determining means determines that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Is configured. Therefore, a first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state where it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even when the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9,
The gaming machine A10, wherein the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine A10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A0 to A9. That is, the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. That is, whether the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, or is generated due to purely deriving the first lottery result. Is configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not it is.

  Conventionally, when the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to the second game state is configured to be won, while the derivation of the predetermined lottery result Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result shifting to the second gaming state. Therefore, immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When a game is played in this state, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived can be maximized, but the timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived reaches the predetermined number, that is, a predetermined number of times. After the number of derived lottery results reaches the predetermined number, after at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of derived predetermined lottery results is Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived is reduced. For this reason, when selecting a gaming machine for performing a game, a player who recognizes that the timing of derivation of a predetermined lottery result is a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number is that the obtained gaming value is reduced. By making a judgment, the game in the gaming machine may be avoided, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine A10, it is configured such that the player is not notified that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. Is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the number has been forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or has been generated by purely deriving the first lottery result. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has been reached, even if the timing is other than immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A10,
A gaming machine A11 which does not notify the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result calculated by the counting means is derived and the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A10. That is, the difference between the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not notified. That is, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is configured to be indistinguishable to the player. This makes it difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine even at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines A8 to A11,
The launch means,
In the first game state, first firing mode means (for example, control related to left-handed game) for firing a game ball in a predetermined first firing mode,
In the second game state, a second firing mode means (for example, control relating to a right-handed game) for firing a game ball in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode,
The first ball entry means,
A first launch mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball launched in the first launch mode can enter;
A second launch mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which a game ball fired in the second launch mode can enter,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine A12, wherein the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A8 to A11. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is fired in a predetermined first firing mode by the first firing mode means provided in the firing means, and in the second game state, the second firing mode provided in the firing means. By means, the game ball is fired in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode. Further, the game ball fired in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball-in means as the first ball-in means, and the game ball fired in the second shooting mode is in the first shooting mode. Second launch mode as the ball entry means The ball entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first determination means: The first lottery result or the second lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, in the case where a game ball enters the second launch mode ball entry means in the second game state, even if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result is not obtained. It can be derived and can be shifted to the first gaming state. As a result, in the second gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the second launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A12,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine A13, wherein the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine A13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A12. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means The first lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means in the first game state, even if the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is obtained. Can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the first gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the first launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group B: The contents of the setting suggestions will be embodied in the event of a disadvantage before reaching the limit>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times In addition, some have a function (a so-called limiter function) of transitioning a game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, a first hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the first gaming state and a second hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the second gaming state are provided. In preparation, the number of times a hit has occurred is counted in any case. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to make a transition to the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first hit which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second hit, the hit is counted as having occurred once, and the remaining number of times until the number of hits reaches the predetermined number (Hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”). In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of Group B has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine (for example, “setting suggestion effect”),
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result) A determination as to whether or not the limit counter 203h is less than “6”);
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means (for example, such as a lottery result that can derive a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result) Determination of whether the limit counter 203h is equal to or greater than “6”).
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is continuously derived, a suggestion specific means (for example, a suggestion content lottery table 222f) capable of embodying the gaming machine information more than when the second lottery result is derived is provided. A gaming machine B0.

  According to the gaming machine B0, a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be generated. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. Then, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the suggesting materializing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information can be materialized more than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means becomes the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, it becomes easier to recognize the gaming machine information more accurately than when the second lottery result is derived. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily recognize the information on the gaming machine easily is provided, and the first lottery that is disadvantageous to the player from the second lottery result is provided. Disappointment due to the result being derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, "the suggestion concrete means capable of embodying the gaming machine information" means, for example, direct contents (for example, "direct suggestion") so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. ) Or contents (for example, details) that are embodied (detailed) from contents (for example, “1 negative suggestion”) that are abstracted so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. In the case of deriving with "direct suggestion"), when displaying with estimable content (for example, "456 suggestion") from the content that is difficult to guess from the gaming machine information, the gaming machine information is displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the gaming machine information. In a case where the game machine information is derived in a state where it is easy to visually recognize, a case where the game machine information is derived in a state where it is easy to recognize the game machine information more accurately from an incorrect state is exemplified.

In the gaming machine B0,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine B1 comprising suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B0. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, it is easy for the player to specifically recognize the information on the set value that is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and the game in the gaming machine is performed. It is possible to provide a merit that the number of elements for determining whether or not to continue is increased, and it is possible to reduce a sense of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result which is more disadvantageous to the second lottery result for the player is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine B2, wherein, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is embodied.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B0 or B1. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily realize the gaming machine information. You. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even if the number until reaching the number has decreased, when the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which the first lottery result is forcibly derived is small or no, the gaming machine information Can be more accurately recognized. As a result, the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived, and even when approaching a situation in which the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can accurately obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit of being easy to recognize, and to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, information that does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine B3 comprising non-deriving means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B0 to B2. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number arrives, the first lottery derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. If the gaming machine information is derived also in the lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine B4 wherein the gaming machine information is abstracted when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B3. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means abstracts the gaming machine information. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to accurately recognize the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), by making it difficult to accurately recognize the gaming machine information, it is possible to create a gaming property of whether or not the gaming machine information is correctly suggested, thereby improving the interest of the gaming machine. There is an effect that.

  Note that "abstract gaming machine information" refers to, for example, a case where contents of gaming machine information are displayed in indirect contents (for example, "even-odd suggestion") so that a player is more difficult to understand (recognize). In addition, examples include a case where the game machine information is displayed in a content that is difficult to guess from the game machine information (for example, “1 negative suggestion”), a case where the game machine information is suggested in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the game machine information, and the like.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B4,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery result is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is derived, when the continuous determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is embodied. Machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B0 to B4. That is, the continuity determining means determines whether the first lottery result is continuously derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the consecutive determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is specified by the gaming machine information suggesting means. It is configured as follows. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even if the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases continuously, the gaming machine information can be more accurately recognized. Thereby, even if the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the player approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can accurately obtain information on the gaming machine. Can be easily recognized, and a sense of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, is continuously derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B4,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine B6, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information is embodied.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B0 to B4. That is, the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means means the disadvantageous number counting means. Is updated (initialized). Then, when the first lottery result is derived and the number of first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, two or more), the gaming machine information suggestion means determines the gaming machine information to be specific. It is configured to be That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even if the number until reaching the number decreases, when the number of times of derivation of the first lottery result is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information can be more accurately recognized. Thereby, even if a lot of the first lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the player approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can accurately recognize the information on the gaming machine. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B6,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67), into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and different from the first ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state where game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state where game balls can enter,
An easy ball entry state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a difficult ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the first ball entry means from the easy ball entry state. Movable means (for example, the normal electric 64c) which can be changed to
Driving means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means,
First determination information obtaining means for obtaining first determination information (for example, the value of a jackpot random number counter C1) based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second determination information obtaining unit that obtains second determination information (for example, a general map counter C4 value) based on a game ball entering the second ball input unit,
The determining means includes:
A first determination unit that determines the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit;
A second determination unit for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit,
The special game generating means,
Changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means,
The driving means,
Driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means,
A gaming machine B7 wherein the movable means is driven such that a period during which the ball is easily entered in the first game state is shorter than a period during which the ball is easily entered in the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B0 to B6. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in area. The second ball entry means different from the ball means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Further, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which game balls can enter. Then, the movable means is in an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball can easily enter the first entering means, and the entry area in which the game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter the first entering means from the easy-to-enter state. It is configured to be able to change to a ball difficult state, and the movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first judgment information is obtained by the first judgment information acquisition means provided in the judgment information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first judgment information is acquired. The second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the entering of the game ball. The first determination information provided by the first determination information obtaining means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is obtained by the second determination means provided in the determination means. The second determination information obtained by the means is determined. Further, the variable ball entry means is changed by the special game generation means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the driving unit drives the movable unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit, and the period during which the ball enters the easy ball entry state in the first game state is changed from the period during which the ball easily enters the second game state. The movable means is driven so as to be shorter. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result of the counting unit is determined. Even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B7,
The second determining means includes:
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first gaming state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. Gaming machine B8.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7. That is, the second determining means determines that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Is configured. Therefore, a first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state where it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even when the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B8,
The gaming machine B9, wherein the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines B0 to B8. That is, the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. That is, whether the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, or is generated due to purely deriving the first lottery result. Is configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not it is.

  Conventionally, when the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to the second game state is configured to be won, while the derivation of the predetermined lottery result Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result shifting to the second gaming state. Therefore, immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When a game is played in this state, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived can be maximized, but the timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived reaches the predetermined number, that is, a predetermined number of times. After the number of derived lottery results reaches the predetermined number, after at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of derived predetermined lottery results is Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived is reduced. For this reason, when selecting a gaming machine for performing a game, a player who recognizes that the timing of derivation of a predetermined lottery result is a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number is that the obtained gaming value is reduced. By making a judgment, the game in the gaming machine may be avoided, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine B9, it is configured such that the player is not notified that the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived has reached the predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived. Is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the number has been forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or has been generated by purely deriving the first lottery result. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has been reached, even if the timing is other than immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B9,
The gaming machine B10, wherein a difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result calculated by the counting means is derived and the predetermined number is not notified.

  According to the gaming machine B10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B9. That is, the difference between the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not notified. That is, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is configured to be indistinguishable to the player. This makes it difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine even at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines B7 to B10,
The launch means,
In the first game state, first firing mode means (for example, control related to left-handed game) for firing a game ball in a predetermined first firing mode,
In the second game state, a second firing mode means (for example, control relating to a right-handed game) for firing a game ball in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode,
The first ball entry means,
A first launch mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball launched in the first launch mode can enter;
A second launch mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which a game ball fired in the second launch mode can enter,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine B11, wherein the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine B11, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines B7 to B10. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is fired in a predetermined first firing mode by the first firing mode means provided in the firing means, and in the second game state, the second firing mode provided in the firing means. By means, the game ball is fired in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode. Further, the game ball fired in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball-in means as the first ball-in means, and the game ball fired in the second shooting mode is in the first shooting mode. Second launch mode as the ball entry means The ball entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first determination means: The first lottery result or the second lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even when a game ball enters the second launch mode ball entry means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the system can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the second gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the second launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine B11,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined A gaming machine B12 capable of deriving the first lottery result as the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine B12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B11. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means The first lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means in the first game state, even if the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is obtained. Can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the first gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the first launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group C: Setting suggestion changes by pulling back when reaching limit>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times In addition, some have a function (a so-called limiter function) of transitioning a game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, a first hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the first gaming state and a second hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the second gaming state are provided. In preparation, the number of times a hit has occurred is counted in any case. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to make a transition to the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first hit which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second hit, the hit is counted as having occurred once, and the remaining number of times until the number of hits reaches the predetermined number (Hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”). In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of the C group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine (for example, “setting suggestion effect”),
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, the normal time determination means that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result, Prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state to which the lottery result other than the second lottery result is derived by the arrival time determination means, the gaming machine information has been obtained before that. A gaming machine C0 comprising derivation facilitating means for facilitating the derivation (for example, increasing the winning probability of “setting suggestion effect” by adding a pull-back counter 223h).

  According to the gaming machine C0, a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be generated, and the determination information obtaining means determines whether the predetermined gaming state is satisfied. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. Then, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. If the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state to which the lottery result other than the second lottery result is derived by the arrival time determination means, the derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is provided. The facilitating means is configured so that the gaming machine information is more easily derived than before. That is, when the predetermined lottery result is newly derived during the first gaming state in which the game is shifted when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is derived to the player in the subsequent games. It is easy to be done. Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again, a merit that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is obtained. To create a gaming property of how to derive the predetermined lottery result in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine C0,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine information lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for randomly determining whether to derive the gaming machine information at a predetermined probability based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition (for example, deriving a predetermined lottery result). ),
The derivation facilitating means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a probability increasing means for increasing the predetermined probability in the gaming machine information lottery means (for example, a winning probability of “setting suggestion effect” based on an increase in a value of a withdrawal counter 223h). C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C0. That is, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined first condition, the gaming machine information lottery means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means determines whether or not to derive the gaming machine information with a predetermined probability. Then, the predetermined probability in the gaming machine information lottery means is increased by the probability information means provided in the derivation facilitating means. Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again, the execution probability of the gaming machine information increases, and the player Gives the advantage that it becomes easier to know information about the gaming machine, and how to derive the predetermined lottery result in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. This has the effect that it can be created to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
A third game state (for example, a “normal game state”) that is disadvantageous (less advantageous) to the player than the first game state is configured to be able to be generated;
The derivation facilitating means includes:
During the first gaming state or the second gaming state (while continuing), the facilitation continuation means (for example, setting the value of the retraction counter 223h to “1”) for maintaining the state in which the gaming machine information can be easily derived. Above) and
And a facilitation ending means (for example, "0" clear of a withdrawal counter 223h) for ending the state in which the gaming machine information can be easily derived when the game state shifts to the third gaming state. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C0 or C1. That is, a third game state that is disadvantageous (less advantageous) to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the first game state or the second game state is provided by the facilitation continuation unit provided in the derivation facilitation unit. During the gaming state (while continuing), the state where the gaming machine information is easily derived is maintained, and when the transition to the third gaming state is performed by the facilitation ending means similarly provided in the deriving facilitation means, The state in which the gaming machine information can be easily derived is ended. Thereby, before shifting to the third gaming state in which the state in which the gaming machine information is easily derived is ended, the game machine determines whether to derive the gaming machine information in the first gaming state or the second gaming state in which the gaming machine information is easily derived. This has the effect of creating the character and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2,
Pull-back counting means (for example, a pull-back counter 223h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determining means,
The derivation facilitating means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means in the return counting means is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Gaming machine C3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C2. That is, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means is counted by the pullback counting means. If the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means in the number-of-returns means is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the derivation facilitating means derives gaming machine information. It is configured to be easy. That is, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived anew is equal to or more than the predetermined number. Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived anew is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. By providing a merit of being easy to understand, creating a gaming property of how to derive a predetermined lottery result in a first gaming state executed when a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine C4 wherein when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C3. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result, in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means to the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine C5, which is suggestion information that suggests the set value set by the setting unit to a player.

  According to the gaming machine C5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines C0 to C4. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even if the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the second lottery result is derived for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine C6, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines C0 to C5. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even if the number until reaching the number has decreased, when the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which the first lottery result is forcibly derived is small or no, the gaming machine information Can be easily derived. As a result, the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived, and even when the situation approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived from the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The information that does not derive the gaming machine information when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine C7 comprising non-leading means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines C0 to C6. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number has come, the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number is obtained. If the gaming machine information is derived even in one lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine C8, wherein, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C7. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C8,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery result is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived when the continuous determination unit determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C0 to C8. That is, the continuity determining means determines whether the first lottery result is continuously derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the consecutive determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information suggesting means makes it easier to derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even if the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases continuously, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can know information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide an advantage that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, can be reduced, thereby reducing disappointment. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C8,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine C10, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of the first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C8. That is, the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means means the disadvantageous number counting means. Is updated (initialized). Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, when the number of times of derivation of the first lottery result is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even if a lot of first lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, it becomes easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine. And the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived more than the second lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C10,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67), into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and different from the first ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state where game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state where game balls can enter,
An easy ball entry state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a difficult ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the first ball entry means from the easy ball entry state. Movable means (for example, the normal electric 64c) which can be changed to
Driving means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means,
First determination information obtaining means for obtaining first determination information (for example, the value of a jackpot random number counter C1) based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second determination information obtaining unit that obtains second determination information (for example, a general map counter C4 value) based on a game ball entering the second ball input unit,
The determining means includes:
A first determination unit that determines the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit;
A second determination unit for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit,
The special game generating means,
Changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means,
The driving means,
Driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means,
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the movable means is driven such that a period in which the ball is easily entered in the first game state is shorter than a period in which the ball is easily entered in the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C10. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in area. The second ball entry means different from the ball means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Further, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which game balls can enter. Then, the movable means is in an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball can easily enter the first entering means, and the entry area in which the game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter the first entering means from the easy-to-enter state. It is configured to be able to change to a ball difficult state, and the movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first judgment information is obtained by the first judgment information acquisition means provided in the judgment information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first judgment information is acquired. The second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the entering of the game ball. The first determination information provided by the first determination information obtaining means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is obtained by the second determination means provided in the determination means. The second determination information obtained by the means is determined. Further, the variable ball entry means is changed by the special game generation means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the driving unit drives the movable unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit, and the period during which the ball enters the easy ball entry state in the first game state is changed from the period during which the ball easily enters the second game state. The movable means is driven so as to be shorter. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result of the counting unit is determined. Even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C11,
The second determining means includes:
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first gaming state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. Gaming machine C12.

  According to the gaming machine C12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C11. That is, the second determining means determines that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Is configured. Therefore, a first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state where it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even when the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C12,
The gaming machine C13, wherein the counting means does not notify that the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C0 to C12. That is, the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. That is, whether the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, or is generated due to purely deriving the first lottery result. Is configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not it is.

  Conventionally, when the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to the second game state is configured to be won, while the derivation of the predetermined lottery result Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result shifting to the second gaming state. Therefore, immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When a game is played in this state, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived can be maximized, but the timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived reaches the predetermined number, that is, a predetermined number of times. After the number of derived lottery results reaches the predetermined number, after at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of derived predetermined lottery results is Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived is reduced. For this reason, when selecting a gaming machine for performing a game, a player who recognizes that the timing of derivation of a predetermined lottery result is a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number is that the obtained gaming value is reduced. By making a judgment, the game in the gaming machine may be avoided, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine C13, it is configured such that the player is not notified that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. Is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the number has been forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or has been generated by purely deriving the first lottery result. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has been reached, even if the timing is other than immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C13,
The gaming machine C14, wherein a difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result calculated by the counting unit is derived and the predetermined number is not reported.

  According to the gaming machine C14, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C13. That is, the difference between the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not notified. That is, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is configured to be indistinguishable to the player. This makes it difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine even at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines C11 to C14,
The launch means,
In the first game state, first firing mode means (for example, control related to left-handed game) for firing a game ball in a predetermined first firing mode,
In the second game state, a second firing mode means (for example, control relating to a right-handed game) for firing a game ball in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode,
The first ball entry means,
A first launch mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball launched in the first launch mode can enter;
A second launch mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which a game ball fired in the second launch mode can enter,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine C15, wherein the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine C15, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C11 to C14. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is fired in a predetermined first firing mode by the first firing mode means provided in the firing means, and in the second game state, the second firing mode provided in the firing means. By means, the game ball is fired in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode. Further, the game ball fired in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball-in means as the first ball-in means, and the game ball fired in the second shooting mode is in the first shooting mode. Second launch mode as the ball entry means The ball entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first determination means: The first lottery result or the second lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even when a game ball enters the second launch mode ball entry means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the system can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the second gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the second launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C15,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine C16, wherein the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine C16, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C15. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means The first lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means in the first game state, even if the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is obtained. Can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the first gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the first launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group D: Setting suggestions are embodied by pulling back when reaching limit>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times In addition, some have a function (a so-called limiter function) of transitioning a game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, a first hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the first gaming state and a second hit that transitions the gaming state after the end of the hit to the second gaming state are provided. In preparation, the number of times a hit has occurred is counted in any case. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to make a transition to the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first hit which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second hit, the hit is counted as having occurred once, and the remaining number of times until the number of hits reaches the predetermined number (Hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”). In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of the D group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Gaming machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine (for example, “setting suggestion effect”),
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, the normal time determination means that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result, Prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means, suggestive materializing means (for example, a pullback counter 223h) capable of embodying the gaming machine information before that time. Gaming machine D0, which directly increases the winning probability of “setting suggestion effect” by adding the above.

  According to the gaming machine D0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the determination information acquisition unit performs based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. Then, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. Then, when a predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means, the suggestion materializing means provided in the gaming machine information suggestion means makes the gaming machine information more specific than before. Can be That is, when the predetermined lottery result is newly derived during the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, it is easy to more accurately recognize the gaming machine information in subsequent games. Become. Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again, the player can easily recognize the information on the gaming machine accurately. To provide a merit that the predetermined lottery result is derived in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, thereby improving the interest of the game. It is possible to achieve the effect.

  In addition, "the suggestion concrete means for materializing gaming machine information" means, for example, direct contents (for example, "direct suggestion") so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. ) Or contents (for example, details) that are embodied (detailed) from contents (for example, “1 negative suggestion”) that are abstracted so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. In the case of suggesting with "direct suggestion"), when displaying with content that can be guessed from the content that is difficult to guess from the gaming machine information (for example, "456 suggestion"), the gaming machine information is displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the gaming machine information. Is suggested in a state where it is easy to visually recognize.

In the gaming machine D0,
A gaming machine information lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for randomly determining whether to derive the gaming machine information at a predetermined probability based on the satisfaction of a predetermined first condition (for example, deriving a predetermined lottery result). )When,
When a winning lottery of the gaming machine information is won, predetermined regular gaming machine information (for example, “even-odd suggestion” effect) and special gaming machine information in which information on the gaming machine is embodied from the normal gaming machine information (for example, , "Direct suggestion" effect), and information selecting means (for example, a suggestion content lottery counter 223i).
The suggestion embodying means includes:
Special selection probability increasing means for increasing the selection probability of the special gaming machine information in the information selecting means (for example, the winning probability of the “direct suggestion” effect based on the increase in the value of the withdrawal counter 223h) is provided. A gaming machine D1 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D0. That is, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined first condition, the gaming machine information lottery means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means determines whether or not to derive the gaming machine information with a predetermined probability. In addition, in the case of winning the execution lottery of the gaming machine information, the information selecting means derives either the predetermined normal gaming machine information or the special gaming machine information in which the information regarding the game is embodied from the normal gaming machine information. Is done. Then, the selection probability of the special gaming machine information in the information selecting means is increased by the special selection probability increasing means provided in the suggesting concrete means. Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, when the predetermined lottery result is derived again, the information on the gaming machine is more specific than the normal gaming machine information. Since the execution probability of the special gaming machine information is increased, a merit that the player can easily recognize the information on the gaming machine easily is given, and it is executed when a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number. There is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming ability of deriving a predetermined lottery result in the first gaming state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1,
A third game state (for example, a “normal game state”) that is disadvantageous (less advantageous) to the player than the first game state is configured to be able to be generated;
The suggestion embodying means includes:
During the first game state or the second game state (while continuing), the embodied continuation means (for example, when the value of the pullback counter 223h is set to “1”, the state in which the special gaming machine information is easily derived is maintained. Above) and
When the game machine transitions to the third gaming state, a specific ending means (for example, "0" clearing of the withdrawal counter 223h) for ending the state in which the special gaming machine information can be easily derived is provided. Gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, a third game state that is disadvantageous (lower advantage) to the player than the first game state can be generated, and the first game state or the second game state is provided by the embodied continuation unit provided in the suggestion embodied unit. During the gaming state (while continuing), the state in which the special gaming machine information is easily derived is maintained, and when the transition to the third gaming state is performed by the instantiation means provided in the suggestive instantiation means. Thus, the state in which the special gaming machine information can be easily derived is ended. Thereby, before shifting to the third gaming state in which the state in which the special gaming machine information is easily derived ends, the special gaming machine information is suggested in the first gaming state or the second gaming state in which the special gaming machine information is easily derived. This has the effect of creating such a playability and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
Pull-back counting means (for example, a pull-back counter 223h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determining means,
The suggestion embodying means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival determination means in the return counting means is a predetermined number or more, the special gaming machine information is easily derived. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived during the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means is counted by the pullback counting means. Then, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived in the first gaming state based on the determination result of the arrival time determination means in the pullback number means is greater than or equal to the predetermined number by the suggestion materializing means, the special gaming machine information is derived. It is configured to be easily performed. That is, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the special gaming machine information is easily derived when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived again is equal to or more than the predetermined number. . Thereby, in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived anew is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. By giving the merit that it is easy to accurately recognize the game, and creating a game property of how to derive the predetermined lottery result in the first gaming state executed when the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. This has the effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine D4 wherein when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D3. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result, in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means to the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine D5, which is suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D4. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even if the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the second lottery result is derived for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine D6 wherein the gaming machine information is easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or no, when the first lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D5. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even if the number until reaching the number has decreased, when the difference between the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which the first lottery result is forcibly derived is small or no, the gaming machine information Can be easily derived. As a result, the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived, and even when the situation approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine. It is possible to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is derived from the second lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information that does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine D7 comprising non-indicating means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D6. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. Since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number has come, the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number is obtained. If the gaming machine information is derived even in one lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine D8 wherein, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine D8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D7. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D8,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery result is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived when the continuous determination unit determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived. Machine D9.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D8,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine D10, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine D10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D8. That is, the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means means the disadvantageous number counting means. Is updated (initialized). Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, when the number of times of derivation of the first lottery result is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even if a lot of first lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, it becomes easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine. And the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived more than the second lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D10,
Launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) for launching a game ball;
A first ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball fired by the firing means can enter;
A second ball entry means (for example, a through gate 67), into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and different from the first ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed between a first state where game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state where game balls can enter,
An easy ball entry state in which a game ball easily enters the first ball entry means, and a difficult ball entry state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the first ball entry means from the easy ball entry state. Movable means (for example, the normal electric 64c) which can be changed to
Driving means (for example, a normal electric solenoid) for driving the movable means,
The determination information acquisition means,
First determination information obtaining means for obtaining first determination information (for example, the value of a jackpot random number counter C1) based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means;
A second determination information obtaining unit that obtains second determination information (for example, a general map counter C4 value) based on a game ball entering the second ball input unit,
The determining means includes:
A first determination unit that determines the first determination information acquired by the first determination information acquisition unit;
A second determination unit for determining the second determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition unit,
The special game generating means,
Changing the variable ball entry means based on the determination result of the first determination means,
The driving means,
Driving the movable means based on the determination result of the second determination means,
A gaming machine D11 wherein the movable means is driven such that a period during which the ball is easily entered in the first game state is shorter than a period during which the ball is easily entered in the second game state.

  According to the gaming machine D11, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D10. That is, a game ball is fired by the firing means, and a game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the first ball-in means, and a game ball fired by the fire means is also inserted in the first ball-in area. The second ball entry means different from the ball means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Further, the variable ball entry means is configured to be changeable between a first state in which game balls are difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which game balls can enter. Then, the movable means is in an easy-to-enter state in which the game ball can easily enter the first entering means, and the entry area in which the game ball is hard to enter or cannot enter the first entering means from the easy-to-enter state. It is configured to be able to change to a ball difficult state, and the movable means is driven by the driving means. Here, the first judgment information is obtained by the first judgment information acquisition means provided in the judgment information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the first judgment information is acquired. The second determination information is obtained by the second determination information obtaining means provided in the determination information obtaining means based on the entering of the game ball. The first determination information provided by the first determination information obtaining means is determined by the first determination means provided in the determination means, and the second determination information is obtained by the second determination means provided in the determination means. The second determination information obtained by the means is determined. Further, the variable ball entry means is changed by the special game generation means based on the determination result of the first determination means. Here, the driving unit drives the movable unit based on the determination result of the second determination unit, and the period during which the ball enters the easy ball entry state in the first game state is changed from the period during which the ball easily enters the second game state. The movable means is driven so as to be shorter. That is, in the first game state, since the period in which the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means is shorter than in the second game state, the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. It is configured such that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity. As a result, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result of the counting unit is determined. Even when the number until the number of times of derivation reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D11,
The second determining means includes:
It is characterized in that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first gaming state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. Gaming machine D12.

  According to the gaming machine D12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D11. That is, the second determining means determines that the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the first game state is lower than the probability that the movable means is driven by the driving means in the second gaming state. That is, in the first game state, the probability that the movable means is driven is lower than in the second game state, so that it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. Is configured. Therefore, a first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state where it is difficult to obtain a determination opportunity by the first determination unit is derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even when the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result for shifting to the first gaming state is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is given, and the player is more disadvantageous than the second lottery result. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the first lottery result. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D12,
The gaming machine D13, wherein the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine D13, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D0 to D12. That is, the counting means does not notify that the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. That is, whether the derived first lottery result is forcibly generated when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, or is generated due to purely deriving the first lottery result. Is configured so that the player cannot determine whether or not it is.

  Conventionally, when the number of times of deriving a predetermined lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the first lottery result that cannot be forcibly shifted to the second game state is configured to be won, while the derivation of the predetermined lottery result Until the number of times reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to be able to win the second lottery result shifting to the second gaming state. Therefore, immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is the maximum. When a game is played in this state, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived can be maximized, but the timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived reaches the predetermined number, that is, a predetermined number of times. After the number of derived lottery results reaches the predetermined number, after at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of derived predetermined lottery results is Immediately after reaching the predetermined number, the number of times the second lottery result can be derived is reduced. For this reason, when selecting a gaming machine for performing a game, a player who recognizes that the timing of derivation of a predetermined lottery result is a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number is that the obtained gaming value is reduced. By making a judgment, the game in the gaming machine may be avoided, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine D13, it is configured not to notify the player that the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number, and the derived first lottery result is the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result. Is configured to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the number has been forcibly generated by reaching a predetermined number or has been generated by purely deriving the first lottery result. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has been reached, even if the timing is other than immediately after the predetermined lottery result derivation number has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D13,
A gaming machine D14 that does not report the difference between the number of times the predetermined lottery result calculated by the counting means is derived and the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine D14, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D13. That is, the difference between the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not notified. That is, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result is configured to be indistinguishable to the player. This makes it difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine even at a timing other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, thereby suppressing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. There is.

In any of the gaming machines D11 to D14,
The launch means,
In the first game state, first firing mode means (for example, control related to left-handed game) for firing a game ball in a predetermined first firing mode,
In the second game state, a second firing mode means (for example, control relating to a right-handed game) for firing a game ball in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode,
The first ball entry means,
A first launch mode ball entry means (for example, a first starting port 64a) into which a game ball launched in the first launch mode can enter;
A second launch mode ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 64b) into which a game ball fired in the second launch mode can enter,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, if the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine D15, wherein the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as a lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D15, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D11 to D14. That is, in the first game state, the game ball is fired in a predetermined first firing mode by the first firing mode means provided in the firing means, and in the second game state, the second firing mode provided in the firing means. By means, the game ball is fired in a second firing mode different from the first firing mode. Further, the game ball fired in the first shooting mode is configured to be able to enter the first shooting mode ball-in means as the first ball-in means, and the game ball fired in the second shooting mode is in the first shooting mode. Second launch mode as the ball entry means The ball entry means is configured to be able to enter the ball. Then, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first determination means: The first lottery result or the second lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, even when a game ball enters the second launch mode ball entry means in the second game state, the first lottery result can be derived and the system can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the second gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the second launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D15,
The first determining means includes:
When a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined The gaming machine D16, wherein the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D16, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D15. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means or the second launch mode ball entry means, when the number of times of derivation of a predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the first determination means The first lottery result may be derived as the predetermined lottery result. That is, when a game ball enters the first launch mode ball entry means in the first game state, even if the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the first lottery result is obtained. Can be derived and can be shifted to the first game state. As a result, in the first gaming state, the first lottery result derived based on the game ball having entered the first launch mode ball input means has reached the predetermined number of the predetermined lottery result derivation number. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the event has been forcibly generated or a result of purely deriving the first lottery result. As a result, it is difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has been derived, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times the predetermined lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

<Group E: When the number of rounds is less than the number of setting stages, change the setting suggestion timing>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images corresponding to game specifications have been displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in order to further enhance the interest of the game, the timing of display on the display device tends to be diversified (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-070451)).

  However, when designing the game specification so as to correspond to the timing at which the effect is executed, there is a possibility that the design of the game specification is restricted, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced.

  The invention of the E group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

Gaming machine information suggestion means (for example, "setting suggestion effect") for deriving gaming machine information (for example, a probability setting value) indicating which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages;
Timing selecting means (for example, a suggestion content lottery counter 223i) for selecting timing of deriving the gaming machine information by the gaming machine information suggesting means,
Special effect lottery means (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined special effect (for example, a big hit effect);
A special effect execution means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) for executing the special effect based on a lottery result of the special effect lottery means,
The special effect execution means,
A first effect mode executing means for executing a predetermined first effect condition (for example, 16 rounds big hit) as the special effect,
As the special effect, a second effect condition execution that executes a second effect condition (for example, seven or more rounds) different from the first effect condition (any one or more of the effect contents, effect period, effect number, etc.) is different. Means,
The timing selecting means includes:
As a timing of deriving the gaming machine information, a special effect selection means for selecting any one of the special effects (for example, “setting suggestion effect” in each effect timing of the jackpot effect),
When the timing selected by the special effect selection means does not arrive, the timing adjusting means for deriving the gaming machine information at the timing that always arrives in the special effect (for example, a probability setting value in the case of winning a four round big hit) A gaming machine E0 characterized in that the “setting suggestion effect” of “6” is executed as an ending effect).

  According to the gaming machine E0, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information indicating in which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages, and the timing selecting means provides the gaming machine information suggesting means. The timing for deriving information is selected. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute a predetermined special effect by the special effect lottery means, and the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means. In addition, the first effect mode execution means provided in the special effect execution means executes a predetermined first effect mode as a special effect, and the second effect mode execution means also provided in the special effect execution means performs special operation. As an effect, a second effect mode different from the first effect mode is executed. Here, one of the special effects timings is selected by the special effect selection means provided in the timing selection means as the timing of deriving the gaming machine information, and the timing selected by the special effect time selection means arrives. If not, the timing adjusting means provided in the timing selecting means derives the gaming machine information at the timing which always arrives in the special effect. Thus, it is possible to reliably derive gaming machine information at the time of executing a special effect based on any game specifications. As a result, the gaming specification of the gaming machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the gaming machine information, so that the degree of freedom in designing gaming specifications can be improved.

In the gaming machine E0,
The special effect execution means,
As the special performance,
Introductory production (for example, opening production) performed at the beginning,
After the execution of the introduction effect, a stage effect (for example, each round effect) for notifying the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages;
After the execution of the stage effect, a transition effect (for example, an ending effect) indicating that the effect is shifted from the special effect to another effect (for example, a variable effect), is configured to be executable.
The second production mode execution means,
The second production mode is configured to execute the stage production less than the first production mode by the first production mode execution means,
The timing adjusting means includes:
When the second production mode is executed by the second production mode execution means, when the timing selected by the special production time selection means does not arrive in the second production mode, the introduction production, the stage production or The gaming machine E1 wherein the gaming machine information is derived at any timing of the transition effect.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E0. That is, as a special effect performed by the special effect execution means, an introductory effect performed at the beginning of the special effect, and after the introductory effect is performed, a stage effect that notifies the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages, After the execution of the stage effect, a transition effect indicating that the effect is shifted from the special effect to another effect is configured to be executable. Then, the second effect mode execution means is configured to execute less stage effects as the second effect mode than the first effect mode by the first effect mode execution means. Here, when the second production mode is executed by the second production mode execution means, when the timing selected by the special production time selection means does not arrive in the second production mode, the introduction effect, The gaming machine information is derived at any timing of the stage effect or the transition effect. This makes it possible to reliably derive gaming machine information at the time of execution of a special effect based on any game specification and at any of the introduction effects, stage selections, and transition effects of the special effects. As a result, the gaming specification of the gaming machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the gaming machine information, so that the degree of freedom in designing gaming specifications can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1,
The first effect mode executing means and the second effect mode executing means,
At least, configured to execute either the introduction effect or the transition effect,
The timing adjusting means includes:
The gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine information is derived in the introduction effect or the transition effect when the timing selected by the special effect selecting means does not arrive.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, the first effect mode execution means and the second effect mode execution means are configured to execute at least one of the introduction effect and the transition effect. Here, when the timing selected by the special effect selection means does not arrive, the gaming machine information is derived by the timing adjusting means in the introduction effect or the derived effect. Thereby, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information at the time of execution of a special effect based on any game specification, and either an introductory effect or a transition effect that always arrives in the special effect. As a result, the gaming specification of the gaming machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the gaming machine information, so that the degree of freedom in designing gaming specifications can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2,
A gaming machine E3 comprising: a deriving lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for randomly determining whether to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine E3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E2. That is, whether or not to derive the gaming machine information is determined by the derivation lottery means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
By deriving the gaming machine information in the stage production stage corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, stage matching suggestion means (for example, indicating which state the gaming machine is in a plurality of stages is provided (for example, Execution of “setting suggestion effect” in six rounds with probability setting value “6”),
The timing adjusting means includes:
By the stage coincidence suggestion means, when the gaming machine information cannot be derived at the stage of the stage production corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, the introduction effect, any of the other stage effects or the transition effect A gaming machine E4 wherein the gaming machine information is derived at a timing.

  According to the gaming machine E4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E1 to E3. In other words, the stage matching stage suggestion means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means derives the gaming machine information at the stage of the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, so that a plurality of gaming machines are provided. Is suggested. Then, when the stage matching stage suggesting means cannot derive the gaming machine information at the stage of the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, the timing adjusting unit causes the introduction effect, any of the other stage effects or the transition effect. The gaming machine information is derived at the timing of. That is, by executing the gaming machine information in the stage effect stage corresponding to the gaming machine information stage, in a gaming machine configured to indicate which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages, When trying to derive gaming machine information, even when the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information is not executed, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information when executing another effect in the special effect Becomes Thereby, it is possible to reliably derive the gaming machine information at the time of execution of a special effect based on any game specification, and either an introductory effect or a transition effect that always arrives in the special effect. As a result, the gaming specification of the gaming machine can be designed without considering the timing of deriving the gaming machine information, so that the degree of freedom in designing gaming specifications can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E4,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a set value relating to a probability that the special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine E5, which is suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine E5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E0 to E4. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. As a result, it is possible to surely suggest to the player the suggestion information which can be a factor for determining whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately perform the effect selected by the lottery and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E5,
A predetermined first game state (for example, “probability change state”);
A second game state (for example, a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state") having a lower degree of advantage for the player than the first game state, and
When the first rendering mode is derived based on the lottery result of the special rendering lottery unit, a first transition unit (for example, “time”) that transitions the gaming state after the first rendering mode to the first gaming state. Transition to a "shortened state" or transition to a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When the second production mode is derived based on a lottery result of the special production lottery device, a second transition device (for example, “probability”) that transitions the game state after the second production mode to the second game mode. Transition to a floating state)
Counting means (for example, limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the special effect has been derived,
When the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means by a predetermined number (for example, six), the count updating means (for example, “0” of the limit counter 203h) updates (initializes) the counting result of the counting means. ") And
The special effect lottery means,
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, a normal-time determination means (for example, a limit counter 203h that can derive the first effect mode or the second effect mode as the special effect) Judge if it is less than “6”),
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h is capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second effect mode) as the special effect. "6" or more).
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine E6 wherein, when the second effect mode is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the first effect mode is derived.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E0 to E5. That is, a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be generated. Here, when the first rendering mode is derived based on the lottery result of the special rendering lottery unit, the gaming state after the first rendering mode is transitioned to the first gaming state by the first transition unit. Further, when the second effect mode is derived based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, the game state after the second effect mode is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. The number of times the special effect has been derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means by a predetermined number, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the counting updating means. Here, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be derived as the special effect by the normal time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means. Also, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means derives a lottery result other than the second effect mode as a special effect. Can be done. Then, when the second effect mode is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is configured to be more easily derived than when the first effect mode is derived. That is, the second effect mode in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the second game state which is less advantageous than the first game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number. Even if the number has decreased, it is easier to derive gaming machine information than when the first effect mode is derived. Thereby, even when the second production mode is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the player is disadvantageous (lower advantage) than the first production mode. It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the derivation of the second effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E6,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine E7, wherein the gaming machine information is easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent when the second effect mode is derived.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6. That is, when the second effect mode is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the second effect mode in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the second game state which is not advantageous to the player from the first game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even if the number of times of performing the special effect is reduced, the difference between the count value of the special effect and the predetermined number for which the lottery result other than the first effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is forcibly derived is small. Or, when there is no game machine information, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, for example, even if the second production mode disadvantageous to the player is derived, and further approaching a situation where the second production mode is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and it is possible to reduce a sense of disappointment due to the fact that the second production mode, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first production mode, is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
By the special effect lottery means, when the number of times of deriving the special effect by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and when the second effect mode is derived as the special effect, information not derived from the gaming machine information is not derived. Means, a gaming machine E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E6 or E7. That is, by the special effect lottery means, when the number of times of deriving the special effect by the counting means reaches a predetermined number and the second effect mode is derived as a special effect, the information non-deriving means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means , So as not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the second effect mode derived when the number of times the special effect is derived reaches a predetermined number, the event is disadvantageous for the player, but is an essential event, so that the gaming machine information is not derived. Be composed. In other words, since the second effect mode derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect has reached the predetermined number has arrived, the second effect mode which is derived when the number of deriving the special effect has reached the predetermined number is reached. In the case where the game machine information is derived also in the above, there is a possibility that the game machine information is frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the second effect mode derived when the number of times the special effect is derived reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived so that the gaming machine information is only obtained by the player's own pull. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game characteristic of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine E9, wherein when the first effect mode is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine E9, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E6 to E8. That is, when the first effect mode is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, the first rendering mode in which the gaming state after the special rendering is shifted from the first gaming state to the first gaming state advantageous to the player is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the compulsory When the difference from the predetermined number from which the second effect mode is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, the first effect mode advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the situation where the second effect mode is forcibly derived is reached (for example, at least one or more special effect derivation triggers are generated). Exists), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E9,
Continuous determining means for determining whether or not the second effect mode is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
In the case where the second effect mode is derived, when the continuous determining means determines that the second effect mode is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Machine E10.

  According to the gaming machine E10, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines E6 to E9. That is, it is determined by the continuous determination unit whether or not the second effect mode has been continuously derived. Then, when the second special effect mode is derived, when the continuous special determining unit determines that the first special effect is continuously derived, the gaming machine information suggesting unit makes it easy to derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, the second production mode in which the game state after the special production is shifted to the second game state, which is not advantageous to the player from the first game state, is continuously derived, and the number of times the special production is derived by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number is continuously reduced, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thus, even if the second effect mode disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the player approaches the situation where the second effect condition is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit of being easier, and to alleviate the disappointment due to the continuous derivation of the second effect mode which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E10,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the second production mode is derived,
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine E11 wherein the gaming machine information is easily derived when the number of times of the second rendering mode in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number when the second rendering mode is derived.

  According to the gaming machine E11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E6 to E10. That is, the number of times that the second effect mode is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of deriving the special effect is counted by the counting means by a predetermined number, the disadvantageous number updating means counts the number of times of the disadvantageous number counting means. The result is updated (initialized). Then, when the second production mode is derived, when the number of the second production modes in the disadvantageous number counting unit is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information suggesting unit is configured so that the gaming machine information is easily derived. . That is, the second effect mode in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the second game state which is not advantageous to the player from the first game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. When the number of times the second effect mode has been derived is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information even when the number of times the game has been performed has decreased. This makes it easier for the player to know the information on the gaming machine even when the second effect mode disadvantageous to the player is derived a lot, and even closer to the situation where the second effect condition is forcibly derived. And disappointment due to the fact that the second production mode that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first production mode is derived can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

<Group F: disadvantageous events and advantageous events, advantageous phenomena due to accumulation of disadvantageous events>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In such a gaming machine, a player plays a game while seeking an event that is advantageous to himself / herself. However, due to the design of game specifications based on the payout rate, events that are more disadvantageous than events that are advantageous to the player in the game. Is configured to appear more frequently. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game decreases due to disappointment caused by frequent occurrence of disadvantageous events for the player himself, and the game in the game machine may be stopped, and the operation of the game machine may be reduced.

  The invention of the F group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
A determination unit (for example, a change start process (S410)) for determining the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition unit;
First event generation means for generating a first event (for example, a 16-round jackpot) advantageous to the player;
Second event generating means for generating a second event (for example, four rounds big hit) having a lower (unfavorable) advantage for the player than the first event by the first event generating means;
Counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting at least the number of times the second event has been derived;
Gaming machine information suggesting means (for example, "setting suggesting effect") for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player;
Suggestion lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for performing a lottery to determine whether to derive the gaming machine information by the gaming machine information suggestion means,
The suggestion lottery means,
When the number of times the second event is derived by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a derivation facilitating means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery table 222e) that facilitates deriving the gaming machine information is provided. Gaming machine F0.

  According to the gaming machine F0, the determination information is obtained by the determination information obtaining means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. The first event generating means generates a first event advantageous to the player, and the second event generating means generates a second event having a lower degree of advantage for the player than the first event generated by the first event generating means. Is done. The counting means counts at least the number of times the second event has been derived. Here, the gaming machine information suggesting means suggests gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player, and the suggesting lottery means randomly selects whether or not to derive the gaming machine information by the gaming machine information suggesting means. When the number of times the second event is derived by the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived by the derivation facilitating means provided in the suggestion lottery means. That is, even if a second event that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first event (the game value is low or the advantage is low) is derived, the number of times the second event is derived is equal to or more than the predetermined number. In the event that the game machine information becomes unavailable, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, even when the second event is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the second event that is more disadvantageous for the player than the first event is derived. Can be alleviated due to disappointment. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F0,
The first event generating means includes:
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a 16-round jackpot) is derived as a result of the determination by the determination means, the game apparatus further comprises: a first game value providing means capable of providing the player with the first game value;
The second event generating means includes:
When a predetermined second lottery result (for example, four rounds big hit or small hit) different from the first lottery result is derived as a result of the determination by the determining means, the degree of advantage for the player is lower than the first game value. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a second game value assigning means capable of assigning a second game value to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F0. That is, when the first lottery result is derived as a result of the determination by the determining means, the first game value can be provided to the player by the first game value providing means provided in the first event generating means. Further, when a second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as a result of the determination by the determining means, the second gaming value providing means provided in the second event generating means provides the player with a higher game value than the first gaming value. A second gaming value with a low degree of advantage may be provided to the player. Thereby, even when the second game value is given to the player, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the advantage is lower for the player than the first game value. (2) Disappointment due to the provision of the game value can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, a normal-time determination means (for example, when the limit counter 203h is “6”) that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result Judge if less than)
When the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, arrival time determination means (for example, when the limit counter 203h is equal to or more than “6”) that can derive a lottery result other than the first lottery result. Determination of the case of), and
The derivation facilitating means includes:
A gaming machine F2 wherein the gaming machine information is easily derived when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not, when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1. That is, when the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting unit is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived by the normal-time determination unit provided in the determination unit. In addition, when the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means may derive a lottery result other than the first lottery result. Then, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent, the derivation facilitating means is configured so that the gaming machine information is easily derived. That is, even if the second lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (the game value is low or the degree of advantage is lower) than the first lottery result is derived, the number of times the second selection result is derived is larger. When the difference between the count value of the derivation result of the second lottery result and a predetermined number from which a lottery result (for example, a loss) other than the second lottery result is forcibly derived is small or not present, the gaming machine information is Derivation is easy. Thereby, for example, even if the second lottery result that is disadvantageous for the player is derived and the situation other than the second lottery result is forcibly derived, the information about the gaming machine can be obtained. Can be easily understood, and disappointment due to the fact that the second lottery result which is disadvantageous to the first lottery result for the player is derived can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F2,
The suggestion lottery means,
When the first lottery result is derived and the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information (for example, a setting suggestion lottery table 222e). , A gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F2. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the deriving difficulty means provided in the suggestion lottery means makes it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. Be composed. That is, when there is a large difference between the count value of the first lottery result by the counting means and the predetermined number for which a result other than the first lottery result is forcibly derived, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, when there is a margin until a situation where a lottery result other than the first lottery result is derived is derived (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery result derivation triggers exist), the gaming machine information Is difficult to derive, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F3,
A continuous determination unit (for example, a disadvantage flag 223g) for determining whether the second lottery result is continuously derived,
The derivation facilitating means includes:
In the case where the second lottery result is derived, when the continuous determination means determines that the second lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Machine F4.

  According to the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F3. That is, the continuity determining means determines whether the second lottery result is continuously derived. If the second lottery result is derived and the continuous determination means determines that the second lottery result is continuously derived, the derivation facilitating means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. Be composed. That is, the second lottery result, which is not advantageous to the player, is continuously derived from the first lottery result, and the number until the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number continuously decreases. In the case where the game machine information has been lost, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even when the second lottery result disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the situation becomes closer to a situation where a result other than the second lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information regarding the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and it is possible to alleviate the feeling of disappointment that the second lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first lottery result, is continuously derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4,
The counting means,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the second lottery result is derived,
The derivation facilitating means includes:
The gaming machine F5, wherein when the second lottery result is derived and the number of the second lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F0 to F4. That is, the number of times the second lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means provided in the counting means. Then, when the second lottery result is derived, when the number of the second lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the derivation facilitating means is configured such that the gaming machine information is easily derived. That is, even if the second lottery result that is not advantageous to the player is derived from the first lottery result and the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting unit reaches the predetermined number, the number of the second lottery result decreases. When the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive gaming machine information. Thereby, even if a lot of second lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the user approaches the situation where the second lottery result is forcibly derived, it becomes easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine. , And a sense of disappointment due to the fact that the second lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player is greater than the first lottery result can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F5,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value related to a probability that at least one lottery result of the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the determination means is derived,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine F6, which is suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine F6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines F0 to F5. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that at least one of the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the determination unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even when the second lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, and the game in the gaming machine Can be provided, and the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the second lottery result which is more disadvantageous to the first lottery result for the player is derived than the first lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F6,
The gaming machine F7, wherein the counting means does not notify that the number of times the second lottery result has been derived has reached the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines F0 to F6. That is, the counting means is configured not to notify that the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result has reached the predetermined number. That is, whether a lottery result other than the derived second lottery result is forcibly generated by the number of times the second lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, or a purely lottery result other than the second lottery result. It is configured such that it is not possible for a player to determine whether or not it is caused by the derivation.

  When the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, it is configured to forcibly win a lottery result other than the first lottery result, while the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number. Up to this point, the first lottery result can be won. Therefore, immediately after the number of times the second lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived as the lottery result is the maximum. When playing a game in this state, the number of times that the first lottery result can be derived can be maximized, while the timing other than immediately after the number of times that the second lottery result is derived reaches the predetermined number, that is, the second After the number of times the lottery result is derived reaches a predetermined number, after at least one or more second lottery results are derived, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived is not the maximum, and the number of times the second lottery result is derived is Immediately after the number reaches the predetermined number, the number of times the first lottery result can be derived is reduced. For this reason, when selecting a gaming machine for performing a game, the player who recognizes that the timing of derivation of the second lottery result is a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number is that the obtained gaming value is reduced. By making a judgment, the game in the gaming machine may be avoided, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine F7, it is configured not to notify the player that the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result has reached the predetermined number, and the lottery result other than the derived first lottery result is changed to the second lottery. It is difficult for the player to determine whether the result has been forcibly generated when the number of times of derivation of the result has reached the predetermined number or whether it has been generated purely by deriving a lottery result other than the first lottery result. The configuration is as follows. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the timing is immediately after the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result has been reached, and even if the timing is other than immediately after the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result has reached the predetermined number. There is an effect that it is difficult to avoid a game in the gaming machine, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F7,
The gaming machine F8, wherein a difference between the number of times the second lottery result calculated by the counting means is derived and the predetermined number is not reported.

  According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7. That is, the difference between the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result counted by the counting means and the predetermined number is not notified. That is, the number of times that the second lottery result can be derived cannot be determined by the player. As a result, even when the number of times of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the game in the gaming machine is hardly shunned even at a timing other than immediately after reaching the predetermined number, and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. There is.

<Group G: Set the number of rounds more than the setting stage, and suggest setting effects in each round>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines, various effect images corresponding to game specifications have been displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in order to further enhance the interest of the game, the timing of display on the display device tends to be diversified (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-070451)).

  However, in the above gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately perform the selected effect to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of the group G has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has an effect that it is possible to appropriately perform the selected effect and improve the interest of the game. It is intended to provide a gaming machine.

Game machine information suggestion means (for example, “setting suggestion effect”) that suggests to the player gaming machine information (for example, a probability setting value) indicating which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages). )When,
A suggestion lottery means (for example, a setting suggestion lottery counter 223f) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the gaming machine information is suggested to a player;
A timing selecting means (for example, a suggestion content lottery counter 223i) for selecting a derivation timing of the gaming machine information when suggesting the gaming machine information to a player based on a lottery result of the suggesting lottery means;
Special effect lottery means (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined special effect (for example, a big hit effect);
A special effect execution means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) for executing the special effect based on a lottery result of the special effect lottery means,
The special effect execution means,
As the special performance,
Introductory production (for example, opening production) performed at the beginning,
After the execution of the introduction effect, a stage effect (for example, each round effect) for notifying the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages;
After the execution of the stage effect, a transition effect (for example, an ending effect) indicating that the effect is shifted from the special effect to another effect (for example, a variable effect), is configured to be executable.
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
By executing the gaming machine information at the stage effect stage corresponding to the gaming machine information stage, stage matching suggestion means (for example, indicating which state the gaming machine is in a plurality of stages is provided (for example, Execution of “setting suggestion effect” in six rounds with probability setting value “6”),
The special game execution means,
A plurality of the special effects in which the number of the stage effects are different are each configured to be executable, and in all the special effects, the number of the stage effects is equal to or more than the number of stages of the gaming machine information, Gaming machine G0.

  According to the gaming machine G0, the gaming machine information indicating means derives the gaming machine information indicating which state the gaming machine is provided in a plurality of stages to the player, and the gaming machine information is indicated by the suggesting lottery means. Whether or not to suggest to the player is determined by lottery, and when the game machine information is suggested to the player based on the lottery result of the suggestion lottery means, the timing selection means selects the timing of deriving the game machine information. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute a predetermined special effect by the special effect lottery means, and the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means. Here, as a special effect performed by the special effect execution means, an introductory effect executed at the beginning of the special effect, and a stage effect of notifying the progress of the special effect in a plurality of stages after execution of the introductory effect, After the execution of the stage effect, a transition effect indicating transition from the special effect to another effect is configured to be executable. In addition, the stage matching stage suggestion means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means executes the gaming machine information in the stage of the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information, so that a plurality of gaming machines are provided. Is suggested. Here, the special game execution means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of special effects each having a different number of stage effects, and in all the special effects, the number of stage effects equal to or more than the number of stages of the gaming machine information is executed. You. That is, when each special effect is executed, in each case, the stage effect of the number of stages of the gaming machine information or more is executed, so that the stage effect corresponding to the stage of the gaming machine information regardless of the lottery result. It is possible to execute the gaming machine information at the stage. This allows the gaming machine information to be reliably executed regardless of the stage at which the stage effect is selected by lottery, and prevents an event in which the gaming machine information is not executed due to the absence of the initially set stage effect. Then, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately perform the selected effect and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the gaming machine information can be reliably executed at the execution timing of the selected gaming machine information, there is no need to change the execution timing of the selected gaming machine information to another timing, thereby reducing the control burden. There is an effect that can be. In particular, when the timing is changed to another timing, the execution of the gaming machine information is biased toward the other timing, so that the bias of the timing at which the gaming machine information is executed can be prevented beforehand. is there.

In the gaming machine G0,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a set value relating to a probability that the special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means,
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine G1 comprising suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G0. That is, the setting means is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a special effect is derived by the special effect lottery means. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. As a result, it is possible to surely suggest to the player the suggestion information which can be a factor for determining whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to appropriately perform the effect selected by the lottery and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G0 or G1,
The special game execution means,
First special effect execution means for executing a predetermined first special effect (for example, execution control for a six round jackpot);
Second special effect execution means (for example, execution control for a 16-round jackpot) for executing a second special effect more advantageous to the player than the first special effect executed by the first special effect execution means,
A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
When the first special effect is derived based on a lottery result of the special effect lottery means, first transition means (for example, “time”) that transitions the game state after the first special effect to the first game state. Transition to a "shortened state" or transition to a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When the second special effect is derived on the basis of the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, a second transition means (for example, “probability” that shifts the game state after the second special effect to the second game state) Transition to a floating state)
Counting means (for example, limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the special effect has been derived,
When the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means by a predetermined number (for example, six), the count updating means (for example, “0” of the limit counter 203h) updates (initializes) the counting result of the counting means. ") And
The special effect lottery means,
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h may derive the first special effect or the second special effect as the special effect). Judge if it is less than “6”),
When the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means (for example, the limit counter 203h is capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second special effect) as the special effect. "6" or more).
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine G2 wherein, when the first special effect is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second special effect is derived.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G0 or G1. That is, the first special effect execution means provided in the special effect execution means executes a predetermined first special effect, and the second special effect execution means also provided in the special effect execution means executes the first special effect execution. A second special effect that is more advantageous to the player than the first special effect performed by the means is executed. In addition, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated. Here, when the first special effect is derived based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, the game state after the first special effect is shifted to the first game state by the first shift means. Further, when the second special effect is derived based on the lottery result of the special effect lottery means, the game state after the second special effect is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. The number of times the special effect has been derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the counting means by a predetermined number, the counting result of the counting means is updated by the counting updating means. Here, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is less than a predetermined number, the first special effect or the second special effect can be derived as the special effect by the normal time determination means provided in the special effect lottery means. If the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means has reached a predetermined number, the arrival determination means provided in the special effect lottery means derives a lottery result other than the second special effect as a special effect. Can be done. Then, when the first special effect is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second special effect is derived. That is, the first special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the first game state, which is less advantageous than the second game state, is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number. Even if the number has decreased, it is easier to derive gaming machine information than when the second special effect is derived. Thereby, even when the first special effect is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the player is disadvantageous (lower advantage) than the second special effect. Disappointment due to the first special effect being derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine G3, wherein when the first special effect is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or absent, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2. That is, when the first special effect is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player from the second game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number. Even if the number before the game is reduced, the difference between the count value of the special effect and the predetermined number for which the lottery result other than the second special effect (for example, the first special effect) is forcibly derived is small. Or, when there is no game machine information, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, for example, even if the first special effect that is disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation approaches that the first special effect is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and it is possible to reduce a feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first special effect that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second special effect is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The special effect lottery means, wherein the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and when the first special effect is derived as the special effect, the gaming machine information is not derived. Gaming machine G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine G2 or G3. That is, when the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches a predetermined number by the special effect lottery means and the first special effect is derived as a special effect, the gaming machine information suggesting means does not derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, in the case of the first special effect that is derived when the number of times the special effect is derived reaches a predetermined number, although it is a disadvantageous event for the player, it is an essential event, so that the gaming machine information is not derived. Be composed. That is, since the first special effect derived when the number of times of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number arrives, the first special effect which is derived when the number of deriving the special effect reaches the predetermined number In the case where the game machine information is derived also in the above, there is a possibility that the game machine information is frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first special effect which is derived when the number of times the special effect is derived reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived so that the gaming machine information can be obtained only by the player's own pull. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game characteristic of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
A gaming machine G5 wherein it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large when the second special effect is derived.

  According to the gaming machine G5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G2 to G4. That is, when the second special effect is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted from the first game state to the second game state advantageous to the player is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forced When the difference from the predetermined number at which the first special effect is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second special effect that is advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the situation where the first special effect is forcibly derived (for example, at least one or more special effect derivation triggers). Exists), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived and to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G5,
Continuous determining means for determining whether the first special effect has been continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
In the case where the first special effect is derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived when the continuous determining unit determines that the first special effect is continuously derived. Machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G5. That is, the continuous determination unit determines whether the first special effect has been continuously derived. Then, when the first special effect is derived, when the continuous special determination unit determines that the first special effect is continuously derived, the gaming machine information suggesting unit makes it easy to derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, the first special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the first game state, which is not advantageous to the player from the second game state, is continuously derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means is predetermined. Even if the number until reaching the number is continuously reduced, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thus, even if the first special effect disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the player approaches the situation in which the first special effect is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the first special effect, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second special effect, can be eased and a feeling of disappointment can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G2 to G6,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first special effect is derived,
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times the special effect is derived is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means;
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine G7, wherein, when the first special effect is derived, when the number of the first special effects in the disadvantage count means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine G7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G2 to G6. That is, the number of times the first special effect is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of deriving the special effect is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means counts the number of times of the disadvantageous number counting means. The result is updated (initialized). When the first special effect is derived and the number of first special effects in the disadvantageous number counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive gaming machine information. . That is, the first special effect in which the game state after the special effect is shifted to the first game state which is not advantageous to the player from the second game state is derived, and the number of times the special effect is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number. When the number of times the first special effect is derived is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is easily derived even when the number of times the game has been performed is reduced. This makes it easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine, even when the first special effect that is disadvantageous to the player is much derived and the player approaches the situation where the first special effect is forcibly derived. And the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first special effect disadvantageous to the player is more derived than the second special effect can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

<H group: Limit measurement with only the number of advantageous hits>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times There is also a function having a function (a so-called limiter function) for transitioning (or easily transitioning) the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first hit in which the game state after the end of the hit is changed to the first game state advantageous to the player, and the game state after the end of the hit is changed from the first game state to the player And a second winning state that transits to a second gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible (forcibly) to make a transition to the first game state without fail (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672). )).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win which is less advantageous (unfavorable) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one hit, and the number of hits is reduced to a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”) until the number of times reaches is reduced. In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of the H group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the second lottery result is derived among the predetermined lottery results;
When the number of times the second lottery result is derived is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Game machine information suggesting means (for example, “setting suggestion effect”) for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result) A determination as to whether or not the limit counter 203h is less than “6”);
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means (for example, such as a lottery result that can derive a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result) Determination of whether the limit counter 203h is equal to or greater than “6”).
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine H0 wherein, when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine H0, a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be generated. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. The counting unit counts the number of times the second lottery result is derived from the predetermined lottery result, and counts the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting unit. , The counting result of the counting means is updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is configured to be more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, when the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is predetermined. The number until the number is reached does not decrease, and the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine H1 comprising suggestion information for suggesting the set value set by the setting means to a player.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H0. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even if the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the second lottery result is derived for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine H2, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H0 or H1. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, even when the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, the count value of the second derived result and the forced When the difference from a predetermined number from which lottery results other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) are derived is small or absent, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Thereby, for example, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the second lottery result is provided to the player from the second lottery result. Disappointment due to the detrimental first lottery result being derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and when the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, information that does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine H3 comprising non-leading means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H0 to H2. That is, when the number of times the second lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because the event is disadvantageous for the player but is an essential event. It is configured as follows. That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivations of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number arrives, it is derived when the number of derivation of the second lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If the gaming machine information is derived also in the first lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the second lottery result reaches a predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine H4, wherein when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H0 to H3. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, the second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted from the first gaming state to the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player is derived, and the counting value of the second lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

<Group I: Change the derivation probability of disadvantageous jackpot at the time of limit>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a special symbol low probability state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, a special symbol high probability state). Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number In addition, there is a function having a function (a so-called limiter function) of transiting (or easily transiting) the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672). No.)).

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, but there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The invention of Group I has been made in view of the above circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
A first probability deriving unit that can derive a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “hour reduction A” or “latent probability change A”) with a predetermined first probability as the predetermined lottery result;
A second probability deriving unit that can derive, as the predetermined lottery result, a predetermined second lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “probable change A”) different from the first lottery result with a predetermined second probability;
When the first lottery result is derived, first transition means (for example, transition to a "time reduction state" or transition to a "time reduction state" or a "probability of latency") for transitioning the gaming state after the special gaming state to the first gaming state. Transition to a floating state)
When the second lottery result (for example, the jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived, a second shift unit (for example, “probability change state”) that shifts the game state after the special game state to the second game state ")
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Game machine information suggesting means (for example, “setting suggestion effect”) for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result can be derived with the first derived probability as the predetermined lottery result, and the second derived probability can be derived. A normal determination means (for example, a determination as to whether the limit counter 203h is less than "6") which can derive the second lottery result.
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the predetermined lottery result is the third derivation probability higher than the first derivation probability and the second derivation probability. Arrival time determining means capable of deriving one lottery result (for example, a determination as to whether the limit counter 203h is “6” or more).
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine I0, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine I0, a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state can be generated. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, a predetermined first lottery result can be derived with a predetermined first probability as a predetermined lottery result by the first probability deriving means, and a first lottery result can be derived as a predetermined lottery result by the second probability deriving means. A second lottery result different from the result may be derived with a predetermined second probability. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means, and when the second lottery result is derived, the second shifting means is used. Thereby, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state. Further, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Then, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result is derived with the first derivation probability as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. And the second lottery result may be derived or the second lottery result may be derived with the second derivation probability. When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result from the first derivation probability and the second derivation probability. The first lottery result can be derived with a high third derivation probability. Then, when the first lottery result is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information is configured to be more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result, in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means to the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0,
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
The gaming machine information is
A gaming machine I1 comprising suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I0. That is, the setting unit is configured to be able to change a set value relating to a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, the gaming machine information is set as suggestion information for suggesting to the player the set value set by the setting means. Thereby, even if the first lottery result is derived, the player can easily know the information on the set value which is the probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived, and whether or not to continue the game in the gaming machine It is possible to reduce the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is disadvantageous to the second lottery result is derived for the player. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine I2, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I0 or I1. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number has decreased, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which a lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) is forcibly derived. When there is little or no difference from the game machine information, the game machine information is easily derived. Thereby, for example, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information that does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine I3 comprising non-leading means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines I0 to I2. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number arrives, it is derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If the gaming machine information is derived also in the first lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine I4, wherein when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines I0 to I3. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

<Group J: Timing of Deriving Multiple Advantageous Information>
Conventionally, a lottery such as winning is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. For example, when a winning is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player in accordance with establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

  In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (for example, a high probability state of a special symbol) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Until a predetermined number of hits occur, the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game can be changed to the second game state, while the number of hits reaches the predetermined number of times There is also a function having a function (a so-called limiter function) for transitioning (or easily transitioning) the game state corresponding to or after the end of the game to the first game state.

  Specifically, for example, as the types of wins, the first hit in which the game state after the end of the hit is changed to the first game state advantageous to the player, and the game state after the end of the hit is changed from the first game state to the player And a second winning state that transits to a second gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player. Until the predetermined number of hits occurs, the first hit and the second hit are configured to be derivable, respectively, while if the number of hits reaches the predetermined number, the second hit is determined as the hit type. Is derived and only the first hit is derived. With such a configuration, when the number of hits reaches a predetermined number, it is possible (forcibly) to make a transition to the first game state without fail (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295672). )).

  In such a gaming machine, even if the player wins the first win which is less advantageous (unfavorable) for the player than the second win, it is counted as one hit, and the number of hits is reduced to a predetermined number. It is configured such that the remaining number of times (hereinafter, may be referred to as “remaining number of times”) until the number of times reaches is reduced. In such a case, the player is disappointed by the fact that the first hit that is disadvantageous to the player, not the second hit that is advantageous to the player, occurs despite the fact that the player has won the odd hit, and the second hit is reduced. Combined with the disappointment due to approaching the predetermined number of times that the remaining number of hits that can occur is reduced and the first hit is forcibly generated, the willingness to play decreases, and the game in the gaming machine is stopped. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  The invention of the J group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play.

A predetermined first game state (for example, “time reduction state” or “latency probability change state”);
A second gaming state (eg, “probability variation state”) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means (for example, the first startup port 64a) for obtaining determination information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, winning in the first startup port 64a);
Determining means (for example, a variation start process (S410)) for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means;
A special game generating means for generating a special game state (for example, a jackpot game) capable of giving a predetermined game value to a player based on a predetermined lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning) being derived by the determination means. (For example, a special winning opening opening / closing control process (S509)).
Setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means;
When a predetermined first lottery result (for example, a jackpot type “time saving A” or “latent probability change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the first gaming state. (E.g., a transition to a "time reduction state" or a "latency probability fluctuation state"),
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, jackpot type “probable change A”) is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is changed to the second gaming state. Second transition means for transition to a state (for example, transition to a “probability variation state”);
A counting means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
When the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by a predetermined number (for example, six) by the counting means, a count updating means (for example, a limit counter 203h) for updating (initializing) the counting result of the counting means. "0" clear)
Game machine information suggesting means (for example, “setting suggestion effect”) for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the normal time determination means (for example, the first lottery result or the second lottery result can be derived as the predetermined lottery result) A determination as to whether or not the limit counter 203h is less than “6”);
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means (for example, such as a lottery result that can derive a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result) Determination of whether the limit counter 203h is equal to or greater than “6”).
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
Setting information suggesting means (for example, “setting suggesting effect”) that suggests setting value information regarding the setting value set by the setting means as the gaming machine information;
Number information suggesting means (for example, “remaining limit number suggestion effect”) that suggests the number information regarding the number of derivations counted by the counting means as the gaming machine information,
Start timing non-overlapping means (for example, "round start display") that executes the suggestion start timing of the setting value information by the setting information suggesting means and the suggestion start timing of the number information by the number information suggesting means so as not to overlap. A gaming machine J0 characterized by having a “remaining limit number suggestion effect” and a “setting suggestion effect” in the display of the total number of prize balls during a round game).

  According to the gaming machine J0, a predetermined first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state can be generated. The determination information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means is determined by the determination means. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, the special game generating means generates a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be given to the player. Here, the setting unit is configured to be able to set a setting value regarding a probability that a predetermined lottery result by the determining unit is derived. Then, when the predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state by the first shifting means. Further, when a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the game state after the special game state is shifted to the second game state by the second shift means. Then, the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived is counted by the counting means, and when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the counting result of the counting means is counted by the counting updating means. Be updated. Further, the gaming machine information suggesting means derives gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine. Here, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result by the normal time determination means provided in the determining means. In addition, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the arrival time determination means provided in the determination means determines the predetermined lottery result as a result other than the second lottery result. A lottery result may be derived. Here, the setting information suggesting means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means suggests setting value information regarding the set value set by the setting means as gaming machine information, and the number of times information also provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means. The suggestion means suggests, as the gaming machine information, the number-of-times information on the number of times of derivation counted by the counting means. Then, by the start timing non-overlapping means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the suggestion start timing of the setting value information by the setting information suggesting means and the suggestion start timing of the number information by the number information suggesting means do not overlap. Be executed. This prevents in advance from oversight of either one of the set value information and the count information due to the duplicate execution of the set value information and the count information, and complicates the player with the contents of the set value information and the count information. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is performed and to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

In the gaming machine J0,
The gaming machine suggestion informing means,
A gaming machine J1 comprising: a derivation mode changing unit configured to change a derivation mode of the gaming machine information when the first lottery result is derived, when the second lottery result is derived. .

  According to the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J0. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the derivation mode of the gaming machine information is changed from when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means becomes the predetermined number. Even in the case where the number until reaching the game number has decreased, the game machine information deriving mode is changed and executed from the time when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the information on the gaming machine can be changed by the player, and information different from the case where the second lottery result is derived can be obtained. Disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result which is disadvantageous from the second lottery result is derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1,
The derivation mode changing means includes:
A gaming machine J2, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived.

  According to the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0 or J1. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the derivation mode changing unit, the gaming machine information is configured to be more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result, in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means to the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, the gaming machine information is more easily derived than when the second lottery result is derived. Thereby, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily know the information on the gaming machine is provided, and the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second lottery result is derived. This can alleviate the disappointment caused by being performed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J2,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the first lottery result is continuously derived, there is provided a suggestion materializing unit (for example, a suggestion content lottery table 222f) capable of embodying the gaming machine information more than when the second lottery result is derived. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines J0 to J2. That is, when the first lottery result is derived by the suggestion materializing means provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means, the gaming machine information can be embodied more than when the second lottery result is derived. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous than the second gaming state, is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means becomes the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the game machine is reduced, it becomes easier to recognize the gaming machine information more accurately than when the second lottery result is derived. As a result, even when the first lottery result is derived, the advantage that the player can easily recognize the information on the gaming machine easily is provided, and the first lottery that is disadvantageous to the player from the second lottery result is provided. Disappointment due to the result being derived can be reduced. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, "the suggestion concrete means capable of embodying the gaming machine information" means, for example, direct contents (for example, "direct suggestion") so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. ) Or contents (for example, details) that are embodied (detailed) from contents (for example, “1 negative suggestion”) that are abstracted so that the player can easily understand (recognize) the contents of the gaming machine information. In the case of deriving with "direct suggestion"), when displaying with estimable content (for example, "456 suggestion") from the content that is difficult to guess from the gaming machine information, the gaming machine information is displayed in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the gaming machine information. In a case where the game machine information is derived in a state where it is easy to visually recognize, a case where the game machine information is derived in a state where it is easy to recognize the game machine information more accurately from an incorrect state is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J3,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine J4, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J3. That is, when the first lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is small or not present, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to easily derive the gaming machine information. . That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number has decreased, the count value of the predetermined derivation result and the predetermined number for which a lottery result other than the second lottery result (for example, the first lottery result) is forcibly derived. When there is little or no difference from the game machine information, the game machine information is easily derived. Thereby, for example, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived and the situation approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can obtain information on the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a merit that the player can easily understand, and to alleviate the disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result that is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result is derived. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J4,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information that does not derive the gaming machine information. A gaming machine J5 comprising non-leading means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J4. That is, when the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means reaches the predetermined number and the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, the information non-derivation provided in the gaming machine information suggesting means is performed. The means is configured not to derive gaming machine information. That is, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived because it is an indispensable event for the player but an essential event. It is configured as follows. That is, since the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number arrives, it is derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number. If the gaming machine information is derived also in the first lottery result, the gaming machine information may be frequently derived. Therefore, in the case of the first lottery result derived when the number of derivation of the predetermined lottery result reaches the predetermined number, the gaming machine information is not derived, so that the gaming machine is only pulled by the player himself. As the information is derived, there is an effect that it is possible to create a gaming property of determining whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J5,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine J6, wherein when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value of the counting means and the predetermined number is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information.

  According to the gaming machine J6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines J0 to J5. That is, when the second lottery result is derived, when the difference between the count value in the counting means and the predetermined number is large, the gaming machine information suggesting means is configured to make it difficult for the gaming machine information to be derived. That is, a second lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state which is more advantageous for the player than the first gaming state is derived, and the count value of the predetermined lottery result by the counting means and the forcing When the difference from the predetermined number from which the first lottery result is derived is large, it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information. As a result, a second lottery result advantageous to the player is derived, and further, there is a margin until the first lottery result is forcibly reached (for example, at least one or more predetermined lottery results are derived). When there is an opportunity), it is difficult to derive the gaming machine information, and by increasing the rarity of the gaming machine information, it is possible to create the gaming ability of whether or not the gaming machine information is derived, and to make the game more interesting. There is an effect that improvement can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J6,
Continuous determination means for determining whether the first lottery result is continuously derived,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
In the case where the first lottery result is derived, when the consecutive determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information is easily derived. Machine J7.

  According to the gaming machine J7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines J0 to J6. That is, the continuity determining means determines whether the first lottery result is continuously derived. Then, when the first lottery result is derived, when the consecutive determination means determines that the first lottery result is continuously derived, the gaming machine information suggesting means makes it easier to derive the gaming machine information. It is composed of That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state, which is less advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is continuously derived, and the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting unit. Even if the number until the number reaches the predetermined number decreases continuously, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even when the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is continuously derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, the player can know information about the gaming machine. It is possible to provide an advantage that the first lottery result, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the second lottery result, can be reduced, thereby reducing disappointment. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J6,
Disadvantageous number counting means for counting the number of times the first lottery result is derived;
An unfavorable number updating means for updating (initializing) the counting result of the unfavorable number counting means when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the predetermined number by the counting means,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
The gaming machine J8, wherein when the first lottery result is derived, when the number of the first lottery result in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more, the gaming machine information is easily derived.

  According to the gaming machine J8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J0 to J6. That is, the number of times the first lottery result is derived is counted by the disadvantageous number counting means, and when the number of times of derivation of the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means, the disadvantageous number updating means means the disadvantageous number counting means. Is updated (initialized). When the first lottery result is derived and the number of first lottery results in the disadvantageous number counting means is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more), gaming machine information is derived by the gaming machine information suggesting means. It is configured to be easy. That is, the first lottery result in which the gaming state after the special gaming state is shifted to the first gaming state which is not more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state is derived, and the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is determined by the predetermined number. Even when the number until reaching the number decreases, when the number of times of derivation of the first lottery result is a predetermined number or more, it is easy to derive the gaming machine information. Thereby, even if a lot of first lottery results disadvantageous to the player are derived and the user approaches the situation where the first lottery result is forcibly derived, it becomes easier for the player to know information about the gaming machine. And the feeling of disappointment due to the fact that the first lottery result disadvantageous to the player is derived more than the second lottery result can be alleviated. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from getting upset with respect to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A13, the gaming machines B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to any configuration of the gaming machines B0 to B12, the gaming machines A0 to A13, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C16, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D16, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E11, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, with respect to any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F7, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, H0 to H4, and I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H4, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, I0 A configuration limited to any one of I4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  It should be noted that, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I4, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H4, J0 to J8 may be applied.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines J0 to J8, the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, and I0 Alternatively, the configuration limited to any one of I4 to I4 may be applied.

  In these cases, further effects due to the application of each configuration can be obtained.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, J0 to J8, A gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, J0 to J8, A gaming machine Z2, which is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A0 to A13, B0 to B12, C0 to C16, D0 to D16, E0 to E11, F0 to F7, G0 to G7, H0 to H4, I0 to I4, J0 to J8, A gaming machine Z3 which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64a 1st starting port (part of determination information acquisition means, part of first ball entry means, part of first launch mode ball entry means)
64b 2nd starting port (part of 2nd launch mode ball entry means)
64c normal electric work (part of movable means)
65 Variable winning device (part of variable ball entry means)
67 Through gate (part of the second ball entry means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of gaming machine information suggestion means, part of special effect execution means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of launching means)
203h limit counter (part of counting means)
222e Setting suggestion lottery table (part of derivation facilitation means)
222f Suggestion content lottery table (part of suggestion embodying means)
223d Set value memory (part of setting means)
223e Sub limit counter (part of counting means)
223f Setting suggestion lottery counter (part of derivation facilitation means, part of gaming machine information lottery means, part of suggestion lottery means)
223g Non-performing flag (part of continuous discrimination means)
223h Withdrawal counter (part of derivation facilitation means, part of probability increase means, part of facilitation continuation means, part of pullback counting means, part of suggestion materialization means, part of materialization continuation means)
223i Suggestion content lottery counter (part of information selection means, part of timing selection means)
501 Setting key (part of setting means)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of special production lottery method)
S410 Change start processing (part of the judgment means)
S509 Big winning opening opening / closing control processing (part of special game generating means)
S561 (part of the counting and updating means)
S1216 (part of the facilitation end means, part of the embodyment end means)

Claims (1)

A predetermined first gaming state;
A second gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and
Determination information obtaining means for obtaining determination information based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition;
Determining means for determining the determination information obtained by the determination information obtaining means,
Based on the fact that a predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means, a special game generating means for generating a special game state capable of giving a predetermined game value to the player,
Setting means capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability that the predetermined lottery result is derived by the determining means,
A first transition unit that transitions a game state after the special game state to the first game state when a predetermined first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result;
When a predetermined second lottery result different from the first lottery result is derived as the predetermined lottery result, a second shift unit that shifts a game state after the special game state to the second game state,
Counting means for counting the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived,
Count updating means for updating the counting result of the counting means, when the number of times of deriving the predetermined lottery result is counted by the counting means,
Game machine information suggesting means for suggesting gaming machine information relating to the gaming machine to the player,
The determining means includes:
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means is less than the predetermined number, as the predetermined lottery result, the normal time determination means that can derive the first lottery result or the second lottery result,
When the number of times the predetermined lottery result is derived by the counting means has reached the predetermined number, arrival time determination means capable of deriving a lottery result other than the second lottery result as the predetermined lottery result, Prepared,
The gaming machine information suggesting means,
Setting information suggesting means for suggesting setting value information regarding the setting value set by the setting means as the gaming machine information,
Number information suggesting means for suggesting, as the gaming machine information, frequency information on the number of derivations counted by the counting means,
Start timing non-overlapping means for executing the set value information suggestion start timing by the setting information suggestion means and the number information suggestion start timing by the number information suggestion means so as not to overlap. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

Images